This is a modern-English version of Zetetic astronomy: Earth not a globe!: An experimental inquiry into the true figure of the earth etc., originally written by Parallax. It has been thoroughly updated, including changes to sentence structure, words, spelling, and grammar—to ensure clarity for contemporary readers, while preserving the original spirit and nuance. If you click on a paragraph, you will see the original text that we modified, and you can toggle between the two versions.

Scroll to the bottom of this page and you will find a free ePUB download link for this book.

Please see the Transcriber’s Notes at the end of this text.

Please see the Transcriber’s Notes at the end of this text.

The cover image has been created for this e-text, and is in the public domain.

The cover image has been made for this e-text and is in the public domain.


Cover image

[Entered at Stationer’s Hall.]

[Entered at the Stationer's Hall.]


ZETETIC ASTRONOMY.
EARTH IS NOT A GLOBE!

AN EXPERIMENTAL INQUIRY
INTO THE
TRUE FIGURE OF THE EARTH:
PROVING IT A PLANE,
WITHOUT AXIAL OR ORBITAL MOTION;
AND THE

ONLY MATERIAL WORLD
IN
THE UNIVERSE!

AN EXPERIMENTAL INQUIRY
INTO THE
ACTUAL SHAPE OF THE EARTH:
PROVING IT'S FLAT,
WITHOUT ANY AXIAL OR ORBITAL MOVEMENT;
AND THE

ONLY PHYSICAL WORLD
IN
THE UNIVERSE!


BY “PARALLAX.”

BY “PARALLAX.”

London:
SIMPKIN, MARSHALL, AND CO., STATIONERS’ HALL COURT.
Bath:
S. HAYWARD, GREEN STREET.
1865.
[The Right of Translation is Reserved by the Author.]

London:
Simpkin, Marshall, and Co., Stationers' Hall Court.
Bath:
S. Hayward, Green St.
1865.
[The Author reserves the right to translate this work.]


BATH:
PRINTED BY S. HAYWARD, GREEN STREET.

BATH:
PRINTED BY S. HAYWARD, GREEN STREET.


[iii]

[iii]

GENERAL CONTENTS.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__.

Introduction—Experiments proving the Earth to be a Plane.

Introduction—Experiments Showing That the Earth is Flat.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__.

The Earth no Axial or Orbital Motion.

The Earth has no axial or orbital motion.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__.

The true distance of the Sun and Stars.

The real distance of the Sun and Stars.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__.

The Sun moves in a Circle over the Earth, concentric with the North Pole.

The Sun moves in a circle over the Earth, centered around the North Pole.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__.

Diameter of Sun’s path constantly changing.

Diameter of the Sun’s path is constantly changing.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__.

Cause of Day and Night, Seasons, &c.

Cause of Day and Night, Seasons, & etc.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__.

Cause of “Sun rise” and “Sun set.”

Reason for “Sunrise” and “Sunset.”

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__.

Cause of Sun appearing larger when “Arising” and “Setting” than when on the Meridian.

Cause of the Sun appearing larger when “Rising” and “Setting” than when it’s on the Meridian.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__.[iv]

Cause of Solar and Lunar Eclipses.

Cause of Solar and Lunar Eclipses.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__.

Cause of Tides.

Cause of Tides.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__.

Constitution, Condition, and ultimate Destruction of the Earth by Fire.

Constitution, Condition, and Ultimate Destruction of the Earth by Fire.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__.

Miscellanea—Moon’s Phases—Moon’s appearance—Planet Neptune—Pendulum Experiments as Proofs of Earth’s motion.

Miscellaneous—Moon’s Phases—Moon’s Appearance—Planet Neptune—Pendulum Experiments as Proof of the Earth’s Motion.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__.

Perspective on the Sea.

View of the Ocean.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__.

General Summary—Application—“Cui Bono.”

General Summary—Application—“Cui Bono.”


[3]

[3]

ZETETIC ASTRONOMY.

The term “zetetic” is derived from the Greek verb zeteo; which means to search or examine—to proceed only by inquiry. None can doubt that by making special experiments and collecting manifest and undeniable facts, arranging them in logical order, and observing what is naturally and fairly deducible, the result will be far more consistent and satisfactory than by framing a theory or system and assuming the existence of causes for which there is no direct evidence, and which can only be admitted “for the sake of argument.” All theories are of this character—“supposing instead of inquiring, imagining systems instead of learning from observation and experience the true constitution of things. Speculative men, by the force of genius may invent systems that will perhaps be greatly admired for a time; these, however, are phantoms which the force of truth will sooner or later dispel; and while we are pleased with the deceit, true philosophy, with all the arts and improvements that depend upon it, suffers. The real state of things escapes our observation; or, if it presents itself to us, we are apt either to reject it[4] wholly as fiction, or, by new efforts of a vain ingenuity to interweave it with our own conceits, and labour to make it tally with our favourite schemes. Thus, by blending together parts so ill-suited, the whole comes forth an absurd composition of truth and error. * * These have not done near so much harm as that pride and ambition which has led philosophers to think it beneath them to offer anything less to the world than a complete and finished system of nature; and, in order to obtain this at once, to take the liberty of inventing certain principles and hypotheses, from which they pretend to explain all her mysteries.”[1]

The term "zetetic" comes from the Greek verb zeteo, which means to search or examine—to rely only on inquiry. It's hard to deny that by conducting specific experiments and gathering clear and undeniable facts, organizing them logically, and observing what can be reasonably deduced, the outcome will be much more consistent and satisfying than just making up a theory or system and assuming causes that have no direct evidence, which can only be accepted "for the sake of argument." All theories are like this—“assuming instead of investigating, creating systems instead of learning from observation and experience about the true nature of things. Speculative thinkers, through their genius, may devise systems that are perhaps highly praised for a while; however, these are illusions that the force of truth will eventually dispel; and while we might enjoy the deception, true philosophy, along with all the advancements built upon it, suffers. The actual state of things evades our notice; or, if it does appear to us, we tend either to dismiss it completely as fiction or, through new attempts at empty cleverness, try to blend it with our own ideas and work to make it fit with our favorite theories. By mixing together incompatible parts, the end result is a ridiculous mix of truth and error. These problems haven't caused as much harm as the pride and ambition that lead philosophers to believe it's beneath them to present anything less than a complete and polished system of nature; and, in their rush to achieve this, they feel free to invent certain principles and hypotheses, claiming to explain all of nature's mysteries.”[1]

[1] “An Account of Sir Isaac Newton’s Discoveries.” By Professor Maclaurin, M.A., F.R.S., of the Chair of Mathematics in the University of Edinburgh.

[1] “A Report on Sir Isaac Newton’s Discoveries.” By Professor Maclaurin, M.A., F.R.S., of the Mathematics Department at the University of Edinburgh.

Copernicus admitted, “It is not necessary that hypotheses should be true, or even probable; it is sufficient that they lead to results of calculation which agree with calculations. * * Neither let any one, so far as hypotheses are concerned, expect anything certain from astronomy; since that science can afford nothing of the kind; lest, in case he should adopt for truth things feigned for another purpose, he should leave this study more foolish than he came. * * The hypothesis of the terrestrial motion was nothing but an hypothesis, valuable only so far as it explained phenomena, and not considered with reference to absolute truth or falsehood.” The[5] Newtonian and all other “systems of nature” are little better than the “hypothesis of the terrestrial motion” of Copernicus. The foundations or premises are always unproved; no proof is ever attempted; the necessity for it is denied; it is considered sufficient that the assumptions shall seem to explain the phenomena selected. In this way it is that one theory supplants another; that system gives way to system as one failure after another compels opinions to change. This will ever be so; there will always exist in the mind a degree of uncertainty; a disposition to look upon philosophy as a vain pretension; a something almost antagonistic to the highest aspirations in which humanity can indulge, unless the practice of theorising be given up, and the method of simple inquiry, the “zetetic” process be adopted. “Nature speaks to us in a peculiar language; in the language of phenomena, she answers at all times the questions which are put to her; and such questions are experiments.”[2] Not experiments only which corroborate what has previously been assumed to be true; but experiments in every form bearing on the subject of inquiry, before a conclusion is drawn or premises affirmed.

Copernicus acknowledged, “It’s not necessary for hypotheses to be true or even likely; it’s enough that they lead to calculations that match with observations. * * No one should expect anything certain from astronomy regarding hypotheses; that field can’t provide that kind of certainty; unless, by adopting as truth things invented for other purposes, one ends up more confused than before. * * The hypothesis of the Earth’s motion was just an hypothesis, valuable only in how well it explained phenomena, and not considered in terms of absolute truth or falsehood.” The[5] Newtonian and all other “systems of nature” are hardly better than Copernicus’s “hypothesis of the terrestrial motion.” Their foundations or premises are always unproven; no proof is ever attempted; the need for it is rejected; it’s thought to be enough that the assumptions seem to explain the selected phenomena. This is how one theory replaces another; how systems shift as one failure after another forces changes in belief. This will always be the case; there will always be some level of uncertainty in the mind; a tendency to view philosophy as a pointless pretense; something almost opposed to the highest aspirations humanity can strive for, unless the practice of theorizing is abandoned and the method of simple inquiry, the “zetetic” process, is adopted. “Nature speaks to us in a unique language; through phenomena, she answers all the questions we pose; and such questions are experiments.”[2] Not just experiments that confirm what has been assumed to be true, but experiments in every form related to the subject of inquiry, before reaching a conclusion or affirming premises.

[2] “Liebig’s Agricultural Chemistry,” p. 39.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ “Liebig’s Ag Chemistry,” p. 39.

We have an excellent example of zetetic reasoning in an arithmetical operation; more[6] especially so in what is called the “Golden Rule,” or the “Rule-of-Three.” If one hundred weight of any article is worth a given sum, what will some other weight of that article be worth? The separate figures may be considered as the elements or facts of the inquiry; the placing and working of these as the logical arrangement; and the quotient or answer as the fair and natural deduction. Hence, in every zetetic process, the conclusion arrived at is essentially a quotient, which, if the details be correct, must, of necessity, be true beyond the reach or power of contradiction.

We have a great example of zetetic reasoning in a math problem, especially in what’s known as the “Golden Rule” or the “Rule-of-Three.” If one hundred pounds of any item is worth a certain amount, what will another weight of that item be worth? The separate numbers can be seen as the elements or facts of the question; how they are organized and processed represents the logical arrangement; and the result or answer is the fair and natural deduction. Therefore, in every zetetic process, the conclusion reached is basically a result that, if the details are accurate, must be undeniably true and not open to contradiction.

In our courts of Justice we have also an example of the zetetic process. A prisoner is placed at the bar; evidence for and against him is advanced; it is carefully arranged and patiently considered; and only such a verdict given as could not in justice be avoided. Society would not tolerate any other procedure; it would brand with infamy whoever should assume a prisoner to be guilty, and prohibit all evidence but such as would corroborate the assumption. Yet such is the character of theoretical philosophy!

In our justice system, we also see an example of the zetetic process. A prisoner stands in court; evidence for and against them is presented; it's organized thoughtfully and examined carefully; and a verdict is delivered that couldn't be justly avoided. Society would never accept any other method; it would shame anyone who presumed a prisoner was guilty and prevent any evidence that only supports that presumption. Yet this is the nature of theoretical philosophy!

The zetetic process is also the natural method of investigation; nature herself teaches it. Children invariably seek information by asking questions—by earnestly inquiring from those[7] around them. Question after question in rapid and exciting succession will often proceed from a child, until the most profound in learning and philosophy will feel puzzled to reply. If then both nature and justice, as well as the common sense and practical experience of mankind demand, and will not be content with less or other than the zetetic process, why should it be ignored and violated by the learned in philosophy? Let the practice of theorising be cast aside as one fatal to the full development of truth; oppressive to the reasoning power; and in every sense inimical to the progress and permanent improvement of the human race.

The zetetic process is also the natural way to investigate; nature itself shows us this. Children always seek information by asking questions—earnestly inquiring from those around them. A child will often ask question after question in rapid and exciting succession, leaving even the most knowledgeable in learning and philosophy feeling puzzled to respond. If both nature and justice, as well as the common sense and practical experience of humanity, demand the zetetic process and won’t settle for anything less, why should it be ignored and violated by philosophers? We should discard the practice of theorizing as it is detrimental to fully understanding the truth; it stifles reasoning skills and is, in every way, harmful to the progress and lasting improvement of humankind.

If then we adopt the zetetic process to ascertain the true figure and condition of the Earth, we shall find that instead of its being a globe, and moving in space, it is the directly contrary—A Plane; without motion, and unaccompanied by anything in the Firmament analogous to itself.

If we use the zetetic method to determine the true shape and state of the Earth, we’ll discover that instead of being a globe moving through space, it is actually the opposite—An Airplane; motionless, and not accompanied by anything in the sky that resembles it.

If the Earth is a globe, and 25,000 miles in circumference, the surface of all standing water must have a certain degree of convexity—every part must be an arc of a circle, curvating from the summit at the rate of 8 inches per mile multiplied by the square of the distance. That this may be sufficiently understood, the following quotation is given from the Encyclopædia[8] Britannica, art. “Levelling.” “If a line which crosses the plumb-line at right angles be continued for any considerable length it will rise above the Earth’s surface (the Earth being globular); and this rising will be as the square of the distance to which the said right line is produced; that is to say, it is raised eight inches very nearly above the Earth’s surface at one mile’s distance; four times as much, or 32 inches, at the distance of two miles; nine times as much, or 72 inches, at the distance of three miles. This is owing to the globular figure of the Earth, and this rising is the difference between the true and apparent levels; the curve of the Earth being the true level, and the tangent to it the apparent level. So soon does the difference between the true and apparent levels become perceptible that it is necessary to make an allowance for it if the distance betwixt the two stations exceeds two chains.

If the Earth is a sphere and 25,000 miles around, the surface of all standing water must have a certain amount of curvature—each part must form an arc of a circle, rising from the highest point at a rate of 8 inches per mile multiplied by the square of the distance. To make this clear, here's a quote from the Encyclopædia[8] Britannica, article “Levelling.” “If a line that intersects the plumb-line at right angles is extended for a considerable length, it will rise above the Earth’s surface (since the Earth is globe-shaped); and this rise will be proportional to the square of the distance the line is extended; in other words, it rises about eight inches above the Earth's surface at one mile, four times as much, or 32 inches, at two miles, and nine times as much, or 72 inches, at three miles. This is due to the spherical shape of the Earth, and this rise is the difference between the true and apparent levels; the curve of the Earth represents the true level, while the tangent to it represents the apparent level. The difference between the true and apparent levels becomes noticeable quickly, so it’s necessary to account for it if the distance between the two points exceeds two chains.”

FIG. 1.

FIG. 1.

Let B. D. be a small portion of the Earth’s circumference, whose centre of curvature is A. and consequently all the points of this arc will be on a level. But a tangent B. C. meeting the vertical line A. D. in C. will be the apparent[9] level at the point B. and therefore D. C. is the difference between the apparent and the true level at the point B.

Let B. D. be a small part of the Earth's circumference, with A. as its center of curvature, meaning all the points on this arc will be level. However, a tangent B. C. that intersects the vertical line A. D. at C. will represent the apparent[9] level at point B. Therefore, D. C. is the difference between the apparent and the true level at point B.

The distance C. D. must be deducted from the observed height to have the true difference of level; or the differences between the distances of two points from the surface of the Earth or from the centre of curvature A. But we shall afterwards see how this correction may be avoided altogether in certain cases. To find an expression for C. D. we have Euclid, third book, 36 prop. which proves that B. C² = C. D. (2 A D × C D); but since in all cases of levelling C. D. is exceedingly small compared with 2 A. D., we may safely neglect C. D² and then B C² = 2 A. D × C. D. or C. D = B. C² 2 A. D. Hence the depression of the true level is equal to the square of the distance divided by twice the radius of the curvature of the Earth.

The distance C. D. needs to be subtracted from the observed height to find the true difference in level; this also applies to the differences in distances between two points from the Earth's surface or from the center of curvature A. However, we will later see how this correction can be completely avoided in some cases. To derive a formula for C. D., we refer to Euclid, Book 3, Proposition 36, which shows that B. C² = C. D. (2 A D × C D); but since C. D. is very small compared to 2 A. D. in all leveling cases, we can safely ignore C. D², and therefore B C² = 2 A. D × C. D. or C. D = B. C² 2 A. D. Thus, the drop from the true level equals the square of the distance divided by twice the Earth's radius of curvature.

For example, taking a distance of four miles, the square of 4 = 16, and putting down twice the radius of the Earth’s curvature as in round figures about 8000 miles, we make the depression on four miles = 168000 of a mile = 16 × 17608000 yards = 17650 yards = 52850feet, or rather better than 10¹⁄₂ feet.

For example, taking a distance of four miles, the square of 4 is 16, and since the radius of the Earth’s curvature is about 8000 miles, we calculate the drop over four miles as 168000 of a mile = 16 × 17608000 yards = 17650 yards = 52850 feet, or slightly more than 10½ feet.

Or, if we take the mean radius of the Earth as the mean radius of its curvature, and consequently 2 A. D = 7,912 miles, then 5,280 feet being 1 mile, we shall have C. D. the depression in inches 5280 × 12 × B C² 7912 = 8008 B. C² inches.

Or, if we take the average radius of the Earth as the average radius of its curvature, then 2 A. D = 7,912 miles. Since 5,280 feet equals 1 mile, we will have C. D., the drop in inches 5280 × 12 × B C² 7912 = 8008 B. C² inches.

[10]

[10]

The preceding remarks suppose the visual ray C. B. to be a straight line, whereas on account of the unequal densities of the air at different distances from the Earth, the rays of light are incurvated by refraction. The effect of this is to lessen the difference between the true and apparent levels, but in such an extremely variable and uncertain manner that if any constant or fixed allowance is made for it in formulæ or tables, it will often lead to a greater error than what it was intended to obviate. For though the refraction may at a mean compensate for about a seventh of the curvature of the earth, it sometimes exceeds a fifth, and at other times does not amount to a fifteenth. We have, therefore, made no allowance for refraction in the foregone formulæ.”

The previous comments assume that the visual ray C. B. is a straight line. However, due to the varying densities of the air at different distances from the Earth, light rays are bent by refraction. This effect reduces the difference between the actual and apparent levels, but in such a highly variable and unpredictable way that making any constant or fixed allowance for it in formulas or tables often results in a bigger error than it was meant to correct. While refraction may generally compensate for about one-seventh of the Earth's curvature, it can sometimes be more than one-fifth, and at other times, it might not even reach one-fifteenth. Therefore, we have not accounted for refraction in the formulas presented earlier.

If the Earth is a globe, there cannot be a question that, however irregular the land may be in form, the water must have a convex surface. And as the difference between the true and apparent level, or the degree of curvature would be 8 inches in one mile, and in every succeeding mile 8 inches multiplied by the square of the distance, there can be no difficulty in detecting either its actual existence or proportion. Experiments made upon the sea have been objected to on account of its constantly-changing altitude; and the existence of banks and channels which produce[11] a “a crowding” of the waters, currents, and other irregularities. Standing water has therefore been selected, and many important experiments have been made, the most simple of which is the following:—In the county of Cambridge there is an artificial river or canal, called the “Old Bedford.” It is upwards of twenty miles long, and passes in a straight line through that part of the fens called the “Bedford level” The water is nearly stationery—often entirely so, and throughout its entire length has no interruption from locks or water-gates; so that it is in every respect well adapted for ascertaining whether any and what amount of convexity really exists. A boat with a flag standing three feet above the water, was directed to sail from a place called “Welney Bridge,” to another place called “Welche’s Dam.” These two points are six statute miles apart. The observer, with a good telescope, was seated in the water as a bather (it being the summer season), with the eye not exceeding eight inches above the surface. The flag and the boat down to the water’s edge were clearly visible throughout the whole distance! From this observation it was concluded that the water did not decline to any degree from the line of sight; whereas the water would be 6 feet higher in the centre of the arc of 6 miles extent than at the two places Welney[12] Bridge and Welche’s Dam; but as the eye of the observer was only eight inches above the water, the highest point of the surface would be at one mile from the place of observation; below which point the surface of the water at the end of the remaining five miles would be 16 feet 8 inches (5² × 8 = 200 inches). This will be rendered clear by the following diagram:—

If the Earth is a globe, there's no doubt that, no matter how irregular the land is in shape, the water must have a curved surface. And since the difference between the true level and the apparent level, or the degree of curvature, would be 8 inches over one mile, and then for every additional mile, it's 8 inches multiplied by the square of the distance, it should be easy to detect either its actual existence or proportion. Experiments conducted on the sea have been challenged because of its constantly changing level; plus the presence of banks and channels that create a “crowding” of the waters, currents, and other irregularities. Therefore, standing water has been chosen for experimentation, and many significant tests have been done, the simplest of which is as follows:—In Cambridge county, there's an artificial river or canal called the “Old Bedford.” It's over twenty miles long and runs in a straight line through the area of the fens known as the “Bedford level.” The water is nearly still—often completely so—and throughout its entire length, there are no interruptions from locks or water-gates; so it is perfect for determining whether any convexity actually exists. A boat with a flag rising three feet above the water was instructed to travel from a location called “Welney Bridge” to another point called “Welche’s Dam.” These two locations are six statute miles apart. The observer, using a good telescope, was seated in the water like a swimmer (since it was summer), with their eye no more than eight inches above the surface. The flag and the boat down to the water’s edge were clearly visible throughout the entire distance! From this observation, it was concluded that the water did not decline at all from the line of sight; whereas the water would be 6 feet higher at the center of the arc spanning 6 miles than at the two locations, Welney Bridge and Welche’s Dam; but since the observer's eye was only eight inches above the water, the highest point of the surface would be one mile from the observation point; beneath this point, the water surface at the end of the remaining five miles would be 16 feet 8 inches (5² × 8 = 200 inches). This will be made clearer with the following diagram:—

Boating experiment

FIG. 2.

FIG. 2.

Let A B represent the arc of water from Welney Bridge to Welche’s Dam, six miles in length; and A L the line of sight, which is now a tangent to the arc A B; the point of contact, T, is 1 mile from the eye of the observer at A; and from T to the boat at B is 5 miles; the square of 5 miles multiplied by 8 inches is 200 inches, or, in other words, that the boat at B would have been 200 inches or above 16 feet below the surface of the water at T; and the flag on the boat, which was 3 feet high, would have been 13 feet below the line-of-sight, A T L!!

Let AB represent the stretch of water from Welney Bridge to Welche’s Dam, which is six miles long; and AL the line of sight that is currently a tangent to the arc AB; the point of contact, T, is 1 mile from the observer's eye at A; and from T to the boat at B is 5 miles. The square of 5 miles multiplied by 8 inches is 200 inches, meaning that the boat at B would have been 200 inches, or 16 feet, below the water surface at T; and the flag on the boat, which was 3 feet high, would have been 13 feet below the line of sight, ATL!!

From this experiment it follows that the surface of standing water is not convex, and[13] therefore that the Earth is not a Globe! On the Contrary, this simple experiment is all-sufficient to prove that the surface of the water is parallel to the line-of-sight, and is therefore horizontal, and that the Earth cannot be other than a Plane! In diagram Figure 3 this is perfectly illustrated.

From this experiment, it follows that the surface of standing water is not convex, and[13] therefore that the Earth is not a globe! On the contrary, this simple experiment clearly proves that the surface of the water is parallel to the line of sight and is therefore horizontal, which means that the Earth cannot be anything other than a plane! In diagram Figure 3 this is perfectly illustrated.

Boating experiment

FIG. 3.

FIG. 3.

A B is the line-of-sight, and C D the surface of the water equidistant from or parallel to it throughout the whole distance observed.

A B is the line of sight, and C D is the surface of the water that is equidistant from or parallel to it throughout the entire distance observed.

Although, on account of the variable state of the water, objections have been raised to experiments made upon the sea-shore to test the convexity of the flood or ebb-tide level, none can be urged against observations made from higher altitudes. For example,—the distance across the Irish Sea between Douglas Harbour, in the Isle of Man, and the Great Orm’s Head in North Wales is 60 miles. If the earth is a globe, the surface of the water would form an arc 60 miles in length, the centre of which would be 1,944 feet higher than the coast line at either end, so that an observer would be obliged to attain this altitude before he could see the Welsh[14] coast from the Isle of Man: as shown in the diagram, Figure 4.

Although some objections have been raised about conducting experiments on the seashore due to the changing state of the water, there are no issues with observations taken from higher altitudes. For instance, the distance across the Irish Sea from Douglas Harbour in the Isle of Man to Great Orm’s Head in North Wales is 60 miles. If the Earth is a globe, the surface of the water would create an arc 60 miles long, with the center being 1,944 feet higher than the coastline at either end. Therefore, an observer would need to be at this height to see the Welsh coast from the Isle of Man, as illustrated in the diagram, Figure 4.

Irish Sea

FIG. 4.

FIG. 4.

It is well known, however, that from an altitude not exceeding 100 feet the Great Orm’s Head is visible in clear weather from Douglas Harbour. The altitude of 100 feet could cause the line of sight to touch the horizon at the distance of nearly 13 miles; and from the horizon to Orm’s Head being 47 miles, the square of this number multiplied by 8 inches gives 1472 feet as the distance which the Welsh coast line would be below the line of sight B C.—A representing the Great Orm’s Head, which, being 600 feet high, its summit would be 872 feet below the horizon.

It’s well known that from an altitude of no more than 100 feet, you can see the Great Orm’s Head from Douglas Harbour on a clear day. At 100 feet, the line of sight can reach nearly 13 miles to the horizon. Since the distance from the horizon to Orm’s Head is 47 miles, squaring this number and multiplying by 8 inches gives 1,472 feet, which is how far below the line of sight the Welsh coastline would be. Point B C shows the Great Orm’s Head, which is 600 feet high, meaning its summit would be 872 feet below the horizon.

Many similar experiments have been made across St. George’s Channel, between points near Dublin and Holyhead, and always with results entirely incompatible with the doctrine of rotundity.

Many similar experiments have been conducted across St. George’s Channel, between locations near Dublin and Holyhead, and always with results completely inconsistent with the idea of roundness.

Again, it is known that the horizon at sea, whatever distance it may extend to the right[15] and left of the observer on land, always appears as a straight line. The following experiment has been tried in various parts of the country. At Brighton, on a rising ground near the race course, two poles were fixed in the earth six yards apart, and directly opposite the sea. Between these poles a line was tightly stretched parallel to the distant horizon. From the centre of the line the view embraced not less than 20 miles on each side, making a distance of 40 miles. A vessel was observed sailing directly westwards; the line cut the rigging a little above the bulwarks, which it did for several hours or until the vessel had sailed the whole distance of 40 miles. This will be understood by reference to the diagram, Figure 5.

Again, it's known that the horizon at sea, no matter how far it stretches to the right[15] and left of the observer on land, always looks like a straight line. The following experiment has been done in different parts of the country. At Brighton, on a hill near the racecourse, two poles were placed in the ground six yards apart and directly facing the sea. A line was tightly stretched between these poles, running parallel to the distant horizon. From the center of the line, the view covered at least 20 miles on each side, making a total distance of 40 miles. A ship was seen sailing directly west; the line intersected the rigging just above the bulwarks, which remained the case for several hours until the ship had traveled the entire 40 miles. This will be clearer by looking at the diagram, Figure 5.

Brighton experiment

FIG. 5.

FIG. 5.

If the Earth were a globe, the appearance would be as represented in Figure 6.

If the Earth were a globe, it would look like what’s shown in Figure 6.

Brighton experiment

FIG. 6.

FIG. 6.

[16]

[16]

Brighton experiment

FIG. 7.

FIG. 7.

The ship coming into view from the east would have to ascend an inclined plane for 20 miles until it arrived at the centre of the arc A B, whence it would have to descend for the same distance. The square of 20 miles multiplied by 8 inches gives 266 feet as the amount the vessel would be below the line C D at the beginning and at the end of the 40 miles.

The ship approaching from the east would need to climb an inclined plane for 20 miles until it reached the center of the arc A B, where it would then need to descend the same distance. The square of 20 miles multiplied by 8 inches results in 266 feet, which is how far the vessel would be below the line C D at both the start and the end of the 40 miles.

If we stand upon the deck of a ship, or mount to the mast head; or go to the top of a mountain, or ascend above the Earth in a balloon, and look over the sea, the surface appears as a vast inclined plane rising up until in the distance it intercepts the line of sight. If a good mirror be held in the opposite direction, the horizon will be reflected as a well-defined mark or line across the centre, as represented in diagram, Figure 7.

If we stand on the deck of a ship, climb to the top of the mast, hike up a mountain, or rise above the Earth in a balloon, and look over the sea, the surface seems like a huge inclined plane sloping up until it meets the horizon in the distance. If a good mirror is held in the opposite direction, the horizon will be reflected as a clear line across the center, as shown in the diagram, Figure 7.

Ascending or descending, the distant horizon does the same. It rises and falls with the[17] observer, and is always on a level with his eye. If he takes a position where the water surrounds him—as at the mast-head of a ship out of sight of land, or on the summit of a small island far from the mainland, the surface of the sea appears to rise up on all sides equally and to surround him like the walls of an immense amphitheatre. He seems to be in the centre of a large concavity, the edges of which expand or contract as he takes a higher or lower position. This appearance is so well known to sea-going travellers that nothing more need be said in its support. But the appearance from a balloon is familiar only to a small number of observers, and therefore it will be useful to quote from those who have written upon the subject.

Ascending or descending, the distant horizon behaves the same way. It rises and falls with the[17] observer and is always at their eye level. If they position themselves where the water surrounds them—like at the top of a ship mast far from land, or on the peak of a small island away from the mainland—the surface of the sea seems to rise up on all sides equally, surrounding them like the walls of a vast amphitheater. They appear to be in the center of a large dip, the edges of which expand or contract as they move higher or lower. This effect is so well recognized by sea travelers that no further explanation is needed. However, the perspective from a balloon is familiar to only a small number of observers, so it is worthwhile to reference those who have written on the topic.

The Apparent Concavity of the Earth as seen from a Balloon.—A perfectly-formed circle encompassed the visible planisphere beneath, or rather the concavo-sphere it might now be called, for I had attained a height from which the surface of the Earth assumed a regularly hollowed or concave appearance—an optical illusion which increases as you recede from it. At the greatest elevation I attained, which was about a mile-and-a-half, the appearance of the World around me assumed a shape or form like that which is made by placing two watch-glasses together by their edges, the balloon apparently in the central cavity all the time of its flight at that elevation.”—Wise’s Aeronautics.

The Apparent Concavity of the Earth as Seen from a Balloon.—A perfectly formed circle surrounded the visible landscape below, or rather the concave surface it could now be called, because I had reached a height where the surface of the Earth looked regularly hollowed or concave—an optical illusion that becomes more pronounced as you move away from it. At my highest point, around a mile and a half up, the shape of the world around me resembled that of two watch glasses placed edge to edge, with the balloon seemingly in the central cavity throughout its flight at that altitude.”—Wise’s Aeronautics.

“Another curious effect of the aerial ascent was, that the Earth, when we were at our greatest altitude, positively appeared concave, looking like a huge dark bowl, rather than[18] the convex sphere such as we naturally expect to see it. * * * The horizon always appears to be on a level with our eye, and seems to rise as we rise, until at length the elevation of the circular boundary line of the sight becomes so marked that the Earth assumes the anomalous appearance as we have said of a concave rather than a convex body.”—Mayhew’s Great World of London.

“Another interesting effect of going up into the air was that when we reached our highest point, the Earth looked concave, resembling a massive dark bowl, instead of the convex sphere we usually expect to see. * * * The horizon always seems to be level with our eyes and appears to rise as we do, until the height of the circular edge of our view becomes so noticeable that the Earth takes on the unusual appearance of being concave rather than convex.”—Mayhew’s Great World of London.

Mr. Elliott, an American æronaut, in a letter giving an account of his ascension from Baltimore, thus speaks of the appearance of the Earth from a balloon:—

Mr. Elliott, an American aeronaut, in a letter giving an account of his ascent from Baltimore, describes the view of the Earth from a balloon as follows:—

“I don’t know that I ever hinted heretofore that the æronaut may well be the most sceptical man about the rotundity of the Earth. Philosophy imposes the truth upon us; but the view of the Earth from the elevation of a balloon is that of an immense terrestrial basin, the deeper part of which is that directly under one’s feet. As we ascend, the Earth beneath us seems to recede—actually to sink away—while the horizon gradually and gracefully lifts a diversified slope stretching away farther and farther to a line that, at the highest elevation, seems to close with the sky. Thus upon a clear day, the æronaut feels as if suspended at about an equal distance between the vast blue oceanic concave above, and the equally expanded terrestrial basin below.”

“I don’t know if I’ve ever suggested before that the balloonist might be the most skeptical person about the roundness of the Earth. Philosophy pushes the truth onto us; however, the view of the Earth from a balloon is that of a huge, flat basin, with the deepest part right under your feet. As we go higher, the ground below us seems to pull away—almost like it’s sinking—while the horizon gradually lifts into a varied slope that stretches farther and farther until, at the highest point, it seems to meet the sky. So on a clear day, the balloonist feels like they’re hanging at about the same distance between the vast blue curve of the sky above and the equally wide flat surface of the Earth below.”

“The chief peculiarity of the view from a balloon, at a considerable elevation, was the altitude of the horizon, which remained practically on a level with the eye at an elevation of two miles, causing the surface of the Earth to appear concave instead of convex, and to recede during the rapid ascent, whilst the horizon and the balloon seemed to be stationary.”—London Journal, July 18, 1857.

“The main feature of the view from a balloon at a high altitude was how the horizon stayed nearly at eye level when you were two miles up. This made the Earth's surface look concave instead of convex, and as you rose quickly, it seemed like the horizon and the balloon weren't moving at all.”—London Journal, July 18, 1857.

During the important balloon ascents recently made for scientific purposes by Mr. Coxwell and[19] Mr. Glaisher, of the Royal Greenwich Observatory, the same phenomenon was observed—

During the significant balloon ascents conducted recently for scientific purposes by Mr. Coxwell and[19] Mr. Glaisher from the Royal Greenwich Observatory, the same phenomenon was observed—

“The horizon always appeared on a level with the car.”—Vide “Glaisher’s Report.”

“The horizon always seemed even with the car.” —Vide “Glaisher’s Report.”

The following diagram represents this appearance:—

The following diagram shows what this looks like:—

Balloon

FIG. 8.

FIG. 8

The surface of the earth C D appears to rise to the line-of-sight from the balloon, and “seems to close with the sky” at the points H H in the same manner that the ceiling and the floor of a long room, or the top and bottom of a tunnel appear to approach each other, and from the same cause, viz.: that they are parallel to the line-of-sight, and therefore horizontal.

The surface of the earth C D looks like it rises to the line of sight from the balloon and "seems to meet the sky" at points H H, similar to how the ceiling and floor of a long room, or the top and bottom of a tunnel, appear to get closer, basically for the same reason: they are parallel to the line of sight, and therefore horizontal.

If the Earth’s surface were convex the observer, looking from a balloon, instead of seeing it gradually ascend to the level of the eye, would[20] have to look downwards to the horizon H H, as represented in figure 9, and the amount of dip in the line-of-sight C H would be the greatest at the highest elevation.

If the Earth's surface were curved, someone looking from a balloon wouldn’t see it gradually rise to their eye level. Instead, they would have to look down to see the horizon H H, as shown in figure 9, and the angle of depression in the line-of-sight C H would be the steepest at the highest altitude.

Balloon flight

FIG. 9.

FIG. 9.

Many more experiments have been made than are here described, but the selection now given is amply sufficient to prove that the surface of water is horizontal, and that the Earth, taken as a whole, its land and water together, is not a globe, has really no degree of sphericity; but is “to all intents and purposes” A PLANE!

Many more experiments have been conducted than what is described here, but the selection provided is more than enough to demonstrate that the surface of water is flat, and that the Earth, considering all its land and water together, is not a globe and truly has no degree of roundness; it is, "for all practical purposes," An airplane!

If we now consider the fact that when we travel by land or sea, and from any part of the known world, in a direction towards the North polar star, we shall arrive at one and the same point, we are forced to the conclusion that what has hitherto been called the North Polar region, is really the Centre of the Earth. That[21] from this northern centre the land diverges and stretches out, of necessity, towards a circumference, which must now be called the Southern Region: which is a vast circle, and not a pole or centre. That there is One Centrethe North, and One Circumferencethe South. This language will be better understood by reference to the diagram Figure 10.

If we think about the fact that when we travel by land or sea from anywhere in the known world toward the North Star, we end up at the same point, we have to conclude that what has been called the North Polar region is actually the Earth's core. That[21] from this northern center, the land spreads out and extends toward a circumference, which we should now refer to as the South: a vast circle, not a pole or center. There is One Centerthe North, and One circumferencethe South. This concept will be clearer with reference to the diagram Figure 10.

Map of flat earth

FIG. 10.

FIG. 10.

N represents the northern centre; and S S S the southern circumference—both icy or frozen[22] regions. That the south is an immense ring, or glacial boundary, is evident from the fact, that within the antarctic circle the most experienced, scientific, and daring navigators have failed in their attempts to sail, in a direct manner, completely round it. Lieut. Wilkes, of the American Navy, after great and prolonged efforts, and much confusion in his reckoning, and seeing no prospect of success, was obliged to give up his attempt and return to the north. This he acknowledged in a letter to Captain Sir James Clarke Ross, with whose intention to explore the south seas he had become acquainted, in which the following words occur: “I hope you intend to circumnavigate the antarctic circle. I made 70 degrees of it.” Captain Ross, however, was himself greatly confused in his attempts to navigate the southern region. In his account of the voyage he says, at page 96—“We found ourselves every day from 12 to 16 miles by observation in advance of our reckoning.” “By our observations we found ourselves 58 miles to the eastward of our reckoning in two days.” And in this and other ways all the great navigators have been frustrated in their efforts, and have been more or less confounded in their attempts to sail round the Earth upon or beyond the antarctic circle. But if the southern region is a pole or centre, like the north, there would be[23] little difficulty in circumnavigating it, for the distance round would be comparatively small. When it is seen that the Earth is not a sphere, but a plane, having only one centre, the north; and that the south is the vast icy boundary of the world, the difficulties experienced by circumnavigators can be easily understood.

N represents the northern center; and S S S the southern edge—both icy or frozen regions. It's clear that the south is a massive ring, or glacial boundary, because even the most skilled, scientific, and daring navigators have failed to sail completely around it within the Antarctic Circle. Lieutenant Wilkes of the American Navy, after exhausting efforts and dealing with confusion in his calculations, saw no chance of success and had to abandon his attempt, returning north. He admitted this in a letter to Captain Sir James Clarke Ross, who was planning to explore the southern seas, in which he said: “I hope you intend to circumnavigate the Antarctic Circle. I made it to 70 degrees.” Captain Ross, however, also faced significant confusion while navigating the southern region. In his account of the voyage, he states on page 96—“We found ourselves every day 12 to 16 miles ahead of our calculations.” “From our observations, we discovered we were 58 miles to the east of our reckoning in just two days.” In various ways, all the major navigators have faced setbacks in their attempts to sail around the Earth on or beyond the Antarctic Circle. However, if the southern region is a pole or center like the north, circumnavigating it would be relatively easy, as the distance around would be much shorter. When it's understood that the Earth isn't a sphere but a flat expanse with only one center, the north; and that the south is the vast icy boundary of the world, the challenges faced by circumnavigators become clear.

Having given a surface or bird’s-eye view of the Earth, the following sectional representation will aid in completing the description.

Having provided an overview of the Earth, the following sectional representation will help complete the description.

Section through earth

FIG. 11.

FIG. 11.

E E represents the Earth; W W the “great deep,” or the waters which surround the land; N the northern centre; and S S sections of the southern ice. As the present description is purely zetetic, and as every fact must therefore have its fullest value assigned to it, and its consequences represented, a peculiarity must be pointed out in the foregoing diagram. It will be observed that from about the points E E the surface of the water rises towards the south S S. It is clearly ascertained that the altitude of the water in various parts of the world is much influenced by the pressure of the atmosphere—however this[24] pressure is caused—and it is well known that the atmospheric pressure in the south is constantly less than it is in the north, and therefore the water in the southern region must always be considerably higher than it is in the northern. Hence the peculiarity referred to in the diagram. The following quotation from Sir James Ross’s voyages, p. 483, will corroborate the above statements:—“Our barometrical experiments appear to prove that a gradual diminution of atmospheric pressure occurs as we proceed southwards from the tropic of Capricorn. * * * It has hitherto been considered that the mean pressure of the atmosphere at the level of the sea was nearly the same in all parts of the world, as no material difference occurs between the equator and the highest northern latitudes. * * * The causes of the atmospheric pressure being so very much less in the southern than in the northern hemispheres remains to be determined.”

E E represents the Earth; W W signifies the “great deep,” or the waters surrounding the land; N is the northern center; and S S indicates sections of the southern ice. Since the current description is purely zetetic, and every fact must therefore have its full value recognized and its implications represented, a unique feature in the previous diagram should be noted. It can be seen that from around the points E E, the water's surface rises towards the south S S. It is clearly established that the height of the water in various parts of the world is heavily influenced by atmospheric pressure—regardless of how this pressure is generated—and it is well-known that atmospheric pressure in the south is consistently lower than in the north. Therefore, the water in the southern region must always be significantly higher than in the northern. This explains the distinct feature mentioned in the diagram. The following quote from Sir James Ross’s voyages, p. 483, will support these statements:—“Our barometric experiments seem to show that there is a gradual decrease in atmospheric pressure as we travel south from the tropic of Capricorn. * * * It has previously been thought that the average atmospheric pressure at sea level was about the same in all parts of the world, as no significant difference occurs between the equator and the highest northern latitudes. * * * The reasons why atmospheric pressure is much lower in the southern than in the northern hemispheres still need to be determined.”

Thus, putting all theories aside, we have seen that direct experiment demonstrates the important truth, that the Earth is an extended Plane. Literally, “Stretched out upon the waters;” “Founded on the seas and established on the floods;” “Standing in the water and out of the water.” How far the southern icy region extends horizontally, or how deep the waters upon and in which the earth stands or is[25] supported are questions which cannot yet be answered. In Zetetic philosophy the foundation must be well secured, progress must be made step by step, making good the ground as we proceed; and whenever a difficulty presents itself, or evidence fails to carry us farther, we must promptly and candidly acknowledge it, and prepare for future investigation; but never fill up the inquiry by theory and assumption. In the present instance there is no practical evidence as to the extent of the southern ice and the “great deep.” Who shall say whether the depth and extent of the “mighty waters” have a limit, or constitute the “World without end?”

So, putting all theories aside, we have seen that direct experiments show the important truth, that the Earth is a flat surface. Literally, “Stretched out over the waters;” “Founded on the seas and established on the floods;” “Standing in the water and out of the water.” How far the southern icy region extends horizontally, or how deep the waters that the earth stands on or is supported by are questions that we cannot yet answer. In Zetetic philosophy, the foundation must be secure, progress must be made step by step, establishing solid ground as we go; and whenever we encounter a difficulty, or the evidence doesn't take us further, we must promptly and honestly acknowledge it and prepare for further investigation; but we should never fill in the gaps with theory and assumption. In this case, there is no practical evidence about the extent of the southern ice and the “great deep.” Who can say whether the depth and extent of the “mighty waters” have a limit, or if they make up the “World without end?”

Having advanced direct and special evidence that the surface of the earth is not convex, but, on the contrary, a vast and irregular plane, it now becomes important that the leading phenomena upon which the doctrine of rotundity has been founded should be carefully examined. First, it is contended that because the hull of an outward-bound vessel disappears before the mast head, the water is convex, and therefore the Earth is a globe. In this conclusion, however, there is an assumption involved, viz., that such a phenomenon can only result from a convex surface. Inquiry will show that this is erroneous. If we select for observation a few miles of straight and level railway, we shall find that the rails,[26] which are parallel, appear in the distance to approach each other. But the two rails which are nearest together do so more rapidly than those which are farthest asunder, as shown in the following diagram, Figure 12.

Having provided direct and specific evidence that the surface of the earth is not curved, but rather a vast and uneven flat plane, it is now essential to thoroughly examine the main phenomena that support the idea of roundness. First, it is argued that because the hull of a ship going out to sea disappears before the mast, the water must be curved, and therefore the Earth is a globe. In this conclusion, however, there is an underlying assumption that such a phenomenon can only occur due to a curved surface. Investigation will reveal that this assumption is incorrect. If we observe a few miles of straight and level railway, we will find that the parallel rails appear to converge in the distance. However, the two rails that are closest together seem to converge more quickly than those that are farther apart, as illustrated in the following diagram, Figure 12.

Railway perspective

FIG. 12.

FIG. 12.

Let the observer stand at the point A, looking in the direction of the arrows; and the rails 1.2.3.4. will appear to join at the point B, but the rail 5.6 will appear to have converged only as far as C towards B.

Let the observer stand at point A, looking in the direction of the arrows; and the rails 1.2.3.4. will seem to meet at point B, but rail 5.6 will appear to have converged only as far as C toward B.

Again, let a train be watched from the point A in Figure 13.

Again, let a train be observed from point A in Figure 13.

Railway perspective

FIG. 13.

FIG. 13.

The observer looking from A, with his eye midway between the bottom of the carriage and the rail, will see the diameter of the wheels gradually diminish as they recede. The lines 1.2 and 1.4 will appear to approach each other until at the point B they will come together, and the space,[27] including the wheels, between the bottom of the carriage and the rail will there disappear. The floor of the carriage will seem to be sliding without wheels upon the rail 1.2; but the lines 5.6 and 7.8 will yet have converged only to C and D.

The observer looking from A, with their eye positioned halfway between the bottom of the carriage and the rail, will see the diameter of the wheels gradually getting smaller as they move away. The lines 1.2 and 1.4 will seem to get closer together until, at point B, they will meet, and the space,[27] including the wheels, between the bottom of the carriage and the rail will disappear. The floor of the carriage will appear to be sliding along the rail 1.2 without wheels; however, the lines 5.6 and 7.8 will have converged only up to points C and D.

The same phenomenon may be observed with a long row of lamps, where the ground is a straight line throughout its entire length as represented in Figure 14.

The same phenomenon can be seen with a long line of lamps, where the ground remains a straight line along its entire length as shown in Figure 14.

Street lamps perspective

FIG. 14.

FIG. 14.

The lines 1.2 and A D will converge at the point D and the pedestal of the lamp at D will seem to have disappeared, but the line 3.4, which represents the true altitude of the lamps, will only have converged to the point C.

The lines 1.2 and A D will meet at point D, and the base of the lamp at D will appear to vanish, but the line 3.4, which shows the actual height of the lamps, will have only converged at point C.

A narrow bank running along the side of a straight portion of railway, upon which poles are placed for supporting the wires of the electric telegraph will produce the same appearance, as shown in Figure 15.

A narrow embankment beside a straight section of railway, where poles are set up to hold the wires of the electric telegraph, will create the same look as seen in Figure 15.

Railway perspective

FIG. 15.

FIG. 15.

[28]

[28]

The bank having the altitude 1.3 and 2.4 will, in the distance of two or three miles (according to its depth) disappear to the eye of an observer placed at Figure 1; and the telegraph pole at Figure 2 will seem not to stand upon a bank at all, but upon the actual railway. The line 3.4 will merge into the line 1.2 at the point B, while the line 5.6 will only have descended to the position C.

The bank at heights 1.3 and 2.4 will, at a distance of two or three miles (depending on its depth), disappear from the view of an observer shown in Figure 1; and the telegraph pole in Figure 2 will appear to be standing directly on the railway instead of on a bank. The line 3.4 will connect with line 1.2 at point B, while line 5.6 will have only dropped to position C.

Ship in perspective

FIG. 16.

FIG. 16.

Many other familiar instances could be given to show the true law of perspective; which is, that parallel lines appear in the distance to converge to one and the same datum line, but to reach it at different distances if themselves dissimilarly distant. This law being remembered, it is easy to understand how the hull of an outward-bound ship, although sailing upon a plane surface disappears before the mast-head. In Figure 16, let A B represent the surface of the water; C H the line of sight; and E D the altitude of the mast-head. Then, as A B and C H are nearer to each other than A B and E D, they will converge and appear to meet at the point[29] H, which is the practical, or, as it would be better to call it, the optical horizon. The hull of the vessel being contained within the lines A B and C H, must gradually diminish as these converge, until at H, or the horizon, it enters the vanishing point and disappears; but the mast-head represented by the line E D is still above the horizon at H, and will require to sail more or less, according to its altitude, beyond the point H before it sinks to the line C H, or, in other words, before the lines A B and E D form the same angle as A B and C H.

Many other familiar examples could be provided to illustrate the true principle of perspective; which is that parallel lines seem to converge in the distance to one common horizon line, but they reach it at different points if they are located at different distances. With this principle in mind, it's easy to see how the hull of a ship leaving port, even though it’s on a flat surface, disappears before the top of the mast. In Figure 16, let A B represent the water’s surface; C H the line of sight; and E D the height of the mast. As A B and C H are closer together than A B and E D, they will converge and appear to meet at point[29] H, which is the practical, or more accurately, the optical horizon. The hull of the ship, being within the lines A B and C H, must gradually shrink as these lines converge, until it reaches H, or the horizon, where it disappears at the vanishing point; however, the mast-head represented by the line E D is still above the horizon at H, and will need to sail further, depending on its height, past point H before it descends to line C H, or in simpler terms, before the lines A B and E D create the same angle as A B and C H.

It will be evident also that should the elevation of the observer be greater than at C, the horizon or vanishing point would not be formed at H, but at a greater distance; and therefore the hull of the vessel would be longer visible. Or, if, when the hull has disappeared at H, the observer ascends from the elevation at C to a higher position nearer to E, it will again be seen. Thus all these phenomena which have so long been considered as proofs of the Earth’s rotundity are really optical sequences of the contrary doctrine. To argue that because the lower part of an outward-bound ship disappears before the highest the water must be round, is to assume that a round surface only can produce this effect! But it is now shown that a plane surface necessarily produces this[30] effect; and therefore the assumption is not required, and the argument involved is fallacious!

It will also be clear that if the observer is at a higher elevation than at point C, the horizon or vanishing point would not be seen at point H, but rather at a greater distance; therefore, the hull of the ship would be visible for a longer time. Alternatively, if the hull has disappeared at point H and the observer moves up from the elevation at C to a higher position closer to E, it will be visible again. Thus, all these phenomena that have long been seen as evidence of the Earth’s roundness are actually optical effects that support the opposite view. To claim that the lower part of a ship sailing away disappears before the top does because the water must be round is to assume that only a round surface can cause this effect! However, it has now been demonstrated that a flat surface can also create this effect; therefore, the assumption is unnecessary, and the argument is flawed!

It may here be observed that no help can be given to this doctrine of rotundity by quoting the prevailing theory of perspective. The law represented in the foregoing diagrams is the “law of nature.” It may be seen in every layer of a long wall, in every hedge and bank of the roadside, and indeed in every direction where lines and objects run parallel to each other; but no illustration of the contrary perspective is ever to be seen! except in the distorted pictures, otherwise cleverly and beautifully drawn as they are, which abound in our public and private collections.

It should be noted that this idea of roundness cannot be supported by citing the current theory of perspective. The principle shown in the diagrams above is the “law of nature.” You can see it in every layer of a long wall, in every hedge and bank along the road, and really in every direction where lines and objects run parallel to each other. However, there are no examples of the opposite perspective, except for the distorted images—though they are skillfully and beautifully created—that fill our public and private collections.

The theory which affirms that parallel lines converge only to one and the same point upon the eye-line is an error. It is true only of lines equidistant from the eye-line. It is true that parallel lines converge to one and the same eye-line, but meet it at different distances when more or less apart from each other. This is the true law of perspective as shown by Nature herself; any other idea is fallacious and will deceive whoever may hold and apply it to practice.

The theory that says parallel lines only meet at one point on the eye-line is incorrect. It only applies to lines that are the same distance from the eye-line. It's true that parallel lines converge to one eye-line, but they meet it at different distances when they’re closer or farther apart from each other. This is the real rule of perspective as demonstrated by Nature herself; any other belief is misleading and will trick anyone who embraces and tries to apply it in reality.

As it is of great importance that the difference should be clearly understood, the following[31] diagram is given. Let E L (Figure 17) represent the eye-line and C the vanishing point of the lines, 1 C 2 C; then the lines 3.4.5.6, although converging somewhere to the line E L, will not do so to the point C, but 3 and 4 will proceed to D and 5 and 6 to H. It is repeated, that lines equidistant from the datum will converge on the same point and at the same distance; but lines not equidistant will converge on the same datum but at different distances! A very good illustration of the difference is given in Figure 18. Theoretic perspective would bring the lines 1, 2, and 3 to the same datum line E L and to the same point A. But the true[32] or natural law would bring the lines 2 and 3 to the point A because equidistant from the eye-line E L; but the line 1 being farther from E L than either 2 or 3, would be taken beyond the point A on towards C, until it formed the same angle upon the line E L as 2 and 3 form at the point A.

As it’s really important to clearly understand the difference, the following[31] diagram is provided. Let E L (Figure 17) represent the eye-line and C the vanishing point of the lines, 1 C 2 C; then the lines 3.4.5.6, although converging somewhere to the line E L, won’t do so at the point C. Instead, lines 3 and 4 will go to D and lines 5 and 6 will go to H. It's emphasized that lines equidistant from the datum will converge on the same point and at the same distance; but lines not equidistant will converge on the same datum but at different distances! A very good illustration of the difference is shown in Figure 18. The theoretical perspective would bring lines 1, 2, and 3 to the same datum line E L and to the same point A. But the true[32] or natural law would bring lines 2 and 3 to point A because they are equidistant from the eye-line E L; however, line 1, being farther from E L than either 2 or 3, would extend beyond point A toward C until it formed the same angle with line E L as lines 2 and 3 do at point A.

Vanishing points

FIG. 17.

FIG. 17.

Vanishing points

FIG. 18.

FIG. 18.

The subject of perspective will not be rendered sufficiently clear unless an explanation be given of the cause and character of what is technically called the “vanishing point.” Why do objects, even when raised above the earth, vanish at a given distance? It is known, and can easily be proved by experiment, that “the range of the eye, or diameter of the field of vision is 110°; consequently this is the largest angle under which an object can be seen. The range of vision is from 110° to 1°. * * The smallest angle under which an object can be seen is upon an average for different sights the 60th part of a degree, or one minute in space; so that when an object is removed from the eye 3000 times its own diameter, it will only just be distinguishable; consequently, the greatest distance at which we can behold an object, like a shilling, of an inch in diameter is 3000 inches or 250 feet.”[3] It may, therefore, be very easily understood that a line passing over the hull of a ship, and continuing[33] parallel to the surface of the water, must converge to the vanishing point at the distance of about 3000 times its own elevation; in other words, if the surface of the hull be 10 feet above the water it will vanish at 3,000 times 10 feet; or nearly six statute miles; but if the mast-head be 30 feet above the water, it will be visible for 90,000 feet or over 17 miles; so that it could be seen upon the horizon for a distance of eleven miles after the hull had entered the vanishing point! Hence the phenomenon of a receding ship’s hull being the first to disappear, which has been so universally quoted and relied upon as proving the rotundity of the Earth is fairly and logically a proof of the very contrary! It has been misapplied in consequence of an erroneous view of the law of perspective, and the desire to support a theory. That it is valueless for such a purpose has already been shown; and that, even if there were no question of the Earth’s form involved, it could not arise from the convexity of the water, is proved by the following experiment:—Let an observer stand upon the sea-shore with the eye at an elevation of about six feet above the water, and watch a vessel until it is just “hull down.” If now a good telescope be applied the hull will be distinctly restored to sight! From which it must be concluded that it had[34] disappeared through the influence of perspective, and not from having sunk behind the summit of a convex surface! Had it done so it would follow that the telescope had either carried the line-of-sight through the mass of water, or over its surface and down the other side! But the power of “looking round a corner” or penetrating a dense and extensive medium has never yet been attributed to such an instrument! If the elevation of the observer be much greater than six feet the distance at which the vanishing point is formed will be so great that the telescope may not have power enough to magnify or enlarge the angle constituting it; when the experiment would appear to fail. But the failure would only be apparent, for a telescope of sufficient power to magnify at the horizon or vanishing point would certainly restore the hull at the greater distance.

The topic of perspective won't be fully understood unless we explain what’s known as the “vanishing point.” Why do objects, even when elevated above the ground, disappear at a certain distance? It’s known, and can easily be proven through experiments, that “the range of the eye, or the diameter of the field of vision, is 110°; therefore, this is the largest angle under which an object can be seen. The range of vision varies from 110° to 1°. The smallest angle under which an object can be perceived is, on average, the 60th part of a degree, or one minute in space; thus, when an object is placed 3000 times its diameter away, it will just barely be distinguishable. Consequently, the furthest distance at which we can see an object, such as a shilling that is an inch in diameter, is 3000 inches or 250 feet.”[3] It can, therefore, be easily understood that a line extending over the hull of a ship and continuing parallel to the water's surface must converge at the vanishing point about 3000 times its height above the water. In other words, if the hull is 10 feet above the water, it will vanish at 3,000 times 10 feet, or nearly six statute miles. If the mast is 30 feet above the water, it will be visible for 90,000 feet, or over 17 miles; thus, it could be seen on the horizon for a distance of eleven miles after the hull had entered the vanishing point! Hence, the phenomenon of a receding ship's hull disappearing first, which has often been cited as proof of the Earth's roundness, is logically a proof of the very opposite! It has been misapplied due to a misunderstanding of the law of perspective and the urge to support a theory. It has already been shown that it is not valid for such a purpose; and even without considering the shape of the Earth, it can't be attributed to the curvature of the water, as demonstrated by the following experiment:—Let an observer stand on the shore with their eye about six feet above the water and watch a ship until it’s just “hull down.” If a good telescope is then used, the hull will be distinctly restored to sight! This leads to the conclusion that it disappeared due to the influence of perspective, not from sinking behind a convex surface! If it had sunk, it would mean that the telescope had either enabled the line of sight to pass through the water or move over its surface and down the other side! But no one has ever claimed that such an instrument can “look around a corner” or penetrate a dense medium! If the observer’s height is significantly greater than six feet, the distance to the vanishing point will be so far that the telescope might not have enough power to magnify or amplify the angle defining it; in which case, the experiment might seem to fail. However, this failure would only be apparent because a telescope strong enough to magnify at the horizon or vanishing point would certainly reveal the hull at a greater distance.

[3] “Wonders of Science,” by Mayhew, p. 357.

[3] “Wonders of Science,” by Mayhew, p. 357.

Flat earth map

FIG. 19.

FIG. 19.

An illustration or proof of the Earth’s rotundity is also supposed to be found in the fact that navigators by sailing due east or west return in the opposite direction. Here, again, a supposition is involved, viz., that upon a globe only could this occur. But it is easy to prove that it could take place as perfectly upon a circular plane as upon a sphere. Let it first be clearly understood what is really meant by sailing due east and west. Practically it is[35] sailing at right angles to north and south: this is determined ordinarily by the mariners’ compass, but more accurately by the meridian lines which converge to the northern centre of the Earth. Bearing this in mind, let N in Figure 19 represent the northern centre; and the lines N. S. the directions north and south. Then let the small arrow, Figure 1, represent a vessel on the meridian of Greenwich, with its head W. at right angles, or due west; and the stern E due east. It is evident that in[36] passing to the position of the arrow, Figure 2, which is still due west or square to the meridian, the arc 1.2 must be described; and in sailing still farther under the same condition, the arcs 2.3, 3.4, and 4.1 will be successively passed over until the meridian of Greenwich, Figure 1, is arrived at, which was the point of departure. Thus a mariner, by keeping the head of his vessel due west, or at right angles to the north and south, practically circumnavigates a plane surface; or, in other words, he describes a circle upon a plane, at a greater or lesser distance from the centre N, and being at all times square to the radii north and south, he is compelled to do so—because the earth is a plane, having a central region, towards which the compass and the meridian lines which guide him, converge. So far, then, from the fact of a vessel sailing due west coming home from the east, and vice versa, being a proof of the earth’s rotundity, it is simply a phenomenon, consistent with and dependent upon its being a plane! The subject may be perfectly illustrated by the following simple experiment:—Take a round table, fix a pin in the centre; to this attach a thread, and extend it to the edge. Call the centre the north and the circumference the south; then, at any distance between the centre and the circumference, a direction at right angles to the thread[37] will be due east and west; and a small object, as a pencil, placed across or square to the thread, to represent a ship, may be carried completely round the table without its right-angled position being altered; or, the right-angled position firmly maintained, the vessel must of necessity describe a circle on being moved from right to left or left to right. Referring again to the diagram, Figure 19, the vessel may sail from the north towards the south, upon the meridian Figure 1, and there turning due west, may pass Cape Horn, represented by D, and continue its westerly course until it passes the point C, or the Cape of Good Hope, and again reaches the meridian, Figure 1, upon which it may return to the north. Those, then, who hold that the earth is a globe because it can be circumnavigated, have an argument which is logically incomplete and fallacious. This will be seen at once by putting it in the syllogistic form:—

An illustration or proof of the Earth’s roundness is also thought to be found in the fact that navigators who sail directly east or west end up coming back from the opposite direction. Here, again, there’s a theory involved, namely, that this could only happen on a globe. However, it’s easy to show that this could happen just as well on a circular plane as on a sphere. First, let’s be clear about what it really means to sail directly east and west. Practically, it’s sailing at right angles to north and south: this direction is usually determined by the mariner’s compass, but it’s more accurately defined by the meridian lines that converge at the northern center of the Earth. With this in mind, let N in Figure 19 represent the northern center; and the lines N.S. indicate the north and south directions. Then let the small arrow in Figure 1 represent a vessel on the Greenwich meridian, with its bow pointing W. at right angles, or due west; and the stern pointing E. due east. It’s clear that in moving to the position of the arrow in Figure 2, which is still directly west or perpendicular to the meridian, the arc 1.2 must be traveled; and in sailing even further under the same condition, the arcs 2.3, 3.4, and 4.1 will be successively crossed until the Greenwich meridian, Figure 1, is reached again, which was the starting point. Thus, a mariner, by keeping the bow of the vessel due west, or at right angles to north and south, effectively circumnavigates a plane surface; in other words, he describes a circle on a plane, at a greater or lesser distance from the center N, and since he is always perpendicular to the north and south radii, he is forced to do so—because the Earth is a plane, with a central area toward which the compass and the guiding meridian lines converge. Therefore, the idea that a vessel sailing due west comes home from the east and vice versa is not proof of the Earth’s roundness; it’s just a phenomenon consistent with and dependent on it being a plane! This can be clearly illustrated with the following simple experiment:—Take a round table, fix a pin in the center; attach a thread to this pin and extend it to the edge. Call the center north and the edge south; then, at any point between the center and the edge, a direction at right angles to the thread will be due east and west; and a small object, like a pencil, placed across or perpendicular to the thread to represent a ship, can be moved completely around the table without changing its right-angled position; or, while maintaining the right-angled position, the vessel must necessarily describe a circle when moved from right to left or left to right. Referring again to the diagram, Figure 19, the vessel can sail from north to south on the meridian in Figure 1, and then turn due west, passing Cape Horn, represented by D, and continue westward until it crosses point C, or the Cape of Good Hope, and reaches the meridian in Figure 1 again, from which it can return north. Those who argue that the Earth is a globe because it can be circumnavigated have a reasoning that is logically incomplete and flawed. This becomes clear when you put it into syllogistic form:—

A globe only can be circumnavigated:

A globe can only be circumnavigated:

The Earth has been circumnavigated:

The Earth has been circled:

Therefore the Earth is a globe.

Therefore, the Earth is a globe.

It has been shown that a plane can be circumnavigated, and therefore the first or major proposition is false; and, being so, the conclusion is false. This portion of the subject furnishes a striking instance of the necessity of, at all times,[38] proving a proposition by direct and immediate evidence, instead of quoting a natural phenomenon as a proof of what has previously been assumed. But a theory will not admit of this method, and therefore the zetetic process, or inquiry before conclusion, entirely eschewing assumption, is the only course which can lead to simple and unalterable truth. Whoever creates or upholds a theory, adopts a monster which will sooner or later betray and enslave him, or make him ridiculous in the eyes of practical observers.

It has been shown that a plane can be circumnavigated, so the first major proposition is false; therefore, the conclusion is also false. This part of the topic clearly illustrates the importance of always proving a proposition with direct and immediate evidence, rather than relying on a natural phenomenon as evidence for something that has already been assumed. However, a theory doesn't allow for this method, so the zetetic process, or questioning before concluding, which completely avoids assumptions, is the only path that can lead to simple and unchanging truth. Anyone who creates or maintains a theory takes on a problem that will eventually betray and trap them, or make them look foolish in the eyes of practical observers.

Closely following the subject of circumnavigation, the gain and loss of time discovered on sailing east and west is referred to as another proof of rotundity. But this illustration is equally fallacious with the last, and from the same cause, viz., the assumption that a globe only could produce the effect observed. It will be seen, by reference to diagram, Figure 19, that the effect must take place equally upon a plane as upon a globe. Let the ship, W E, upon the meridian, Figure 1, at 12 at noon, begin to sail towards the position, Figure 2, which it will reach the next day at 12, or in 24 hours: the sun during the same 24 hours will have returned only to Figure 1, and will require to move for another hour or more until it reaches the ship at Figure 2, making 25 hours instead of 24, in[39] which the sun would have returned to the ship, if it had remained at Figure 1. In this way, the sun is more and more behind the meridian time of the ship, as it proceeds day after day upon its westerly course, so that on completing the circumnavigation the ship’s time is a day later than the solar time, reckoning to and from the meridian of Greenwich. But the contrary follows if the ship sails from Figure 1 towards Figure 4, or the east, because it will meet the sun one hour earlier than the 24 hours which would be required for it to pass on to Figure 1. Hence, on completing the circle 1.4.3.2.1, the time at the ship would be one day in advance of the time at Greenwich, or the position Figure 1. Captain Sir J. C. Ross, at page 132, vol. 2, says—“November 25, having by sailing to the eastward gained 12 hours, it became necessary, on crossing the 180th degree and entering upon west longitude, in order to have our time correspond with that of England, to have two days following of the same date, and by this means lose the time we had gained, and still were gaining, as we sailed to the eastward.”

Closely following the topic of circumnavigation, the gain and loss of time observed when sailing east and west is presented as another proof of roundness. However, this example is just as misleading as the previous one, and for the same reason—namely, the assumption that only a globe could create the observed effect. It will be clear from the diagram, Figure 19, that the effect would occur equally on a flat surface as it would on a globe. Let’s say the ship, W E, on the meridian, Figure 1, starts sailing towards the position shown in Figure 2 at noon. It will arrive there the following day at noon, or in 24 hours. Meanwhile, the sun will have only returned to Figure 1 after those 24 hours and will need to move for another hour or more to reach the ship at Figure 2, which means it takes 25 hours for the sun to return to the ship had it stayed at Figure 1. Thus, as the ship continues on its westward journey day by day, the sun constantly falls behind the ship's meridian time, leading the ship to have a time that is one day later than the solar time by the time it completes its circumnavigation when compared to Greenwich's meridian. On the other hand, if the ship sails from Figure 1 towards Figure 4, or east, it will encounter the sun one hour earlier than the 24 hours it would take to move to Figure 1. Therefore, after completing the circle 1.4.3.2.1, the time on the ship would be one day ahead of the time at Greenwich, or Figure 1. Captain Sir J. C. Ross notes on page 132, vol. 2, “On November 25, after sailing eastward and gaining 12 hours, we found it necessary, upon crossing the 180th degree and entering west longitude, to have two consecutive days of the same date in order to align our time with that of England, and this meant losing the extra time we had gained while still gaining more as we continued eastward.”

In further illustration of this matter, and to impress the mind of the readers with its importance as an evidence in support of the theory of[40] the earth’s sphericity, several authors have given the following story:—Two brothers, twins, born within a few minutes of each other, and therefore of the same age, on growing to manhood went to sea. They both circumnavigated the earth, but in opposite directions; and when they again met, one was a day older than the other!

To further illustrate this point and emphasize its significance as evidence supporting the theory of[40] the earth being round, several authors have recounted the following story: Two brothers, twins born just minutes apart and therefore the same age, set out to sea as they grew up. They both traveled around the world, but in opposite directions; when they finally reunited, one was a day older than the other!

Whatever truth there may be in this account, it is here shown to be no more favourable to the idea of rotundity than it is to the opposite fact that the earth is a plane; as both forms will permit of the same effect.

Whatever truth exists in this account, it shows that it is just as supportive of the idea of a round earth as it is of the opposite idea that the earth is flat; both shapes can produce the same result.

Another phenomenon supposed to prove rotundity, is found in the fact that Polaris, or the north polar star, gradually sinks to the horizon as the mariner approaches the equator, on passing which it becomes invisible. First, it is an ordinary effect of perspective for an object to appear lower and lower as the observer recedes. Let any one try the experiment of looking at a lighthouse, church spire, monument, gas-lamp, or other elevated object, from the distance of a few yards, and notice the angle at which it is observed: on going farther away, the angle will diminish and the object appear lower, until, if the distance be sufficiently great, the line-of-sight to the object, and the apparently[41] ascending surface of the Earth upon which it stands will converge to the angle which constitutes the vanishing point; at a single yard beyond which it will be invisible. This, then, is the necessary result of the everywhere visible law of perspective operating between the eye-line and the plane surface upon which the object stands; and has no relation whatever to rotundity.

Another phenomenon thought to demonstrate the Earth’s roundness is the fact that Polaris, or the North Star, gradually sinks toward the horizon as a sailor gets closer to the equator, after which it disappears completely. Initially, this is just a normal perspective effect where an object appears lower as the observer moves further away. If anyone attempts to observe a lighthouse, church spire, monument, gas lamp, or any other tall object from a short distance, they’ll notice the angle at which it's seen: as they move further away, the angle decreases and the object looks lower, until, if they go far enough, the line of sight to the object and the seemingly rising surface of the Earth underneath it converge at the angle that forms the vanishing point; at just one yard beyond that point, it will no longer be visible. This, then, is simply the inevitable result of the consistent laws of perspective between the line of sight and the flat surface where the object is located, and it has nothing to do with the Earth’s roundness.

It is not denied that a similar depression of a distant object would take place upon a globe; it is simply contended that it would not occur upon a globe exclusively. But if the Earth is a sphere and the pole star hangs over the northern axis, it would be impossible to see it for a single degree beyond the equator, or 90 degrees from the pole. The line-of-sight would become a tangent to the sphere, and consequently several thousand miles out of and divergent from the direction of the pole-star. Many cases, however, are on record of the north polar star being visible far beyond the equator, as far even as the tropic of Capricorn. In the Times newspaper of May 13, 1862, under the head of “Naval and Military Intelligence,” it is stated that Captain Wilkins distinctly saw the Southern Cross and the polar star at midnight in 23·53 degrees of latitude, and longitude 35·46.

It’s undeniable that a similar obscuring of a distant object would happen on a globe; it’s just argued that it wouldn’t happen exclusively on a globe. But if the Earth is a sphere and the pole star is directly above the northern axis, you wouldn’t be able to see it even a single degree beyond the equator or 90 degrees from the pole. The line of sight would become tangent to the sphere, and thus several thousand miles away and diverging from the direction of the pole star. However, there are many documented instances of the north polar star being visible well beyond the equator, even as far as the tropic of Capricorn. In the Times newspaper from May 13, 1862, in the section “Naval and Military Intelligence,” it’s reported that Captain Wilkins clearly saw the Southern Cross and the polar star at midnight at 23.53 degrees latitude and 35.46 degrees longitude.

[42]

[42]

Earth as a globe

FIG. 20.

FIG. 20.

This would be utterly impossible if the Earth were a globe, as shown in the diagram, Figure 20. Let N represent the north pole, E E the equator, C C the tropic of Capricorn, and P the polar star. It will be evident that the line-of-sight C D being a tangent to the Earth beyond the equator E must diverge from the axis N and could not by any known possibility cause the star P to be visible to an observer at C. No matter how distant the star P, the line C D being divergent from the direction N P could never come in contact with it. The fact, then, that the polar star has often been seen from many degrees beyond the equator, is really an[43] important argument against the doctrine of the Earth’s rotundity.

This would be totally impossible if the Earth were a globe, as shown in the diagram, Figure 20. Let N stand for the north pole, E for the equator, C for the tropic of Capricorn, and P for the polar star. It's clear that the line of sight C D, which is a tangent to the Earth beyond the equator E, must diverge from the axis N and could never, by any known possibility, allow the star P to be visible to an observer at C. No matter how far away the star P is, the line C D, being divergent from the direction N P, could never make contact with it. Therefore, the fact that the polar star has been seen from many degrees beyond the equator is a significant argument against the idea of the Earth being round.[43]

It has been thought that because a pendulum vibrates more rapidly in the northern region than at the equator, the Earth is thereby proved to be a globe; and because the variation in the velocity is not exactly as it should be if all the surface of the Earth were equidistant from the centre, it has been concluded that the Earth is an oblate spheroid, or that its diameter is rather less through the poles than it is through the equator. The difference was calculated by Newton to be the 235th part of the whole diameter; or that the polar was to the equatorial diameter as 689 to 692. Huygens gave the proportion as 577 to 875 or a difference of about one-third of the whole diameter. Others have given still different proportions; but recently the difference of opinion has become so great that many have concluded that the Earth is really instead of oblate an oblong spheroid. It is certain that the question when attempted to be answered by measuring arcs of the meridian, is less satisfactory than was expected. This will be evident from the following quotation from the account of the ordnance survey of Great Britain, which was conducted by the Duke of Richmond, Col. Mudge, General Roy, Mr. Dalby, and others,[44] who measured base lines on Hounslow Heath and Salisbury Plain with glass rods and steel chains: “when these were connected by a chain of triangles and the length computed the result did not differ more than one inch from the actual measurements—a convincing proof of the accuracy with which all the operations had been conducted.

It has been believed that since a pendulum swings faster in the northern region than at the equator, this proves that the Earth is a globe. Additionally, because the difference in speed isn't exactly as it would be if the Earth's surface were the same distance from the center, it has been concluded that the Earth is an oblate spheroid, meaning its diameter is slightly smaller at the poles than at the equator. Newton calculated this difference to be the 235th part of the total diameter, or that the polar diameter is to the equatorial diameter as 689 to 692. Huygens presented the ratio as 577 to 875, indicating a difference of about one-third of the total diameter. Others have suggested different ratios; however, recently the disagreement has grown so significant that many have concluded the Earth is actually an oblong spheroid rather than an oblate one. It’s clear that trying to answer this question by measuring arcs of the meridian is not as satisfying as expected. This will be evident from the following quote from the account of the ordnance survey of Great Britain, conducted by the Duke of Richmond, Col. Mudge, General Roy, Mr. Dalby, and others,[44] who measured base lines on Hounslow Heath and Salisbury Plain using glass rods and steel chains: “when these were connected by a chain of triangles and the length computed, the result did not differ by more than one inch from the actual measurements—a convincing proof of the accuracy with which all the operations had been carried out."

The two stations, of Beachy Head in Sussex and Dunnose in the Isle of Wight, are visible from each other, and more than 64 miles asunder, nearly in a direction from east to west; their exact distance was found by the geodetical operations to be 339,397 feet (64 miles and 1477 feet). The azimuth, or bearing of the line between them with respect to the meridian, and also the latitude of Beachy Head, were determined by astronomical observations. From these data the length of a degree perpendicular to the meridian was computed; and this, compared with the length of a meridional degree in the same latitude, gave the proportion of the polar to the equatorial axis. The result thus obtained, however, differed considerably from that obtained by meridional degrees. It has been found impossible to explain the want of agreement in a satisfactory way. * * By comparing the celestial with the terrestrial arcs, the length of degrees in various parallels was determined[45] as in the following table:—

The two stations, Beachy Head in Sussex and Dunnose on the Isle of Wight, can be seen from each other, and they are over 64 miles apart, roughly running from east to west. Their exact distance was measured through geodetic operations and found to be 339,397 feet (64 miles and 1,477 feet). The azimuth, or direction of the line between them in relation to the meridian, and also the latitude of Beachy Head were determined through astronomical observations. Using this data, the length of a degree perpendicular to the meridian was calculated; comparing this with the length of a meridional degree at the same latitude provided the ratio of the polar to the equatorial axis. However, the result obtained differed significantly from the one derived from meridional degrees. It has proven impossible to satisfactorily explain the lack of agreement. By comparing celestial with terrestrial arcs, the length of degrees in various parallels was determined[45] as shown in the following table:—

  Latitude of
middle
point.
Fathoms.
  °  
Arbury Hill & Clifton 52 50 29·8 60,766
Blenheim and Clifton 52 38 56·1 60,769
Greenwich and Clifton 52 28  5·7 60,794
Dunnose and Clifton 52  2 19·8 60,820
Arbury Hill and Greenwich 51 51  4·1 60,849
Dunnose and Arbury Hill 51 35 18·2 60,864
Blenheim and Dunnose 51 13 18·2 60,890
Dunnose and Greenwich 51  2 54·2 60,884

This table presents a singular deviation from the common rule; for instead of the degrees increasing as we proceed from north to south, they appear to decrease, as if the Earth were an oblong instead of an oblate spheroid. * * The measurements of small arcs of the meridian in other countries have presented similar instances.”[4]

This table shows a unique exception to the usual rule; instead of the degrees increasing as we move from north to south, they seem to decrease, as if the Earth were an oblong shape rather than an oblate spheroid. * * The measurements of small segments of the meridian in other countries have shown similar cases.”[4]

[4] Encyclopedia of Geography, by Hugh Murray and several Professors in the University of Edinburgh.

[4] Encyclopedia of Geography, by Hugh Murray and several professors at the University of Edinburgh.

A number of French Academicians who measured above three degrees of the meridian in Peru, gave as the result of their labours the first degree of the meridian from the equator as 56,653 toises; whilst another company of Academicians, who proceeded to Bothnia in Lapland, gave as the result of their calculation 57,422 toises for the length of a degree cutting the polar circle. But a more recent measurement made by the Swedish Astronomers in Bothnia shows the French to have been incorrect, having[46] given the degree there 196 toises more than the true length. Other observations have been made, but as no two sets of experiments agree in result, it would be very unsatisfactory to conclude from them that the Earth is an oblate spheroid.

A group of French Academicians who measured over three degrees of the meridian in Peru concluded that the first degree of the meridian from the equator is 56,653 toises. Meanwhile, another team of Academicians who went to Bothnia in Lapland found that the length of a degree at the polar circle is 57,422 toises. However, a more recent measurement by Swedish astronomers in Bothnia shows that the French were incorrect, having reported the degree there as 196 toises longer than the actual length. Other observations have been made, but since no two sets of experiments yield consistent results, it would be very unsatisfactory to conclude from them that the Earth is an oblate spheroid.

Returning to the pendulum, it will be found to be equally unsatisfactory as a proof of this peculiar rotundity of the Earth. It is argued that as the length of a seconds pendulum at the equator is 39,027 inches, and 39,197 inches at the north pole, that the Earth must be a globe, having a less diameter through its axis than through its equator. But this proceeds upon the assumption that the Earth is a globe having a “centre of attraction of gravitation,” towards which all bodies gravitate or fall; and as the pendulum is a falling body under certain restraint, the fact that it oscillates or falls more rapidly at the north than it does at the equator, is a proof that the north is nearer to the centre of attraction, or the centre of the Earth, than is the equatorial region; and, of course, if nearer, the radius must be shorter; and therefore the “Earth is a spheroid flattened at the poles.” This is very ingenious and very plausible, but, unfortunately for its character as an argument, the essential evidence is wanting that the Earth is a globe at all! whether oblate or oblong, or truly spherical, are questions logically misplaced.[47] It should also be first proved that no other cause could operate besides greater proximity to the centre of gravity, to produce the variable oscillations of a pendulum. This not being attempted, the whole subject must be condemned as logically insufficient, irregular, and worthless for its intended purpose. Many philosophers have ascribed the alterations in the oscillations of a pendulum to the diminished temperature of the northern centre. That the heat gradually and almost uniformly diminishes on passing from the equator to the north is well ascertained. “The mean annual temperature of the whole Earth at the level of the sea is 50° Fah. For different latitudes it is as under:—

Returning to the pendulum, it's clear that it's not a convincing proof of the Earth's peculiar roundness. It's argued that the length of a seconds pendulum at the equator is 39,027 inches, while at the North Pole it's 39,197 inches, suggesting that the Earth must be a globe, with a smaller diameter along its axis than through its equator. However, this is based on the assumption that the Earth is a globe with a “center of gravitational attraction” that pulls all objects toward it. Since the pendulum is a falling object under specific constraints, the fact that it swings or falls faster in the north than at the equator implies that the north is closer to the center of this gravitational pull, or the Earth's center, than the equatorial region. If it's closer, then the radius must be shorter, hence the statement that “the Earth is a spheroid flattened at the poles.” This reasoning is quite clever and seems reasonable, but unfortunately, it lacks essential evidence that the Earth is a globe at all! Whether it is oblate, elongated, or perfectly spherical are questions that are misplaced logically.[47] It should also be demonstrated first that no other factor could influence the variable oscillations of a pendulum besides being closer to the center of gravity. Since this hasn't been addressed, the entire topic must be considered logically insufficient, irregular, and useless for its intended purpose. Many philosophers have attributed the changes in pendulum oscillations to the cooler temperatures at the northern center. It's well established that heat gradually and almost uniformly decreases when moving from the equator northward. “The average annual temperature of the Earth at sea level is 50° Fahrenheit. For different latitudes, it is as follows:—

  Degrees.   Inches.  
Latitude (Equator) 0 84·2 Length of Pendulum 39,027  
10 82·6  
20 78·1
30 71·1
40 62·6
(London) 50 53·6 39,139
60 45·0
70 38·1
80 33·6
(Pole) 90 00·0 39,197 [5]

[5] “Million of Facts,” by Sir Richard Phillips, p. 475.

[5] “Millions of Facts,” by Sir Richard Phillips, p. 475.

“All the solid bodies with which we are surrounded are constantly undergoing changes of bulk corresponding to the variations of temperature. * * The expansion and contraction of metals by heat and cold form subjects of[48] serious and careful attention to chronometer makers, as will appear by the following statements:—The length of the pendulum vibrating seconds, in vacuo, in the latitude of London (51° 31′ 8″ north), at the level of the sea, and at the temperature of 62°, has been ascertained with the greatest precision to be 39·13929 inches: now, as the metal of which it is composed is constantly subject to variation of temperature, it cannot but happen that its length is constantly varying; and when it is further stated that if the “bob” be let down ¹⁄₁₀₀th of an inch, the clock will lose 10 seconds in 24 hours; that the elongation of ¹⁄₁₀₀₀th of an inch will cause it to lose one second per day; and that a change of temperature equal to 30° Fah. will alter its length ¹⁄₅₀₀₀th part and occasion an error in the rate of going of 8 seconds per day, it will appear evident that some plan must be devised for obviating so serious an inconvenience.”[6]

“All the solid objects around us are constantly changing size based on temperature fluctuations. The expansion and contraction of metals due to heat and cold are important issues for clockmakers, as shown in the following statements:—The length of the pendulum oscillating once every second, in a vacuum, at the latitude of London (51° 31′ 8″ north), at sea level, and at a temperature of 62°, has been measured very precisely to be 39.13929 inches. Because the metal it’s made of is always affected by temperature changes, its length is always changing. Furthermore, if the “bob” is lowered by ¹⁄₁₀₀th of an inch, the clock will lose 10 seconds in 24 hours; an elongation of ¹⁄₁₀₀₀th of an inch will make it lose one second per day; and a temperature change of 30° Fahrenheit will change its length by ¹⁄₅₀₀₀th of an inch and cause an error of 8 seconds per day. It’s clear that a solution needs to be found to address this significant issue.”[6]

[6] “Noad’s Lectures on Chemistry,” p. 41.

[6] “Noad’s Lectures on Chemistry,” p. 41.

From these data it is readily seen that the variations in the rate of a pendulum as it is carried from the equator towards the north are sufficiently explained, without supposing that they arise from a peculiar spheroidal form of the Earth.

From this data, it's clear that the changes in the rate of a pendulum as it's moved from the equator northward can be explained without assuming that they come from the Earth's unique spherical shape.

Others have attributed the variable motions of the pendulum to increased density of the air[49] on going northwards. That the condition of the air must have some influence in this respect will be seen from the following extract from experiments on pendulums by Dr. Derham, recorded in numbers 294 and 480 of the Philosophical Transactions:—“The arches of vibration in vacuo were larger than in the open air, or in the receiver before it was exhausted; the enlargement or diminution of the arches of vibration were constantly proportional to the quantity of air, or rarity, or density of it, which was left in the receiver of the air-pump. And as the vibrations were longer or shorter, so the times were accordingly, viz., two seconds in an hour when the vibrations were longest, and less and less as the air was re-admitted, and the vibrations shortened.”

Others have linked the changing movements of the pendulum to the greater density of air as one moves northward. It's clear that the state of the air must have some effect on this, as shown in the following excerpt from Dr. Derham's experiments on pendulums, recorded in numbers 294 and 480 of the Philosophical Transactions:—“The arcs of vibration in vacuo were larger than in open air, or in the chamber before it was emptied; the increase or decrease of the arcs of vibration was constantly proportional to the amount of air, whether it was rarefied or dense, that remained in the air-pump's chamber. As the vibrations became longer or shorter, the times adjusted accordingly, specifically, two seconds in an hour when the vibrations were longest, and progressively less as air was reintroduced, leading to shorter vibrations.”

Thus there are two distinct and tangible causes which necessarily operate to produce the variable oscillations of a pendulum, without supposing any distortion in the supposed rotundity of the Earth. First, if the pendulum vibrates in the air, which is colder and therefore denser in the north than at the equator, it must be more or less resisted in its passage through it; and, secondly, if it vibrates in vacuo, the temperature being less, the length must be less, the arcs of vibration less, and the velocity greater. In going towards the equator, the temperature[50] increases, the length becomes greater, the arcs increase, and the times of vibration diminish.

Thus, there are two clear and significant causes that lead to the varying movements of a pendulum, without assuming any changes in the Earth’s shape. First, if the pendulum swings in air, which is colder and therefore denser in the north than at the equator, it will face more or less resistance as it moves through it; and second, if it swings in a vacuum, with a lower temperature, the length must be shorter, the arcs of swing smaller, and the speed greater. As it moves toward the equator, the temperature increases, the length becomes greater, the arcs expand, and the swing times decrease.

Another argument for the globular form of the Earth is the following:—The degrees of longitude radiating from the north pole gradually increase in extent as they approach the equator; beyond which they again converge towards the south. To this it is replied that no actual measurement of a degree of longitude has ever been made south of the equator! If it be said that mariners have sailed round the world in the southern region and have computed the length of the degrees, it is again replied that such evidence is unfavourable to the doctrine of rotundity. It will be seen from the following table of what the degrees of longitude would be if the earth were a globe of 25,000 miles circumference, and comparing these with the results of practical navigation, that the diminution of degrees of longitude beyond the equator is purely imaginary.

Another argument for the round shape of the Earth is this: the degrees of longitude that extend from the north pole gradually widen as they near the equator, and then they come together again towards the south. In response, it's pointed out that no actual measurement of a degree of longitude has ever been taken south of the equator! If it's claimed that sailors have circumnavigated the globe in the southern hemisphere and have calculated the length of the degrees, it's countered that such evidence doesn’t support the idea of the Earth being round. The following table shows what the degrees of longitude would look like if the Earth were a globe with a circumference of 25,000 miles, and when compared to the results of practical navigation, it will become clear that the reduction of degrees of longitude beyond the equator is purely imaginary.

Latitudes at different longitudes:—

Latitudes at various longitudes:—

Latitude  1 = 59·99 nautical miles.  
10 = 59·09  
20 = 56·38  
30 = 51·96  
34 = 49·74 (Cape Town)
40 = 45·96  
45 = 42·45 (Port Jackson, Sydney)
50 = 38·57  
56 = 33·55 (Cape Horn)
60 = 30·00  
[51]65 = 25·36  
70 = 20·52  
75 = 15·53  
80 = 10·42  
85 =  5·53  
86 =  4·19  
87 =  3·14  
88 =  2·09  
89 =  1·05  
90 =  0·00  

According to the above table (which is copied from a large Mercator’s chart in the library of the Mechanics’ Institute, Royal Hill, Greenwich), the distance round the Earth at the Antarctic circle would only be about 9,000 miles. But practical navigators give the distance from the Cape of Good Hope to Port Jackson as 8,000 miles; from Port Jackson to Cape Horn as 8,000 miles; and from Cape Horn to the Cape of Good Hope, 6,000 miles, making together 22,000 miles. The average longitude of these places is 45°, at which parallel the circuit of the Earth, if it be a globe, should only be 14,282 miles. Here, then, is an error between the theory of rotundity and practical sailing of 7,718 miles. But there are several statements made by Sir James Clarke Ross which tend to make the disparity even greater: at page 236, vol. 2, of “South Sea Voyages,” it is said “From near Cape Horn to Port Philip (in Melbourne, Australia) the distance is 9,000 miles.” These two places are 143 degrees of longitude from each[52] other. Therefore the whole extent of the Earth’s circumference is a mere arithmetical question. If 143 degrees make 9,000 miles, what will be the distance made by the whole 360 degrees into which the surface is divided? The answer is, 22,657 miles; or, 8,357 miles more than the theory of rotundity would permit. It must be borne in mind, however, that the above distances are nautical measure, which, reduced to statute miles, gives the actual distance round the Southern region at a given latitude as 26,433 statute miles; or nearly 1,500 miles more than the largest circumference ever assigned to the Earth at the equator.

According to the table above (which is taken from a large Mercator’s chart in the library of the Mechanics’ Institute, Royal Hill, Greenwich), the distance around the Earth at the Antarctic Circle is only about 9,000 miles. However, practical navigators state that the distance from the Cape of Good Hope to Port Jackson is 8,000 miles; from Port Jackson to Cape Horn is also 8,000 miles; and from Cape Horn back to the Cape of Good Hope is 6,000 miles, totaling 22,000 miles. The average longitude of these locations is 45°, where the circuit of the Earth, assuming it's a globe, should only be 14,282 miles. This shows a discrepancy of 7,718 miles between the theory of a round Earth and actual sailing distances. Furthermore, several claims made by Sir James Clarke Ross suggest an even larger difference: on page 236, vol. 2, of “South Sea Voyages,” it’s mentioned that “From near Cape Horn to Port Philip (in Melbourne, Australia), the distance is 9,000 miles.” These two places are 143 degrees of longitude apart. So, figuring out the total circumference of the Earth is just a math problem. If 143 degrees equals 9,000 miles, what would 360 degrees equal? The answer is 22,657 miles, which is 8,357 miles more than the round Earth theory suggests. It’s important to note that the distances mentioned are in nautical measurements, which, when converted to statute miles, show the actual distance around the Southern region at a given latitude to be 26,433 statute miles; that's nearly 1,500 miles more than the largest circumference ever attributed to the Earth at the equator.

But actual measurement of a degree of longitude in Australia or some other land far south of the equator can alone place this matter beyond dispute. The problem to be solved might be given as the following:—A degree of longitude in England at the latitude of 50° N. is 38·57 nautical or 45 statute miles; at the latitude of Port Jackson in Australia, which is 45° S., a degree of longitude, if the Earth is a globe, should be 42·45 nautical or 49·52 statute miles. But if the Earth is a plane, and the distances above referred to as given by nautical men are correct, a degree of longitude on the parallel of Port Jackson will be 69·44 statute miles, being a difference of 19·92 or nearly 20 statute miles.[53] In other words, a degree of longitude along the southern part of Australia ought to be, if the Earth is a plane, nearly 20 miles greater than a degree of longitude on the southern coast of England. This is the point which has yet to be settled. The day is surely not far distant when the scientific world will demand that the question be decided by proper geodetical operations! And this not altogether for the sake of determining the true figure of the Earth, but also for the purpose of ascertaining, if possible, the cause of the many anomalies observed in navigating the southern region. These anomalies have led to the loss of many vessels and the sacrifice of a fearful amount of life and property. “In the southern hemisphere, navigators to India have often fancied themselves east of the Cape when still West, and have been driven ashore on the African coast, which according to their reckoning lay behind them. This misfortune happened to a fine frigate, the “Challenger,” in 1845.”[7] “Assuredly there are many shipwrecks from alleged errors in reckoning which may arise from a somewhat false idea of the general form and measurement of the Earth’s surface. Such a subject, therefore, ought to be candidly and boldly discussed.”[8]

But actually measuring a degree of longitude in Australia or some other place far south of the equator can definitively clarify this issue. The problem to solve can be summarized as follows: A degree of longitude in England at the latitude of 50° N. is 38.57 nautical miles or 45 statute miles; at the latitude of Port Jackson in Australia, which is 45° S., a degree of longitude, if the Earth is a globe, should be 42.45 nautical miles or 49.52 statute miles. However, if the Earth is flat, and the distances mentioned, as stated by navigators, are accurate, a degree of longitude at the latitude of Port Jackson would be 69.44 statute miles, which is a difference of 19.92 or nearly 20 statute miles.[53] In other words, a degree of longitude in the southern part of Australia should be, if the Earth is flat, nearly 20 miles more than a degree of longitude on the southern coast of England. This is the issue that still needs resolution. The time is surely approaching when the scientific community will insist that this question be settled through proper geodetic methods! This is not only to determine the true shape of the Earth but also to find out, if possible, the reason for the many strange discrepancies observed in navigating the southern region. These discrepancies have caused the loss of numerous ships and resulted in a significant loss of life and property. "In the southern hemisphere, navigators heading to India have often thought they were east of the Cape when they were actually still west, leading them to be shipwrecked on the African coast, which they believed was behind them. This misfortune occurred to a fine frigate, the 'Challenger,' in 1845." "Certainly, there are many shipwrecks due to alleged errors in navigation that may stem from a somewhat mistaken view of the overall shape and measurement of the Earth's surface. Therefore, this subject should be discussed openly and courageously."

[7] “Tour through Creation,” by the Rev. Thomas Milner, M.A.

[7] “Tour through Creation,” by Rev. Thomas Milner, M.A.

[8] “The Builder,” Sept. 20, 1862, in a “review” of a recently-published work on Astronomy.

[8] “The Builder,” Sept. 20, 1862, in a “review” of a recently published work on Astronomy.

[54]

[54]

It is commonly believed that surveyors when laying out railways and canals, are obliged to allow 8 inches per mile for the Earth’s curvature; and that if this were not done in the latter case the water would not be stationary, but would flow on until at the end of one mile in each direction, although the canal should have the same depth throughout, the surface would stand 8 inches higher in the middle than at the ends. In other words, that the bottom of a canal in which the allowance of 8 inches per mile had not been made, would be a chord to the surface of the contained water, which would be an arc of a circle. To this it is replied, that both in regard to railways and canals, wherever an allowance has been attempted the work has not been satisfactory; and so irregular were the results in the earlier days of railway, canal, and other surveying, that, the most eminent engineers abandoned the practice of the old “forward levelling” and allowing for convexity; and adopted what is now called the “double sight” or “back-and-fore sight” method. It was considered that whether the surface were convex or horizontal, or whether the convexity were more or less than the supposed degree, would be of no consequence in practice if the spirit level or theodolite were employed to read both backwards and forwards; for whatever degree of convexity[55] existed, one “sight” would compensate for the other; and if the surface were horizontal, the same mode of levelling would apply. So important did the ordnance department of the Government consider this matter, that it was deemed necessary to make the abandonment of all ideas of rotundity compulsory, and in a standing order (No. 6) of the House of Lords as to the preparation of sections for railways, &c., the following language is used, “That the section be drawn to the same horizontal scale as the plan; and to a vertical scale of not less than one inch to every one hundred feet; and shall show the surface of the ground marked on the plan, the intended level of the proposed work, the height of every embankment, and the depth of every cutting; and a datum HORIZONTAL LINE, which shall be the same throughout the whole length of the work, or any branch thereof respectively; and shall be referred to some fixed point stated in writing on the section, near some portion of such work; and in the case of a canal, cut, navigation, turnpike, or other carriage road, or railway, near either of the termini.” No. 44 of the standing orders of the House of Commons is similar to the above order (No. 6) of the House of Lords.

It is widely accepted that when surveyors layout railways and canals, they need to account for the Earth’s curvature by allowing 8 inches for every mile. If this allowance isn’t made, the water wouldn’t be level, but instead would rise by 8 inches in the middle compared to the ends after a mile, even if the canal is uniform in depth. This means that without the 8-inch offset, the canal bottom would form a straight line, while the water surface would curve like an arc. In response, it has been argued that in both railway and canal construction, attempts to make this allowance have led to unsatisfactory results. In the early days of surveying for railways, canals, and similar projects, the results were so inconsistent that leading engineers stopped using the old method of “forward leveling” that accounted for curvature and switched to what is now known as the “double sight” or “back-and-fore sight” method. It was believed that it didn't matter whether the surface was curved or flat, or if the curvature was less or more than expected; using a spirit level or theodolite to read in both directions would take care of the issue. Whatever curvature existed would balance out, and if the surface was flat, the same leveling technique would still apply. The government’s ordnance department considered this so crucial that it required the outright rejection of any concepts of curvature. In a standing order (No. 6) from the House of Lords regarding the preparation of sections for railways, it states, “That the section be drawn to the same horizontal scale as the plan; and to a vertical scale of no less than one inch for every one hundred feet; and shall show the surface of the ground marked on the plan, the intended level of the proposed work, the height of every embankment, and the depth of every cutting; and a datum HORIZONTAL LINE, which shall be the same throughout the whole length of the work, or any branch thereof respectively; and shall be referred to some fixed point stated in writing on the section, near some portion of such work; and in the case of a canal, cut, navigation, turnpike, or other carriage road, or railway, near either of the termini.” No. 44 of the standing orders of the House of Commons is similar to the above order (No. 6) of the House of Lords.

Thus it is evident that the doctrine of the Earth’s rotundity cannot be mixed up with the[56] practical operations of civil engineers and surveyors, and to prevent the waste of time and the destruction of property which necessarily followed the doings of some who were determined to involve the convexity of the Earth’s surface in their calculations, the very Government of the country has been obliged to interfere! Every survey of this and other countries, whether ordnance or otherwise, is now carried out in connection with a horizontal datum, and therefore, as no other method proves satisfactory, it is virtually an admission by all the most practical scientific men of the day that the Earth cannot be other than a plane!

It's clear that the idea of the Earth being round can't be mixed with the practical work of civil engineers and surveyors. To avoid wasting time and damaging property, which inevitably happened because some insisted on factoring in the curve of the Earth in their calculations, the government has had to step in! Every survey in this and other countries, whether it’s an ordnance survey or not, is now done using a horizontal baseline. Therefore, since no other method seems effective, this is essentially an acknowledgment by all the leading practical scientists today that the Earth must be flat!

An argument for the Earth’s convexity is thought by many to be found in the following facts:—“Fluid or semi-fluid substances in a state of motion invariably assume the globular form, as rain, hail, dew, mercury, and melted lead, which, poured from a great height becomes divided into spherical masses, as in the manufacture of small shot, &c.” “There is abundant evidence from geology that the Earth has been a fluid or semi-fluid mass, and it could not, therefore, continue in a state of motion through space without becoming spherical.” Without denying that the Earth has been, at some former period, in a pulpy or semi-fluid state, it is requisite to prove beyond all doubt that it has a[57] motion upon axes and through space, or the conclusion that it is therefore spherical is premature and illogical. It will be shown in a subsequent part of this work, that such axial and orbital motion does not exist, and therefore any argument founded upon and including it as a fact is necessarily fallacious. In addition to this, it may be remarked that the tendency in falling fluids to become globular is owing to what has been called “attraction of cohesion” (not “attraction of gravitation”), which is very limited in its operation. It is confined to small quantities of matter. If, in the manufacture of small shot, the melted metal is allowed to fall in masses of several ounces or pounds, instead of being divided into particles weighing only a few grains, it will never take a spherical form, and shot of an inch in diameter could not be made by this process. Bullets of even half-an-inch diameter can only be made by casting the metal into spherical moulds. In tropical countries, the rain instead of falling in drops or small globules, often comes down in large irregular masses, which have no approximation whatever to sphericity. So that it is manifestly unjust to affirm of large masses of matter like the Earth that which only belongs to minute portions or a few grains in weight. The whole matter taken together entirely fails as an argument for the Earth’s rotundity.

An argument for the Earth’s roundness is believed by many to be supported by the following facts: “Fluid or semi-fluid substances in motion always take on a spherical shape, like rain, hail, dew, mercury, and melted lead, which when poured from a great height breaks into round droplets, similar to the process of making small shot.” “There’s plenty of geological evidence that the Earth was once a fluid or semi-fluid mass, and it couldn’t keep moving through space without becoming spherical.” While it’s true that the Earth has been in a semi-fluid state at some point in the past, it’s crucial to establish beyond doubt that it has a[57] motion around its axes and through space; otherwise, claiming that it’s spherical is premature and illogical. It will be shown later in this work that such axial and orbital motion doesn’t exist, so any argument based on it is inherently flawed. Additionally, it can be noted that the tendency of falling fluids to form into spheres is due to what is called “cohesion attraction” (not “gravitational attraction”), which is very limited in its effects. It only applies to small amounts of matter. If, during the production of small shot, the melted metal falls in large masses of several ounces or pounds instead of in tiny particles weighing only a few grains, it will never become spherical, and shot an inch in diameter couldn’t be created through this process. Bullets that are even half an inch wide can only be made by pouring the metal into spherical molds. In tropical regions, rain often falls as large, irregular blobs rather than in drops or small spheres, which have no resemblance to sphericity. Therefore, it’s clearly unfair to claim that large masses of matter like the Earth exhibit characteristics that only apply to tiny particles or a few grains. Overall, this argument fails to support the Earth's roundness.

[58]

[58]

Those who hold that the Earth is a globe will often affirm, with visible enthusiasm, that in an eclipse of the Moon there is proof positive of rotundity. That the shadow of the Earth upon the Moon is always round; and that nothing but a globe could, in all positions, cast a circular shadow. Here again the essential requirements of an argument are wanting. It is not proved that the Moon is eclipsed by a shadow. It is not proved that the Earth moves in an orbit, and therefore takes different positions. It is not proved that the Moon receives her light from the Sun, and that therefore her surface is darkened by the Earth intercepting the Sun’s light. It will be shown in the proper place that the Earth has no motion in space or on axes; that it is not a shadow which eclipses the Moon; that the Moon is not a reflector of the Sun’s light, but is self-luminous; and therefore could not possibly be obscured by a shadow from any object whatever. The subject is only introduced here because it forms one of the category of supposed evidences of the Earth’s rotundity. But to call that an argument where every necessary proposition is assumed, is to stultify both the judgment and the reasoning powers!

Those who believe that the Earth is a globe often assert, with clear enthusiasm, that an eclipse of the Moon provides definitive proof of its round shape. They point out that the Earth's shadow on the Moon is always round and that only a globe could cast a circular shadow from all angles. However, once again, the fundamental requirements of an argument are missing. It is not proven that the Moon is eclipsed by a shadow. It is not proven that the Earth moves in an orbit, and so does not take different positions. It is not proven that the Moon gets its light from the Sun, and therefore that its surface is darkened when the Earth blocks the Sun's light. It will be shown later that the Earth has no motion in space or on axes; that it is not a shadow that causes the Moon's eclipse; that the Moon does not just reflect the Sun's light, but is self-luminous; and therefore could not be obscured by a shadow from any object. This topic is brought up here because it is part of the supposed evidence for the Earth's roundness. But to call that an argument when every necessary assertion is assumed is to undermine both judgment and reasoning!

Many place great reliance upon what is called the “spherical excess” observed in levelling, as a proof of the Earth’s rotundity. In Castle’s[59] Treatise on Levelling it is stated that “the angles taken between any three points on the surface of the Earth by the theodolite, are, strictly speaking, spherical angles, and their sum must exceed 180 degrees; and the lines bounding them are not the chords as they should be, but the tangents to the Earth. This excess is inappreciable in common cases, but in the larger triangles it becomes necessary to allow for it, and to diminish each of the angles of the observed triangle by one-third of the spherical excess. To calculate this excess, divide the area of the triangle in feet by the radius of the Earth in seconds and the quotient is the excess.”

Many people place a lot of trust in what’s known as the “spherical excess” seen in leveling as evidence of the Earth’s roundness. In Castle’s[59] Treatise on Levelling, it says, “The angles measured between any three points on the surface of the Earth using a theodolite are, technically speaking, spherical angles, and their sum should exceed 180 degrees; the lines that form them are not the chords like they should be, but the tangents to the Earth. This excess is barely noticeable in everyday cases, but in larger triangles, it’s important to account for it and reduce each of the angles of the triangle observed by one-third of the spherical excess. To calculate this excess, divide the area of the triangle in feet by the radius of the Earth in seconds, and the result is the excess.”

The following observation as made by surveyors, also bears upon the subject:—If a spirit-level or theodolite be “levelled,” and a given point be read upon a graduated staff at the distance of about or more than 100 chains, this point will have an altitude slightly in excess of the altitude of the cross-hair of the theodolite; and if the theodolite be removed to the position of the graduated staff and again levelled, and a backward sight taken to the distance of 100 chains, another excess of altitude will be observed; and this excess will go on increasing as often as the experiment or backward and forward observation is repeated. From this it is argued that the line of sight from the spirit-level or[60] theodolite is a tangent, and that the surface of the Earth is therefore spherical.

The following observation made by surveyors is relevant: If a spirit level or theodolite is "leveled," and a specific point is measured on a graduated staff at a distance of about 100 chains or more, this point will be slightly higher than the cross-hair of the theodolite. If the theodolite is then moved to the location of the graduated staff, leveled again, and a backward sight is taken back to a distance of 100 chains, another increase in altitude will be noted; and this increase will continue to grow each time the experiment or backward and forward observation is repeated. From this, it's suggested that the line of sight from the spirit level or theodolite is a tangent, indicating that the surface of the Earth is spherical.

Of a similar character is the following observation:—If a theodolite or spirit-level be placed upon the sea-shore, and “levelled,” and directed towards the sea, the line of the horizon will be observed to be a given amount below the cross-hair of the instrument, to which a certain dip, or inclination from the level will have to be given to bring the cross-hair and the sea horizon together. It is concluded that as the sea horizon is always observed to be below the cross-hair of the “levelled” theodolite, the line of sight is a tangent, the surface of the water convex, and therefore the Earth is a globe.

Of a similar nature is the following observation:—If you set a theodolite or spirit level on the shoreline, level it, and point it towards the sea, you'll notice that the horizon is a specific distance below the cross-hair of the instrument. To align the cross-hair with the sea horizon, you need to adjust for a certain dip or angle from the level. It’s concluded that since the sea horizon is consistently below the cross-hair of the leveled theodolite, the line of sight acts as a tangent, the surface of the water is curved, and therefore the Earth is round.

Magnifying glass

FIG. 21.

FIG. 21.

The conclusion derived from the last three observations is exceedingly plausible, and would completely satisfy the minds of scientific men as to the Earth’s sphericity if a perfect explanation could not be given. The whole matter has been specially and carefully examined; and one very simple experiment will show that the effects observed do not arise from rotundity in the Earth’s surface, but from a certain peculiarity in the instruments employed. Take a convex lens or a magnifying glass and hold it over a straight line drawn across a sheet of paper. If the glass be so held that a part of the straight line can be seen through it, and another part seen[61] outside it, a difference in the direction of the line will be observed, as shown in the diagram Figure 21. Let A B C represent a straight line. If a lens is now held an inch, or more, according to its focal length, over the part of the line A B, and the slightest amount out of its centre, that part of the line A B which passes under the lens will be seen in the direction of the figures 1.2; but if the lens be now moved a little out of its central position in the opposite direction, the line B C will be observed at 3.4, or below B C. A lens is a magnifying glass because it dilates or spreads out from its centre the objects observed through it Therefore whatever is magnified by it is seen a little out of its axis or centre. This is again necessitated by the fact that the axis or actual centre is always occupied by the cross-hair. Thus the line-of-sight in the theodolite or spirit-level not being axial or[62] absolutely central, reads upon a graduated staff a position which is necessarily slightly divergent from the axis of vision; and this is the source of that “spherical excess” which has so long been considered by surveyors as an important proof of the Earth’s rotundity. In this instance, as, indeed, in all the others given as evidence that the Earth is a globe, the premises do not fully warrant the conclusion—which is premature,—drawn before the whole subject is fairly examined; and when other causes are amply sufficient to explain the effects observed.

The conclusion drawn from the last three observations is very reasonable and would fully satisfy scientists regarding the Earth’s roundness, even if a perfect explanation cannot be provided. The whole issue has been specifically and carefully investigated, and one very simple experiment will demonstrate that the observed effects are not due to the Earth's surface being round, but rather to a certain peculiarity in the instruments used. Take a convex lens or a magnifying glass and hold it over a straight line drawn on a piece of paper. If the glass is held so that part of the straight line can be seen through it, and another part seen outside of it, a difference in the direction of the line will be noticeable, as illustrated in the diagram Figure 21. Let A B C represent a straight line. If a lens is held an inch or more above the part of the line A B, slightly off-center, the part of the line A B underneath the lens will appear to align with the figures 1.2; but if the lens is then moved a little off-center in the opposite direction, the line B C will be seen at 3.4, or below B C. A lens is considered a magnifying glass because it dilates or spreads out the objects observed through it from its center. Therefore, whatever is magnified will appear slightly off its axis or center. This is also due to the fact that the axis or actual center is always occupied by the cross-hair. Consequently, the line of sight in the theodolite or spirit level is not perfectly axial or [62] strictly central, which results in reading a graduated staff at a position that is necessarily slightly divergent from the line of vision; and this is the source of the “spherical excess” that has long been regarded by surveyors as significant evidence of the Earth’s roundness. In this case, as in all other instances cited as evidence that the Earth is a globe, the premises do not fully support the conclusion—which is hasty—made before the entire subject has been thoroughly examined; especially when other causes are more than sufficient to explain the observed effects.


[63]

[63]

SECTION 2.
THE EARTH HAS NO AXIAL OR ORBITAL MOTION.

If a ball be allowed to drop from the mast-head of a ship at rest, it will strike the deck at the foot of the mast. If the same experiment be tried with a ship in motion, the same result will be observed. Because, in the latter case, the ball is acted upon simultaneously by two forces at right angles to each other—one, the momentum given to it by the moving ship in the direction of its own motion, and the other the force of gravity, the direction of which is square to that of the momentum. The ball being acted upon by the two forces together will not go in the direction of either, but will take a diagonal[64] course, as shown in the following diagram, Figure 22.

If a ball is allowed to drop from the masthead of a ship at rest, it will hit the deck at the base of the mast. If the same experiment is conducted with a ship in motion, the same result will occur. This is because, in the latter case, the ball is influenced simultaneously by two forces at right angles to each other—one is the momentum given to it by the moving ship in the direction of its motion, and the other is the force of gravity, which acts perpendicularly to the momentum. Since the ball is affected by both forces at once, it won't travel in the direction of either but will take a diagonal path, as illustrated in the following diagram, Figure 22.

Ball on ship

FIG. 22.

FIG. 22.

Ball on ship

FIG. 23.

FIG. 23.

The ball passing from A to C by the force of gravity, and having at the moment of its liberation received a momentum from the ship in the direction A B, will by the conjoint action of the two forces, take the direction A D, falling at D, just as it would have fallen at C had the vessel remained at rest. In this way, it is contended by those who hold that the Earth is a moving sphere, a ball allowed to fall from the mouth of a deep mine reaches the bottom in an apparently vertical direction, the same as it would if the Earth were motionless. So far, there need be no discussion—the explanation is granted. But now let the experiment be modified in the following way:—Let the ball be thrown upwards from the mast-head of a moving vessel; it will partake as before of two[65] motions, the upward and the horizontal, and will take a diagonal course upwards and with the vessel until the two forces expend themselves, when it will begin to fall by the force of gravity only, and drop into the water far behind the ship, which is still moving horizontally. Diagram Figure 23 will illustrate this effect. The ball being thrown upwards in the direction A C, and the vessel moving from A to B, will cause it to pass in the direction A D, arriving at D when the vessel reaches B; the two forces[66] having expended themselves when the ball arrives at D, it will begin to descend by the force of gravity in the direction D B H, but during its fall the vessel will have reached the position S, so that the ball will drop far behind it at the point H. To bring the ball from D to S two forces would be required, as D H and D W; but as D W does not exist, the force of gravity operates alone, and the ball necessarily falls behind the vessel at a distance proportionate to the altitude attained at D, and the time occupied in falling from D to H.

The ball falls from A to C due to gravity. When it’s released, it also carries momentum from the ship in the direction A B. The combined action of both forces will cause it to travel in the direction A D, landing at D, just as it would have landed at C if the ship had remained stationary. Those who believe the Earth is a moving sphere argue that a ball dropped from a deep mine reaches the bottom in an apparently vertical path, just like it would if the Earth wasn't moving. So far, this explanation is accepted. Now, let’s modify the experiment: If the ball is thrown upwards from the mast of a moving ship, it will again have two motions—upward and horizontal—and will follow a diagonal path upwards with the ship until those forces are spent. Then, it will fall solely due to gravity, landing in the water well behind the ship, which continues to move horizontally. Diagram Figure 23 shows this effect. When the ball is thrown upward in the direction A C and the ship moves from A to B, it will travel in the direction A D, reaching D when the ship reaches B. When the ball arrives at D, the two forces have been used up, and it begins to fall due to gravity in the direction D B H. However, during its descent, the ship will have reached position S, causing the ball to drop far behind it at point H. To move the ball from D to S, two forces (D H and D W) would be needed. But since D W doesn’t exist, only the force of gravity acts on the ball, so it inevitably falls behind the ship at a distance that depends on how high it reached at D and the time it takes to fall from D to H.

The same result will be observed on throwing a ball directly upwards from a railway carriage when in rapid motion, as shown in the following Figure 24. While the carriage or tender passes from A to B, the ball thrown from A to C will reach the position D, but while the ball then[67] comes down by the force of gravity, operating alone, to the point H, the carriage will have advanced to W, so that the ball will always drop more or less behind the carriage, according to the force first given to it in the direction A C and the time occupied in ascending to D, and thence descending to H. It is therefore demanded that if the Earth had a motion upon axes from west to east, and a ball, instead of being dropped down a mine or allowed to fall from the mast head of a ship, be shot upwards into the air; from the moment of its beginning to descend the surface of the Earth would turn from under its direction, and it would fall behind or to the west of its line of descent. On making the experiment no such effect is observed, and therefore the conclusion is unavoidable, that the Earth DOES NOT MOVE UPON AXES!

The same result will be seen when throwing a ball straight up from a fast-moving train, as shown in the following Figure 24. While the train moves from A to B, the ball thrown from A to C will land at position D. However, as the ball then falls back down due to gravity, acting alone, to point H, the train will have moved on to W, meaning the ball will always land a bit behind the train, depending on how hard it was thrown towards A C and how long it takes to go up to D and then come down to H. Therefore, it's important to note that if the Earth spun on an axis from west to east, and a ball were instead shot up into the air rather than dropped down a mine or from the top of a ship; from the moment it starts to fall, the Earth's surface would move out from beneath it, causing it to land behind or to the west of its path. When this experiment is conducted, no such effect is observed, so it’s clear that the Earth DOES NOT MOVE ALONG AN AXIS!

Ball on train

FIG. 24.

FIG. 24.

Gun shot

FIG. 25.

FIG. 25.

The following experiment has been tried, with the object of obtaining definite results. If the Earth is a globe, having a circumference of 25,000 miles at the equator, the circumference at the latitude of London (51°) will be about 16,000 statute miles; so that the motion of the Earth’s surface, if 25,000 miles in 24 hours at the equator, in England would be more than 700 feet per second. An air-gun was firmly fixed to a strong post, as shown at A in Figure 25, and carefully adjusted by a plumb-line, so that it was[68] perfectly vertical. On discharging the gun, the ball ascended in the direction A C, and invariably (during several trials) descended within a few inches of the gun at A; twice it fell back upon the very mouth of the barrel. The average time that the ball was in the atmosphere was 16 seconds; and, as half the time would be required for the ascent and half for the descent, it is evident that if the Earth had a motion once round its axis in 24 hours, the ball would have passed in 8 seconds to the point D, while the air-gun would have reached the position B H. The ball then commencing its descent, requiring also 8 seconds, would in that time have fallen to the point H, while the Earth and the gun would[69] have advanced as far as W. The time occupied being 8 seconds, and the Earth’s velocity being 700 feet per second, the progress of the Earth and the air-gun to W, in advance of the ball at H, would be 5,600 feet! In other words, in these experiments, the ball, which always fell back to the place of its detachment, should have fallen 5,600 feet, or considerably more than one statute mile to the west of the air-gun! Proving beyond all doubt that the supposed axial motion of the Earth DOES NOT EXIST!

The following experiment was conducted to obtain clear results. If the Earth is a globe with a circumference of 25,000 miles at the equator, then the circumference at London’s latitude (51°) would be about 16,000 statute miles. This means that the motion of the Earth’s surface, which is 25,000 miles in 24 hours at the equator, would translate to more than 700 feet per second in England. An air gun was securely mounted on a sturdy post, as shown at A in Figure 25, and carefully aligned with a plumb line to ensure it was perfectly vertical. When the gun was fired, the ball rose in the direction A C and consistently (over several trials) landed within a few inches of the gun at A; twice it even fell back onto the very mouth of the barrel. The average time the ball spent in the air was 16 seconds; since half that time would be for the ascent and half for the descent, it’s clear that if the Earth rotates once on its axis every 24 hours, the ball would have reached point D in 8 seconds, while the air gun would have moved to position B H. The ball would then start to descend, taking another 8 seconds to reach point H, while the Earth and the gun would have moved as far as W. The total time taken is 8 seconds, and with the Earth's speed of 700 feet per second, the movement of the Earth and air gun to W would be 5,600 feet ahead of the ball at H! In other words, in these experiments, the ball, which always fell back to where it was released, should have fallen 5,600 feet, or significantly more than one statute mile to the west of the air gun! This proves without a doubt that the supposed axial motion of the Earth DOES NOT EXIST!

The same experiment ought to suffice as evidence against the assumed motion of the Earth in an orbit; for it is difficult, if not impossible, to understand how the behaviour of the ball thrown from a vertical air-gun should be other in relation to the Earth’s forward motion in space than it is in regard to its motion upon axes. Besides, if it is proved not to move upon axes, the assumption that it moves in an orbit round the Sun is useless for theoretical purposes, and there is no necessity for either denying or in any way giving it farther consideration. But that no point may be taken without direct evidence, let the following experiment be tried:—Take two carefully-bored iron tubes, about two yards in length, and place them, one yard asunder, on the opposite sides of a wooden frame, or a solid block of wood or[70] masonry; so adjust them that their axes of vision shall be perfectly parallel to each other, and direct them to the plane of some notable fixed star, a few seconds previous to its meridian time. Let an observer be stationed at each tube; and the moment the star appears in the first tube, let a knock or other signal be given, to be repeated by the observer at the second tube when he first sees the star. A distinct period of time will elapse between the signals given, showing that the same star is not visible at the same moment by two lines of sight parallel to each other and only one yard asunder. A slight inclination of the second tube towards the first would be required for the star to be seen at the same moment. If now the tubes be left in their position for six months, the same star will be visible at the same meridian time, without the slightest alteration being required in the direction of the tubes. From which result it is concluded that if the Earth had moved a single yard in an orbit through space there would at least be the difference of time indicated by the signals, and the slight inclination of the tube which the difference in position of one yard required. But as no such difference in the direction of the tube is required, the conclusion is unavoidable that in six months a given meridian upon the Earth has not moved a single[71] yard, and that therefore the Earth has not the slightest degree of orbital motion—or motion at right angles to the meridian of a given star! It will be useless to say in explanation that the stars are so infinitely distant that a difference in the angle of inclination of the tube in six months could not be expected, as it will be proved in a subsequent section that all the stars are within a few thousand miles from the Earth’s surface!

The same experiment should be enough to disprove the idea of the Earth moving in an orbit; it’s hard, if not impossible, to see why the path of a ball thrown from a vertical air gun would be different in relation to the Earth moving through space compared to how it moves along fixed axes. Moreover, if it’s shown that the ball does not move along axes, then the idea that it orbits the Sun becomes irrelevant for theoretical discussions, and there’s no need to reject or further consider it. However, to ensure no assumption is made without concrete evidence, let’s try the following experiment: Take two meticulously bored iron tubes, around two yards long, and set them one yard apart on opposite sides of a wooden frame or a solid block of wood or masonry; align them so their lines of sight are perfectly parallel and aim them at a prominent fixed star for a few seconds before it reaches its highest point in the sky. Have an observer at each tube; when the first observer sees the star through the first tube, they will give a signal, which the second observer will repeat as soon as they see the star in the second tube. A clear time difference will occur between the signals, showing that the same star is not visible at the same time from two parallel lines of sight that are only one yard apart. The second tube would need to tilt slightly towards the first one for both observers to see the star simultaneously. If the tubes are left in position for six months, the same star will appear at the same highest point without needing to adjust the direction of the tubes at all. This leads to the conclusion that if the Earth had moved one yard in an orbit through space, there would at least be a time difference indicated by the signals and the slight angle adjustment required for the one-yard difference in position. But since there’s no such adjustment needed, it’s clear that in six months, a specific location on Earth hasn't moved a single yard, meaning the Earth has no orbital motion—or motion perpendicular to the meridian of a given star! It won’t help to claim that the stars are so far away that we couldn’t expect a change in the angle of the tube in six months, as will be shown in a later section that all the stars are within a few thousand miles from the Earth’s surface!


[72]

[72]

SECTION 3.
THE ACTUAL DISTANCE OF THE SUN AND STARS.

As it is now demonstrated that the Earth is a plane, the distance of the Sun and Stars may readily be measured by plane trigonometry. The base line in any operation being horizontal and always a carefully measured one, the process becomes exceedingly simple. Let the altitude of the Sun be taken on a given day at 12 o’clock at the high-water mark on the sea shore at Brighton, in Sussex; and at the same hour at the high-water mark of the River Thames, near London Bridge; the difference in the Sun’s altitude taken simultaneously from two stations upon the same meridian, and the distance between the stations, or the length of the base line ascertained, are all the elements required for calculating the exact distance of the Sun[73] from London or Brighton; but as this distance is the hypothenuse of a triangle, whose base is the Earth’s surface, and vertical side the zenith distance of the Sun, it follows that the distance of the Sun from that part of Earth to which it is vertical is less than the distance from London. In the Diagram, Figure 26, let L B represent the base line from London to Brighton, a distance of 51 statute miles. The altitude at L and at B taken at the same moment of time will give the distance L S or B S. The angle of altitude at L or B, with the length of L S or B S, will then give the vertical distance of the Sun S from E, or the place which is immediately underneath it. This distance will be thus found to be considerably less than 4,000 miles.

As it is now shown that the Earth is a flat surface, the distance to the Sun and stars can easily be calculated using plane trigonometry. The base line for any measurement is horizontal and is always carefully measured, making the process quite straightforward. For example, let's take the altitude of the Sun at noon on a specific day at the high-water mark on the beach in Brighton, Sussex, and at the same time at the high-water mark of the River Thames near London Bridge. The difference in the Sun’s altitude taken simultaneously from these two locations on the same meridian, along with the distance between the two locations (or the length of the base line), are all the elements needed to calculate the exact distance from the Sun[73] to either London or Brighton. Since this distance is the hypotenuse of a triangle where the base is the Earth's surface and the vertical side is the zenith distance of the Sun, it follows that the distance of the Sun from the point on Earth directly below it is less than the distance from London. In the Diagram, Figure 26, let L B represent the base line from London to Brighton, a distance of 51 statute miles. The altitude at L and at B taken at the same moment will give the distances L S or B S. The angle of altitude at L or B, along with the lengths L S or B S, will give the vertical distance of the Sun S from E, or the point directly beneath it. This distance will be found to be considerably less than 4,000 miles.

Height of sun

FIG. 26.

FIG. 26.

The following are the particulars of an observation made, a few years ago, by the officers engaged in the Ordnance survey. Altitude of the Sun at London 55° 13′; altitude taken at[74] the same time, on the grounds of a public school, at Ackworth, in Yorkshire, 53° 2′; the distance between the two places in a direct line, as measured by triangulation, is 151 statute miles. From these elements the true distance of the Sun may be readily computed; and proved to be under 4,000 miles!

The following are the details of an observation made a few years ago by the officers involved in the Ordnance survey. The altitude of the Sun in London was 55° 13′; the altitude taken at the same time on the grounds of a public school in Ackworth, Yorkshire, was 53° 2′; the distance between the two locations in a straight line, measured by triangulation, is 151 statute miles. From these factors, the actual distance to the Sun can be easily calculated and is shown to be under 4,000 miles!

Since the above was written, an officer of the Royal Engineers, in the head-quarters of the Ordnance Survey, at Southampton, has furnished the following elements of observations recently made:—

Since the above was written, an officer of the Royal Engineers at the headquarters of the Ordnance Survey in Southampton has provided the following details of observations recently made:—

  Southern Station, Sun’s altitude, 45°  
Northern ditto, 38°
Distance between the two stations, 800 statute miles.

The calculation made from these elements gives the same result, viz., that the actual distance of the Sun from the Earth is less than 4,000 miles.

The calculation done with these elements shows the same result, which is that the actual distance from the Sun to the Earth is less than 4,000 miles.

The same method of measuring distances applies equally to the Stars; and it is easy to demonstrate, beyond the possibility of doubt, so long as assumed premises are excluded, that all the visible objects in the firmament are contained within the distance of 6,000 miles!

The same method of measuring distances applies to the stars as well; and it's easy to show, without any doubt, as long as we set aside any assumptions, that all the visible objects in the sky are within 6,000 miles!

From these demonstrable distances it follows unavoidably that the magnitude of the Sun, Moon, Stars, &c., is very small—much smaller than the Earth from which they are measured; and to which therefore they cannot possibly be other than secondary, and subservient.

From these measurable distances, it inevitably follows that the size of the Sun, Moon, Stars, etc., is quite small—much smaller than the Earth from which they are measured; and therefore, they cannot possibly be anything other than secondary and subordinate.


[75]

[75]

SECTION 4.
THE SUN CIRCLES AROUND THE EARTH, CENTERED ON THE NORTH POLE.

As the Earth has been shown to be fixed, the motion of the Sun is a visible reality; and if it be observed from any northern latitude, and for any period before and after the time of southing, or passing the meridian, it will be seen to describe an arc of a circle; an object moving in an arc cannot return to the centre of such arc without having completed a circle. This the Sun does visibly and daily. To place the matter beyond doubt, the observation of the Arctic navigators may be referred to. Captain Parry, and several of his officers, on ascending high land in the vicinity of the north pole, repeatedly saw, for 24 hours together, the sun describing a circle upon the southern horizon.

As we've established that the Earth is stationary, the movement of the Sun is clearly observable. If you watch it from any northern latitude, at any time before and after it reaches its highest point, you’ll see it trace out an arc. An object moving along an arc can't return to the center of that arc without completing a full circle. The Sun does this visibly every day. To eliminate any doubt, we can refer to the observations of Arctic explorers. Captain Parry and several of his crew, when they climbed high ground near the North Pole, saw the Sun making a complete circle along the southern horizon for 24 hours straight.


[76]

[76]

SECTION 5.
THE DIAMETER OF THE SUN’S PATH IS ALWAYS CHANGING—GETTING SMALLER FROM DECEMBER 21ST TO JUNE 15TH, AND GETTING LARGER FROM JUNE TO DECEMBER.

This is a matter of absolute certainty, proved by what is called, in technical language, the northern and southern declination, which is simply saying that the Sun’s path is nearest the north pole in summer, and farthest away from it in winter. This difference in position gives rise to the difference of altitude, as observed at various periods of the year, and which is shewn in the following table, given in “The Illustrated London Almanack,” for 1848, by Mr. Glaisher, of the Royal Observatory, Greenwich.

This is a matter of absolute certainty, proven by what is technically called the northern and southern declination, which means that the Sun’s path is closest to the north pole in summer and farthest from it in winter. This difference in position creates the variation in altitude observed at different times of the year, as shown in the following table from “The Illustrated London Almanack” for 1848, by Mr. Glaisher of the Royal Observatory, Greenwich.

[77]

[77]

“Sun’s altitude at the time of Southing, or being on the meridian:—

“Sun’s altitude when it reaches its highest point in the sky, or when it’s on the meridian:—

  Sun’s
altitude.
Time of Southing.
  M. S. (Common clock, or London time.)
June 15   62°  0  4 before noon.
30 61²⁄₃°  3 18 afternoon.
July 15 59²⁄₃°  5 38
31 56¹⁄₂°  6  4
Aug. 15 52¹⁄₂°  0 11
31 47°  0  5
Sep. 15 38²⁄₃°  4 58 before noon.
30 35¹⁄₂° 10  6
Oct. 31 24° 16 14
Nov. 30 17° 10 58
Dec. 21 12°  0 27
31 15°  3 29 afternoon.
Jan.  1 15¹⁄₂°  3 36
15 17°  9 33
31 21° 13 41
Feb. 15 25° 14 28
29 30¹⁄₂° 12 43
March 15 } On the Equator
at 6 a.m.
} 36°  9  2
38¹⁄₂°  0  0
21   42¹⁄₂°  4 10 before noon.
April 15 48°  0  8
30 53°  2 58
May 15 57°  3 54
31 60°  2 37

In the following diagram (Fig. 27) A A A represent the Sun’s daily path on December 21st, and B B B the same on June 15th. N the North Pole, S the Sun, E Great Britain. The figures 1 2 3 the Arctic Circle, and 4 5 6 the[78] extent of sunlight. The arrows show the direction of the Sun’s motion.

In the following diagram (Fig. 27) A A A represent the Sun’s daily path on December 21st, and B B B the same on June 15th. N is the North Pole, S is the Sun, and E is Great Britain. The figures 1 2 3 indicate the Arctic Circle, and 4 5 6 show the[78] extent of sunlight. The arrows indicate the direction of the Sun’s motion.

Map of flat world

FIG. 27.

FIG. 27.


[79]

[79]

SECTION 6.
CAUSE OF DAY AND NIGHT, SEASONS, etc.

The Sun S describes the circle A A A on the 21st December once in 24 hours; hence in that period day and night occur to every part of the Earth, except within the Arctic circle. The light of the Sun gradually diminishing from S, to the Arctic circle 1 2 3, where it becomes twilight, does so according to the well-known law of radiation, equally in all directions—hence, the circle 4 5 6 represents the whole extent of the Sun’s light at any given time. The arc 4 E is the advancing or morning twilight, and 6 E the receding or evening twilight; to every place underneath a line drawn across the circle through S to N it is noonday. It will now be easily understood that as the Sun S moves in the direction of the arrows or from right to left, and completes the circle A A A in 24 hours, it will produce in that period morning, noon, evening, and night to all parts of the Earth in succession. On referring to the diagram, it will be seen that to England, E, the length of the day at this time of the year is the shortest, the amount of light being represented by the arc E E E; and also that the northern centre N remains in darkness[80] during the whole daily revolution of the Sun, the light of which terminates at the Arctic circle 1 2 3. Thus, morning, noon, evening, midnight, the shortest days, or the Winter season, and the constant or six months’ darkness at the pole are all a part of one general phenomenon. As the Sun’s path begins now to diminish every day until in six months, or on the 15th of June, it describes the circle B B B, it is evident that the same extent of sunlight will reach over or beyond the pole N, as shown in the following diagram (Fig. 28), when morning, noon, evening, and night will again occur as before; but the[81] amount of light passing over England, represented by the arc E E E, is now much larger than when the Sun was upon the circle A A A, and represents the longest days, or the Summer season, and the constant, or six months’ light at the pole. Thus, day and night, long and short days, Winter and Summer, the long periods of alternate light and darkness at the pole, arise simply from the Sun’s position in relation to the north pole.

The Sun S moves around the circle A A A every 24 hours on December 21st; so in that time, day and night occur in every part of the Earth, except for the Arctic Circle. The Sun's light gradually decreases from S to the Arctic Circle 1 2 3, where it becomes twilight, in line with the well-known law of radiation, evenly in all directions—therefore, the circle 4 5 6 represents the full extent of the Sun’s light at any given moment. The arc 4 E is the advancing or morning twilight, and 6 E is the receding or evening twilight; for every location along a line drawn through the circle from S to N, it is noontime. It's clear that as the Sun S moves in the direction of the arrows or from right to left and completes the circle A A A in 24 hours, it creates morning, noon, evening, and night in sequence across all parts of the Earth. Referring to the diagram, one can see that for England, E, the length of the day at this time of year is the shortest, represented by the arc E E E; additionally, the northern center N remains dark[80] during the entire daily rotation of the Sun, whose light ends at the Arctic Circle 1 2 3. Thus, morning, noon, evening, midnight, the shortest days, or Winter season, and the continuous or six months’ darkness at the pole are all part of one general phenomenon. As the Sun's path starts to shrink every day until in six months, or on June 15th, it describes the circle B B B, it is clear that the same extent of sunlight will reach over or beyond the pole N, as illustrated in the following diagram (Fig. 28), when morning, noon, evening, and night will occur again as before; but the[81] amount of light reaching England, represented by the arc E E E, is now much larger than when the Sun was at the circle A A A, indicating the longest days, or the Summer season, and the constant, or six months’ light at the pole. Thus, day and night, long and short days, Winter and Summer, and the lengthy periods of alternating light and darkness at the pole, all result simply from the Sun’s position in relation to the north pole.

Map of flat world

FIG. 28.

FIG. 28.

If the Earth is a globe, it is evident that Winter and Summer, and long and short days, will be of the same character and duration in corresponding latitudes, in the southern as in the northern hemisphere. But we find that in many respects there is a marked difference; for instance, in New Zealand, where the latitude is about the same as in England, a remarkable difference exists in the length of day and night. In the Cook’s Strait Almanack, for 1848, it is stated, “At Wellington, New Zealand, December 21, Sun rises 4h. 31m., and sets at 7h. 29m., the day being 14 hours 58 minutes. June 21st, Sun rises at 7h. 29m., and sets at 4h. 31m., the day being 9 hours and 2 minutes. In England the longest day is 16h. 34m., and the shortest day is 7h. 45m. Thus the longest day in New Zealand is 1 hour and 36 minutes shorter than the longest day in England; and the shortest day in New Zealand is 1 hour and[82] 17 minutes longer than the shortest day in England.”

If the Earth is a sphere, it's clear that winter and summer, as well as long and short days, will have the same characteristics and duration at corresponding latitudes, both in the Southern and Northern Hemispheres. However, we observe significant differences in many ways; for example, in New Zealand, where the latitude is similar to that of England, there is a notable difference in day and night length. The Cook’s Strait Almanack for 1848 states, “In Wellington, New Zealand, on December 21, the sun rises at 4:31 AM and sets at 7:29 PM, making the day 14 hours and 58 minutes long. On June 21, the sun rises at 7:29 AM and sets at 4:31 PM, giving a day length of 9 hours and 2 minutes. In England, the longest day is 16 hours and 34 minutes, and the shortest day is 7 hours and 45 minutes. Therefore, the longest day in New Zealand is 1 hour and 36 minutes shorter than the longest day in England; and the shortest day in New Zealand is 1 hour and 17 minutes longer than the shortest day in England.”

In a recently published pamphlet, by W. Swainson, Esq., Attorney General, the following passage occurs:—“Compared with an English summer, that of Auckland is but little warmer, though much longer; but the nights in New Zealand are always cool and refreshing.... The days are one hour shorter in the summer, and one hour longer in the winter than in England! of twilight there is little or none.”

In a recently published pamphlet by W. Swainson, Esq., Attorney General, the following passage appears: “Compared to a summer in England, Auckland’s summer is not much warmer, though it lasts a lot longer; however, the nights in New Zealand are always cool and refreshing.... The days are one hour shorter in summer and one hour longer in winter than in England! There is little or no twilight.”

From a work, also recently published, on New Zealand, by Arthur S. Thompson, M.D., the following sentences are quoted:—“The summer mornings, even in the warmest parts of the colony are sufficiently fresh to exhilarate without chilling; and the seasons glide imperceptibly into each other. The days are an hour shorter at each end of the day in summer, and an hour longer in winter than in England.”

From a recently published work on New Zealand by Arthur S. Thompson, M.D., the following sentences are quoted:—“The summer mornings, even in the warmest parts of the colony, are fresh enough to invigorate without being cold; and the seasons transition seamlessly into one another. The days are an hour shorter at each end of the day in summer, and an hour longer in winter than in England.”

A letter from a correspondent in New Zealand, dated Nelson, September 15, 1857, contains the subjoined passages:—“Even in summer people here have no notion of going without fires in the evening; but then, though the days are very warm and sunny, the nights are always cold. For seven months last summer we had not one day that the Sun did not shine as brilliantly as it does in England in the finest day in June; and[83] though it has more power here, the heat is not nearly so oppressive.... But then there is not the twilight which you get in England. Here it is light till about eight o’clock; then, in a few minutes, it becomes too dark to see anything, and the change comes over in almost no time.” “Twilight lasts but a short time in so low a latitude as 28 degrees, and no sooner does the Sun peep above the horizon, than all the gorgeous parade by which he is preceded is shaken off, and he comes in upon us in the most abrupt and unceremonious way imaginable.”[9] These various peculiarities could not exist in the southern region if the Earth were spherical and moved upon axes, and in an orbit round the Sun. If the Sun is fixed, and the Earth revolves underneath it, the same phenomena should exist at the same distance on each side of the Equator. But such is not the case! What can operate to cause the twilight in New Zealand to be so much more sudden than it is in England? The southern “hemisphere” cannot revolve more rapidly than the northern! The distance round a globe would be the same at 50° south as at 50° north, and as the whole globe would revolve once in 24 hours, the surface at the two places would move underneath the Sun with the same velocity, and the light would approach in the[84] morning and recede in the evening in exactly the same manner; yet the very contrary is the fact! The twilight in England in summer is slow and gradual, but in New Zealand it is rapid and abrupt; a difference which is altogether incompatible with the doctrine of the Earth’s rotundity. But, the Earth a plane, and it is a simple “matter of course.” Let E, in Figure 28, represent England, and W New Zealand; the radius N E and the consequent circle round N is much less than the radius N W and its consequent circle round the same point. But as the larger circle, radius N W is passed over by the sunlight in the same time (24 hours) as the smaller circle, radius N E, the velocity is proportionately greater. The velocity is the space passed over multiplied by the time in passing, and as the space over New Zealand is much greater than the space over England, the velocity of the Sun-light must be much greater, and its morning and evening twilight necessarily more “abrupt and unceremonious;” and therefore, it might be said with strictly logical accuracy, the Earth is a Plane, and cannot possibly be a Globe!

A letter from a correspondent in New Zealand, dated Nelson, September 15, 1857, includes the following remarks: “Even in summer, people here can't imagine going without fires in the evening; however, while the days are very warm and sunny, the nights are always cold. Last summer, for seven months, we didn’t have a single day without bright sunshine, just like the best days in June in England; and although it’s stronger here, the heat isn’t nearly as stifling.... But the twilight isn't the same as what you experience in England. Here, it stays light until about eight o'clock, and then, in just a few minutes, it becomes too dark to see anything—the change happens almost instantly.” “Twilight lasts for only a short time at such a low latitude as 28 degrees, and no sooner does the Sun peek over the horizon than all the beautiful display that comes before it disappears, and it arrives in the most sudden and informal way imaginable.”[9] These different characteristics couldn’t exist in the southern region if the Earth were spherical and rotated on axes while orbiting the Sun. If the Sun is stationary and the Earth rotates beneath it, the same phenomena should occur at the same distances on either side of the Equator. But that’s not the case! What could cause the twilight in New Zealand to be so much more abrupt than in England? The southern hemisphere can’t spin any faster than the northern! The distance around a globe would be the same at 50° south as at 50° north, and since the entire globe rotates once every 24 hours, the surface in both locations would move under the Sun at the same speed, and the light would arrive in the morning and fade in the evening in exactly the same way; yet the exact opposite is true! The twilight in England during summer is slow and gradual, while in New Zealand it’s quick and abrupt—a difference that absolutely contradicts the idea of the Earth’s roundness. But if the Earth is flat, it’s just a straightforward “matter of course.” Let E, in Figure 28, represent England, and W New Zealand; the radius N E and the resulting circle around N is much smaller than the radius N W and its resulting circle around the same point. Since the larger circle, radius N W, is covered by sunlight in the same time (24 hours) as the smaller circle, radius N E, the speed is proportionately higher. Speed is the distance traveled divided by the time taken, and since the distance over New Zealand is much greater than that over England, the speed of sunlight must be much faster, making its morning and evening twilight necessarily more “abrupt and unceremonious;” and therefore, it could be argued with strict logical accuracy that the Earth is flat and cannot possibly be a globe!

[9] Captain Basil Hall, R.N., F.R.S.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Captain Basil Hall, R.N., F.R.S.


[85]

[85]

SECTION 7.
REASON FOR “SUNRISE” AND “SUNSET.”

Sunrise

FIG. 29.

FIG. 29.

Although the Sun is at all times above and parallel to the Earth’s surface, he appears to ascend the firmament from morning until noon, and to descend and sink below the horizon at evening. This arises from a simple and everywhere visible law of perspective. A flock of birds, when passing over a flat or marshy country, always appears to descend as it recedes; and if the flock is extensive, the first bird appears lower, or nearer to the horizon than the last. When a balloon sails from an observer without increasing or decreasing its altitude, it appears gradually to approach the horizon. The farthest light in a row of lamps appears the lowest, although each one has the same altitude. Bearing these phenomena in mind, it will easily be seen how the Sun, although always parallel to the surface of the Earth, must appear to ascend when approaching, and descend after leaving the meridian or noon-day position. Let the line[86] A B, Fig. 29, represent a portion of the Earth’s surface; C D of the Sun’s path, and H H, the line of sight. The surface of the Earth, A B, will appear to ascend from B to H, forming the horizon. When the Sun is traversing the line C D, in the direction of the arrows, he will appear to emerge from the horizon H, and to gradually ascend the line H D. When in the position 1, he will appear to be at the point 2; and when at 3, the apparent position will be at 4; but when he arrives upon the meridian D, his apparent and actual, or noon-day position, will be the same. But now, from the point D, the Sun will appear to descend, as in Fig. 30, and when he has passed from D to 1, he will appear at 2, and when really at 3 will appear at 4; and thus[87] continuing his course in the direction D C, he will reach the horizon at H, and disappear or “set” to the observer at H A. Thus “Sunrise” and “Sunset” are phenomena dependent entirely upon the fact that horizontal lines parallel to each other appear to approach or converge in the distance, the surface of the Earth being horizontal, and the line-of-sight of the observer and the Sun’s path being parallel with it, necessarily produce the observed phenomena.

Although the Sun is always above and parallel to the Earth’s surface, it looks like it rises in the sky from morning to noon and then sets below the horizon in the evening. This is due to a simple and universally noticeable law of perspective. A flock of birds flying over a flat or marshy area always seems to drop as it moves away; and if the flock is large, the first bird looks lower, or closer to the horizon, than the last one. When a balloon drifts away from a viewer without changing its altitude, it seems to approach the horizon gradually. The farthest light in a row of lamps appears to be the lowest, even though they all have the same height. Keeping these observations in mind, it's clear how the Sun, while always parallel to the Earth’s surface, seems to rise as it gets closer and descend after passing its highest point at noon. Let the line [86] A B, Fig. 29, represent a segment of the Earth’s surface; C D represents the Sun’s path, and H H is the line of sight. The Earth’s surface, A B, will seem to rise from B to H, creating the horizon. When the Sun moves along the line C D, following the arrows, it will look like it’s coming up from the horizon H and gradually rising along the line H D. When it's in position 1, it will appear to be at point 2; and at position 3, it'll seem to be at 4; but when it reaches the meridian D, its apparent position and actual position, or noon position, will be the same. Now, from point D, the Sun will look like it's going down, as in Fig. 30, and when it moves from D to 1, it'll appear at 2, and when it’s actually at 3, it’ll look like it’s at 4; and as it continues its path towards D C, it will reach the horizon at H and disappear or “set” for the viewer at H A. Thus, “Sunrise” and “Sunset” are phenomena that purely depend on the fact that horizontal lines that are parallel to each other seem to come closer together as they go off into the distance, with the Earth’s surface being flat, and the observer’s line of sight and the Sun’s path being parallel to it, which creates the observed effects.

Sunset

FIG. 30.

FIG. 30.


[88]

[88]

SECTION 8.
REASON THE SUN LOOKS BIGGER WHEN IT RISES AND SETS THAN WHEN IT'S AT ITS HIGHEST POINT.

It is well known that when a light of any kind shines through a dense medium it will appear larger than when seen through a lighter medium. This will be more remarkable when the medium holds aqueous particles in solution,—as in a damp or foggy atmosphere the light of a gas-lamp will seem greater at a given distance than it will under ordinary circumstances. In the diagram, Figure 30, it is evident that H D is less than H 1, H 3, or H 5. The latter (H 5) represents the greater amount of atmosphere which the Sun has to shine through when approaching the horizon; and as the air near the Earth is both more dense and more damp, or holds more watery particles in solution, the light of the Sun must be dilated or enlarged as well as modified in colour. But the enlarged[89] appearance of the Sun when rising and setting is only an optical impression, as proved by actual measurement. “If the angle of the Sun or Moon be taken either with a tube or micrometer when they appear so large to the eye in the horizon, the measure is identical when they are in the meridian and appear to the eye and mind but half the size. The apparent distance of the horizon is three or four times greater than the zenith. Hence the mental mistake of horizontal size, for the angular dimensions are equal; the first 5° is apparently to the eye equal to 10° or 15° at 50° or 60° of elevation; and the first 15° fill a space to the eye equal to a third of the quadrant. This is evidently owing to the ‘habit of sight,’ for with an accurate instrument the measure of 5° near the horizon is equal to 5° in the zenith.”[10]

It’s well known that when any type of light shines through a dense medium, it appears larger than when viewed through a lighter medium. This effect is especially noticeable when the medium contains water particles in solution—like in a damp or foggy atmosphere, where the light from a gas lamp seems bigger at a certain distance than it does under normal conditions. In the diagram, Figure 30, it’s clear that H D is less than H 1, H 3, or H 5. The latter (H 5) shows the greater amount of atmosphere that the Sun has to shine through as it approaches the horizon. Since the air near the Earth is denser and more humid, or contains more water particles, the sunlight must be stretched or enlarged, as well as altered in color. However, the larger appearance of the Sun at sunrise and sunset is just an optical illusion, as demonstrated by actual measurements. “If you measure the angle of the Sun or Moon with a tube or micrometer when they appear so large on the horizon, the measurement will be the same when they are at their highest point and look half the size. The apparent distance to the horizon is three or four times greater than to the zenith. This leads to a visual misjudgment of horizontal size, because the angular measurements are equal; the first 5° appears to the eye equal to 10° or 15° at 50° or 60° elevation; and the first 15° fills a space that looks like a third of the quadrant. This is clearly due to the ‘habit of sight,’ because with an accurate instrument, the measurement of 5° near the horizon is the same as 5° at the zenith.”[10]

[10] “Million of Facts,” by Sir Richard Philips, p. 537.

[10] “Million of Facts,” by Sir Richard Philips, p. 537.


[90]

[90]

SECTION 9.
CAUSE OF SOLAR AND LUNAR ECLIPSES.

An Eclipse of the Sun is caused simply by the Moon passing before it, or between it and the observer on the Earth. Of this no question has been raised. But that an Eclipse of the Moon arises from a shadow of the Earth is in every respect unsatisfactory. The Earth has been proved to have no motion, either upon axes or in an orbit round the Sun, and therefore it could never come between the Sun and the Moon. The Earth is proved to be a Plane, always underneath the Sun and Moon, and therefore to speak of its intercepting the light of the Sun and thus casting its own shadow upon the Moon, is to say that which is impossible. Besides this, cases are on record of the Sun and Eclipsed Moon being above the horizon together. “The full Moon has sometimes been seen above the horizon before the Sun was set. A remarkable instance of this kind was observed at Paris on the 19th of[91] July, 1750, when the Moon appeared visibly Eclipsed while the Sun was distinctly to be seen above the horizon.”[11] “On the 20th of April, 1837, the Moon appeared to rise Eclipsed before the Sun had set. The same phenomenon was observed on the 20th of September, 1717.”[12] “In the lunar Eclipses of July 17, 1590; Nov. 3, 1648; June 16, 1666; and May 26, 1668, the Moon rose Eclipsed whilst the Sun was still apparently above the horizon. Those horizontal Eclipses were noticed as early as the time of Pliny.”[13] The Moon’s entire surface, or that portion presented to the Earth has also been distinctly seen during the whole time of a total Eclipse, a phenomenon utterly incompatible with the doctrine that the Earth’s shadow is the cause of it. “The Moon has sometimes shown during a total Eclispe with an almost unaccountable distinctness. On Dec. 22, 1703, the Moon, when totally immersed in the Earth’s shadow, was visible at Avignon by a ruddy light of such brilliancy that one might have imagined her body to be transparent, and to be enlightened from behind; and on March 19th, 1848, it is[92] stated that so bright was the Moon’s surface during its total immersion, that many persons could not be persuaded that it was eclipsed. Mr. Forster, of Bruges, states, in an account of that eclipse, that the light and dark places on the moon’s surface could be almost as well made out as in an ordinary dull moonlight night.

An eclipse of the sun happens simply when the moon moves in front of it, or between the sun and an observer on Earth. There’s no debate about that. However, the idea that a lunar eclipse occurs because of the Earth’s shadow is entirely unsatisfactory. It has been shown that the Earth does not move, either on its axis or in orbit around the sun, and therefore it could never place itself between the sun and the moon. The Earth is proven to be flat, always beneath the sun and moon, so to say it blocks the sun's light and casts a shadow on the moon is saying something impossible. Additionally, there are recorded instances of the sun and an eclipsed moon being visible in the sky at the same time. “The full moon has sometimes been seen above the horizon before the sun sets. A notable example was observed in Paris on July 19, 1750, when the moon was visibly eclipsed while the sun was clearly seen above the horizon.”[11] “On April 20, 1837, the moon appeared to rise eclipsed before the sun had set. The same phenomenon was noted on September 20, 1717.”[12] “During the lunar eclipses of July 17, 1590; November 3, 1648; June 16, 1666; and May 26, 1668, the moon rose eclipsed while the sun was still apparently above the horizon. Those horizontal eclipses were recorded as early as the time of Pliny.”[13] The entire surface of the moon, or at least the part facing the Earth, has also been clearly visible during a total eclipse, a phenomenon that completely contradicts the idea that the Earth’s shadow causes it. “The moon has occasionally appeared during a total eclipse with an almost inexplicable clarity. On December 22, 1703, when the moon was completely immersed in the Earth’s shadow, it was visible in Avignon with a reddish light so brilliant that one might think its body was transparent and lit from behind; and on March 19, 1848, it is noted that the moon’s surface was so bright during its total immersion that many people couldn’t be convinced it was eclipsed. Mr. Forster, of Bruges, noted in his account of that eclipse that the light and dark areas on the moon’s surface could be nearly as clearly seen as on an ordinary dimly lit night.”

[11] “Astronomy and Astronomical Instruments,” p. 105, by Geo. G. Carey.

[11] “Astronomy and Astronomical Instruments,” p. 105, by Geo. G. Carey.

[12] “McCulloch’s Geography,” p. 85.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ “McCulloch's Geography,” p. 85.

[13] “Illustrated London Almanack for 1864,” the astronomical part in which is by James Glaisher, Esq., of the Greenwich Observatory.

[13] “Illustrated London Almanack for 1864,” with the astronomical section authored by James Glaisher, Esq., from the Greenwich Observatory.

“Sometimes, in a total lunar eclipse, the moon will appear quite obscure in some parts of its surface, and in other parts will exhibit a high degree of illumination. * * * To a certain extent I witnessed some of these phenomena during the merely partial eclipse of February 7th, 1860. * * * I prepared, during the afternoon of February 6th for witnessing the eclipse, without any distinct expectation of seeing much worthy of note. I knew, however, that upwards of eight-tenths of the disc would be covered, and I was anxious to observe with what degree of distinctness the eclipsed portion could be viewed, partly as an interesting fact, and partly with a view of verifying or discovering the weak points of an engraving (in which I am concerned) of a lunar eclipse.

“Sometimes, during a total lunar eclipse, the moon looks quite dark in some areas of its surface, while other areas will be very bright. * * * I saw some of these effects during the partial eclipse on February 7th, 1860. * * * I got ready on the afternoon of February 6th to watch the eclipse, not expecting to see anything particularly remarkable. However, I knew that over eight-tenths of the moon would be covered, and I was curious to see how clearly I could view the obscured part, both as an interesting observation and to check or identify the weaknesses in a lunar eclipse engraving I was working on.

“After seeing the increasing darkness of the penumbra softly merging into the true shadow at the commencement of the eclipse (about 1 o’clock a.m., Greenwich time) I proceeded with pencil and paper, dimly lighted by a distant lamp,[93] to note by name the different lunar mountains and plains (the so-called seas) over which the shadow passed. * * * During the first hour and ten minutes I had seen nothing unexpected. * * * I had repeatedly written down my observations of the remarkable clearness with which the moon’s eclipsed outline could be seen, both with the naked eye, and with the telescope; at 1 hour 58 minutes, however, I suddenly noted the ruddy colour of a portion of the moon. I may as well give my notes in the original words, as copied next day in a more connected form:—1h. 58m., Greenwich time. I am suddenly struck by the fact that the whole of the western seas of the moon are showing through the shadow with singular sharpness, and that the whole region where they lie has assumed a decidedly reddish tinge, attaining its greatest brightness at a sort of temporary polar region, having ‘Endymion’ about the position of its imaginary pole. I particularly notice that the ‘Lake of Sleep’ has disappeared in this brightness, instead of standing out in a darker shade: and I notice that this so-called polar region is not parallel with the rim of the shadow, but rather west of it.—2h. 15m. Some clouds, though very thin and transparent, now intervene.—2h. 20m. The sky is now cleared, How extraordinary is the appearance of the Moon[94] Reddish is not the word to express it; it is red—red hot! I endeavour to think of various red objects with which to compare it, and nothing seems so like as a red-hot penny—a red-hot penny with a little white-hot piece at its lower edge, standing out against a dark-blue back ground; only it is evidently not a mere disc, but beautifully rounded by shading.

“After observing the growing darkness of the penumbra gradually blending into the true shadow at the start of the eclipse (around 1 a.m., Greenwich time), I used a pencil and paper, dimly illuminated by a distant lamp,[93] to note the different lunar mountains and plains (the so-called seas) over which the shadow was moving. * * * In the first hour and ten minutes, I didn’t see anything unexpected. * * * I had repeatedly recorded my observations about how clearly the moon's eclipsed outline could be seen, both with the naked eye and through the telescope; however, at 1 hour and 58 minutes, I suddenly noted the reddish color of a portion of the moon. I might as well share my notes in the original words, as I copied them the next day in a more organized form:—1h. 58m., Greenwich time. I am suddenly struck by the fact that the entire western seas of the moon are showing through the shadow with striking clarity, and that this whole area has taken on a noticeable reddish hue, reaching its brightest point in a sort of temporary polar region, with ‘Endymion’ positioned near its imaginary pole. I particularly note that the ‘Lake of Sleep’ has vanished in this brightness, rather than standing out in a darker shade: and I notice that this so-called polar region does not align with the edge of the shadow, but is more to the west of it.—2h. 15m. Some clouds, although very thin and transparent, now get in the way.—2h. 20m. The sky is now clear. How extraordinary the Moon looks! Reddish isn’t quite the right word; it is red—red hot! I try to think of various red objects to compare it with, and nothing seems to match as closely as a red-hot penny—a red-hot penny with a little white-hot spot at its lower edge, standing out against a dark-blue background; only it seems to be not just a disc but beautifully rounded by shading.”

“Such is its appearance with the naked eye: with the telescope its surface varies more in tint than with the naked eye, and is not of quite so bright a red as when thus viewed. The redness continues to be most perceptible at a distance from the shadow’s southern edge, and to be greatest about the region of ‘Endymion.’ The Hercynian mountains (north of Grimaldus) are, however, of rather a bright red, and Grimaldus shows well. Mare Crisium and the western seas are wonderfully distinct. Not a trace to be seen of Aristarchus or Plato.—2h. 27m. It is now nearly the middle of the eclipse. The red colour is very brilliant to the naked eye. * * * After this, I noticed a progressive change of tint in the Moon.—2h. 50m. The Moon does not seem to the naked eye of so bright a red as before; and again I am reminded by its tint of red-hot copper, or rather copper which has begun to cool. The whole of Grimaldi is now uncovered. Through the telescope I notice a[95] decided grey shade at the lower part of the eclipsed portion, and the various small craters give it a stippled effect, like the old aqua-tint engravings. The upper part is reddish, but two graceful bluish curves, like horns, mark the form of the Hercynian mountains, and the bright region on the other limb of the Moon. These are visible also to the naked eye.

“Here’s how it looks to the naked eye: with a telescope, its surface shows more variation in color than it does unaided, and it’s not quite as bright red when viewed this way. The redness is most noticeable away from the southern edge of the shadow, peaking around the area of ‘Endymion.’ The Hercynian mountains (north of Grimaldus) appear to have a bright red color, and Grimaldus is clearly visible. Mare Crisium and the western seas are strikingly distinct. There’s no sign of Aristarchus or Plato.—2h. 27m. We’re now almost halfway through the eclipse. The red color is very bright to the naked eye. * * * After this, I observed a gradual change in the Moon’s color.—2h. 50m. The Moon doesn’t look as bright red to the naked eye as it did before; again, its color reminds me of red-hot copper, or rather copper that’s starting to cool. The entire area of Grimaldi is now visible. Through the telescope, I notice a[95] clear gray shade at the lower part of the eclipsed area, and the various small craters create a stippled effect, like old aquatint engravings. The upper part appears reddish, but two elegant bluish curves, resembling horns, outline the shape of the Hercynian mountains and the bright area on the opposite side of the Moon. These are also visible to the naked eye.”

“At 3h. 5m. the redness had almost disappeared; a very few minutes afterwards, no trace of it remained, and ere long clouds came on. I watched the Moon, however, occasionally gaining a glimpse of its disc, till a quarter to four o’clock, when, for the last time on that occasion, I saw it faintly appearing through the clouds, nearly a full Moon again; and then I took leave of it, feeling amply repaid for my vigil by the beautiful spectacle which I had seen.”[14]

“At 3:05, the redness had almost faded away; a couple of minutes later, there was no sign of it left, and soon clouds rolled in. I kept an eye on the Moon, occasionally catching a glimpse of its surface, until a quarter to four, when I saw it faintly shining through the clouds, almost a full Moon again; then I said goodbye, feeling fully rewarded for my patience by the beautiful sight I had witnessed.”[14]

[14] The Hon. Mrs. Ward, Trimleston House, near Dublin, in “Recreative Science,” p. 281.

[14] The Hon. Mrs. Ward, Trimleston House, near Dublin, in “Recreative Science,” p. 281.

Mr Walkey, who observed the lunar eclipse of March 19th, 1848, near Collumpton, says—“The appearances were as usual till 20 minutes past 9; at that period, and for the space of the next hour, instead of an eclipse, or the shadow (umbra) of the Earth being the cause of the total obscurity of the Moon, the whole phase of that body became very quickly and most beautifully[96] illuminated; and assumed the appearance of the glowing heat of fire from the furnace, rather tinged with a deep red. * * * The whole disc of the Moon being as perfect with light as if there had been no eclipse whatever! * * * The Moon positively gave good light from its disc during the total eclipse!”[15]

Mr. Walkey, who witnessed the lunar eclipse on March 19th, 1848, near Collumpton, says—“The visuals were typical until 9:20 PM; during that time, and for the next hour, instead of the expected eclipse, or the Earth's shadow (umbra) causing the total darkness of the Moon, the entire surface of the Moon quickly and beautifully[96] lit up; it looked like the glowing heat of a furnace, tinged with a deep red. * * * The entire disc of the Moon was perfectly illuminated as if there had been no eclipse at all! * * * The Moon actually provided good light from its surface during the total eclipse!”[15]

[15] “Philosophical Magazine,” No. 220, for August, 1848.

[15] “Philosophical Magazine,” No. 220, for August, 1848.

In the astronomical portion of the “Illustrated London Almanack for 1864,” by Mr. Glaisher, a beautiful tinted engraving is given representing the appearance of the Moon during the total eclipse of June 1, 1863, when all the light and dark places—the so-called mountains, seas, &c., were plainly visible. In the accompanying descriptive chapter, the following sentences occur:—“At the time of totality the Moon presented a soft woolly appearance, apparently more globular in form than when fully illuminated. Traces of the larger and brighter mountains were visible at the time of totality, and particularly the bright rays proceeding from Tycho, Kepler, and Aristarchus. * * * At first, when the obscured part was of small dimensions, it was of an iron grey tint, but as it approached totality, the reddish light became so apparent that it was remarked that the Moon ‘seemed to be on fire;’ and when the totality had commenced, it certainly looked like a fire[97] smouldering in its ashes, and almost going out.”

In the astronomy section of the “Illustrated London Almanack for 1864,” by Mr. Glaisher, there is a beautiful colored engraving showing what the Moon looked like during the total eclipse on June 1, 1863, when all the light and dark areas—the so-called mountains, seas, etc.—were clearly visible. In the accompanying descriptive chapter, the following sentences appear:—“At the time of totality, the Moon had a soft, fuzzy appearance, seeming more round than when fully lit. Traces of the larger, brighter mountains were visible during totality, especially the bright rays coming from Tycho, Kepler, and Aristarchus. * * * Initially, when the obscured part was small, it had an iron-gray tint, but as it got closer to totality, the reddish light became so obvious that people remarked that the Moon ‘seemed to be on fire;’ and when totality began, it definitely looked like a fire smoldering in its ashes, almost going out.”[97]

If then, the Sun and Moon have many times been seen above the horizon when the latter was eclipsed, how can it be said that the Earth’s shadow was the cause of a lunar eclipse, when the Earth was not between or in a line with the Sun and Moon? And how can the Moon’s non-luminous surface be distinctly visible and illuminated during the very totality of an eclipse, if all the light of the Sun is intercepted by the Earth?

If the Sun and Moon have often been visible in the sky when the Moon was eclipsed

Again, if the Moon is a sphere, which it is declared to be, how can its surface reflect the light of the Sun? If her surface was a mass of polished silver, it could not reflect from more than a mere point! Let a silvered glass ball or globe of considerable size be held before a lamp or fire of any magnitude, and it will be seen that instead of the whole surface reflecting light, there will be a very small portion only illuminated. But the Moon’s whole surface is brilliantly illuminated! a condition or effect utterly impossible if it be spherical. The surface might be illuminated from the Sun, or any other source if opaque, instead of polished, like an ordinary silvered mirror, but it could not shine intensely from every part, and brightly illuminate the objects before it, as the Moon[98] does so beautifully when full and in a clear firmament. If the Earth were admitted to be globular, and to move, and to be capable of throwing a shadow by intercepting the light of the Sun, it would be impossible for a lunar eclipse to occur thereby, unless at the same time the Moon be proved to be non-luminous, and to shine only by reflection. But this is not proved; it is only assumed as an essential part of a theory. The contrary is capable of proof, and proof beyond the power of doubt, viz., that the Moon is self-luminous, or shines with a light peculiar to herself, and therefore independently of the Sun. A reflector necessarily gives off what it receives. If a mass of red-hot metal be placed before a plane or concave surface, heat will be reflected. If snow or ice be similarly placed, cold will be reflected. If light, ordinary or coloured, be presented, the same will be reflected. If sound of a given pitch be produced, the same pitch will be reflected. If the note A be sounded upon a musical instrument, a reflector would not return the note B or C, but the same note, altered only in degree or intensity, but not in “pitch.” A reflector receiving a red light would not return a blue or yellow light. A reflector collecting the cold from a mass of ice, would not throw off heat; nor the contrary. Nor could the Moon, if a reflector, radiate or[99] throw down upon the Earth any other light than such as she receives from the Sun. No difference could exist in the quality or character of the light, and it could differ in no respect but the quantity or intensity.

Again, if the Moon is a sphere, which it is said to be, how can its surface reflect the light of the Sun? If its surface were a mass of polished silver, it couldn't reflect from more than a tiny point! If you hold a large silvered glass ball or globe in front of any lamp or fire, you'll see that instead of the whole surface reflecting light, only a very small section gets illuminated. But the Moon’s whole surface is brilliantly lit! This condition or effect would be completely impossible if it were spherical. The surface might be illuminated by the Sun or any other opaque source, but it couldn't shine intensely from every part and brightly illuminate the objects in front of it, as the Moon[98] does beautifully when full and in a clear sky. If the Earth were accepted to be globular and to move, and capable of casting a shadow by blocking the Sun's light, a lunar eclipse couldn't happen unless at the same time the Moon were proven to be non-luminous and to shine only by reflection. But this hasn't been proven; it's only assumed as a crucial part of a theory. The opposite can be proven, and proven beyond doubt, namely that the Moon is self-luminous, or shines with its own light, independently of the Sun. A reflector always gives off what it receives. If a mass of red-hot metal is placed in front of a flat or concave surface, heat will be reflected. If snow or ice is placed similarly, cold will be reflected. If light, whether ordinary or colored, is presented, the same will be reflected. If sound of a certain pitch is produced, that same pitch will be reflected. If the note A is played on a musical instrument, a reflector wouldn't return the note B or C, but the same note, changed only in degree or intensity, but not in “pitch.” A reflector receiving red light wouldn't return blue or yellow light. A reflector collecting cold from ice wouldn’t give off heat; nor the other way around. Nor could the Moon, if it were a reflector, radiate or[99] shine down on the Earth any light other than what it receives from the Sun. There would be no difference in quality or character of the light, and it could only vary in quantity or intensity.

The light of the Sun and of the Moon are different in their general appearance—in the colour and action upon the eye.

The light of the Sun and Moon look different overall—in color and how they affect the eye.

The Sun’s light is drying and preservative, or antiseptic. The Moon’s light is damp and putrefactive.

The Sun’s light is drying and preservative, or antiseptic. The Moon’s light is damp and putrefactive.

The Sun’s rays will put out a common fire; the Moon’s light will increase the combustion. The light of the Sun falling upon certain chemical substances, produces a change of colour, as in photographic and other processes. The light of the Moon fails to produce the same effect. Dr. Lardner, at page 121 of his excellent work, “The Museum of Science,” says—“The most striking instance of the effect of certain rays of solar light in blackening a light-colored substance, is afforded by chloride of silver, which is a white substance, but which immediately becomes black when acted upon by the rays near the violet extremity of the spectrum. This substance, however, highly susceptible as it is of having its colour affected by light, is, nevertheless, found not to be changed in any sensible degree when exposed to the light of the[100] Moon, even when that light is condensed by the most powerful burning lenses.”

The Sun’s rays can extinguish a regular fire; the Moon’s light can fuel combustion. Sunlight hitting certain chemical substances causes a color change, like in photography and other processes. Moonlight doesn’t have the same effect. Dr. Lardner, on page 121 of his great book, “The Museum of Science,” states—“The most striking example of how certain rays of sunlight can darken a light-colored substance is seen with silver chloride, which is white but turns black when exposed to rays close to the violet end of the spectrum. Even though this substance is very sensitive to light, it doesn’t change in any noticeable way when exposed to moonlight, even when that light is focused by the most powerful burning lenses.”

The Sun’s light when concentrated by a number of mirrors, or a large burning lens, produces a focus which is entirely non-luminous, but in which the heat is so great that metallic and alkaline substances are quickly fused; earthy and mineral compounds almost immediately vitrified; and all animal and vegetable structures in a few seconds burned up and destroyed. But the Moon’s light so concentrated produces a brilliant focus, so luminous that it is difficult to look upon it; and yet there is no increase of temperature! “If the most delicate thermometer be exposed to the full light of the Moon, shining with its greatest lustre, the mercury is not elevated a hair’s breadth, neither would it be if exposed in the focus of her rays concentrated by the most powerful lenses. This has been proved by actual experiment.”[16] “This question has been submitted to the test of direct experiment. * * * The bulb of a thermometer sufficiently sensitive to render apparent a change of temperature amounting to the thousandth part of a degree, was placed in the focus of a concave reflector of vast dimensions, which, being directed to the Moon, the lunar rays were collected with great power upon it. Not the slightest change,[101] however, was produced in the thermometric column, proving that a concentration of rays sufficient to fuse gold, if they proceeded from the Sun, does not produce a change of temperature so great as the thousandth part of a degree, when they proceed from the Moon.”[17]

The Sun’s light, when focused using several mirrors or a large burning lens, creates a spot that is completely non-luminous, yet the heat is so intense that metals and alkaline materials quickly melt; earthy and mineral compounds almost instantly turn into glass; and all animal and plant matter is burned up and destroyed within seconds. However, when the Moon’s light is similarly focused, it produces a bright spot that is so dazzling it’s hard to look at, and yet there’s no rise in temperature! “If the most sensitive thermometer is placed in the full light of the Moon at its brightest, the mercury doesn’t rise at all, nor would it if positioned in the center of its rays focused by the strongest lenses. This has been confirmed by actual experiments.”[16] “This question has been put to direct testing. * * * A thermometer so sensitive that it can detect a temperature change as small as a thousandth of a degree was placed at the focus of a large concave reflector aimed at the Moon, gathering the lunar rays with great intensity. Nevertheless, no change occurred in the thermometer reading, showing that a concentration of rays strong enough to melt gold if they come from the Sun does not cause a temperature change greater than a thousandth of a degree when they come from the Moon.”[17]

[16] “All the Year Round,” by Dickens.

[16] “All the Year Round,” by Dickens.

[17] Dr. Lardner’s Museum of Science, p. 115.

[17] Dr. Lardner’s Museum of Science, p. 115.

“The light of the Moon though concentrated by the most powerful burning glass, is incapable of raising the temperature of the most delicate thermometer. M. De La Hire collected the rays of the full Moon when on the meridian, by means of a burning glass thirty-five inches in diameter, and made them fall on the bulb of a delicate air-thermometer. No effect was produced, though the lunar rays by this glass were concentrated 300 times.” “Professor Forbes concentrated the Moon’s light by a lens thirty inches in diameter, its focal distance being about forty-one inches, and having a power of concentration exceeding 6,000 times. The image of the Moon which was only eighteen hours past full, and less than two hours from the meridian, was brilliantly thrown by this lens on the extremity of a commodious thermo-pile. Although the observations were made in the most unexceptional manner, and (supposing that half the rays were reflected, dispersed, and absorbed) though the light of the Moon was concentrated[102] 3000 times, not the slightest thermo-effect was produced![18] In the “Lancet” (medical journal) for March 14th, 1856, particulars are given of several experiments, which proved that the Moon’s rays when concentrated actually reduced the temperature upon a thermometer more than 8 degrees!

“The light of the Moon, even when focused through the most powerful lens, can't increase the temperature of the most sensitive thermometer. M. De La Hire gathered the rays of the full Moon at its highest point using a lens thirty-five inches across, directing them onto the bulb of a delicate air thermometer. No effect was produced, even though the lunar rays were concentrated 300 times.” “Professor Forbes focused the Moon’s light through a lens thirty inches in diameter, with a focal length of about forty-one inches, achieving a concentration power of over 6,000 times. The image of the Moon, which was just eighteen hours past full and less than two hours from its highest point, was brilliantly projected by this lens onto the end of a large thermo-pile. Despite the observations being conducted in the best possible way, and (assuming that half the rays were reflected, scattered, and absorbed) even with the Moon’s light concentrated[102] 3000 times, not the slightest thermo-effect was produced![18] In the “Lancet” (medical journal) from March 14th, 1856, details are provided about several experiments that demonstrated that the Moon’s rays, when concentrated, actually reduced the temperature on a thermometer by more than 8 degrees!

[18] Dr. Noad’s Lectures on Chemistry, p. 334.

[18] Dr. Noad’s Lectures on Chemistry, p. 334.

“The cold chaste Moon, the Queen
Of Heaven’s bright Isles;
Who makes all beautiful
On which she smiles:
That wandering shrine of soft
Yet icy flame,
Which ever is transformed
Yet still the same;
And warms not but illumes.”

Shelley.

—Shelley.

The “pale cold Moon” is an expression not only beautiful poetically but evidently true philosophically.

The “pale cold Moon” is a phrase that is not only poetically beautiful but also clearly true on a philosophical level.

If, as we have now seen, the very nature of a reflector demands certain conditions and the Moon does not manifest these conditions, it must of necessity be concluded that the Moon is not a reflector, but a self-luminous body. If self-luminous her surface could not be darkened or eclipsed by a shadow of the Earth—supposing such were thrown upon it. The luminosity instead of being diminished would be greater in proportion to the greater density or[103] darkness of the shadow. As the light in a lantern shines most brightly in the darkest places, so would the Moon’s self-luminous surface be most intense in the deepest part of the Earth’s shadow. It is thus rendered undeniable that a Lunar Eclipse does not and could not arise from a shadow of the Earth! As a Solar Eclipse occurs from the Moon passing over the Sun; so from the evidence it is clear that a Lunar Eclipse can only arise from a similar cause—a body semi-transparent and well-defined passing before the Moon, or between her surface and the observer on the surface of the Earth. That such a body exists is admitted by several distinguished astronomers. In the report of the Council of the Royal Astronomical Society for June, 1850, it is stated, “We may well doubt whether that body which we call the Moon is the only satellite of the Earth.” In the report of the Academy of Sciences for October 12, 1846, and again for August, 1847, the Director of one of the French Observatories gives a number of observations and calculations which have led him to conclude that “there is at least one non-luminous body of considerable magnitude which is attached as a satellite to this Earth.”[19]

If, as we've now seen, the very nature of a reflector requires certain conditions and the Moon doesn't meet these conditions, we must conclude that the Moon is not a reflector, but a self-luminous body. If it is self-luminous, its surface couldn't be darkened or eclipsed by the Earth's shadow—assuming such a shadow were cast on it. The brightness would instead increase in proportion to the density or[103] darkness of the shadow. Just as the light in a lantern shines brightest in the darkest areas, the Moon’s self-luminous surface would be most intense in the deepest part of the Earth's shadow. Thus, it's clear that a Lunar Eclipse does not and could not occur from the Earth's shadow! Just as a Solar Eclipse happens when the Moon passes in front of the Sun, evidence shows that a Lunar Eclipse can only happen from a similar cause—a semi-transparent, well-defined body passing in front of the Moon or between its surface and the observer on Earth. The existence of such a body is acknowledged by several notable astronomers. In the report from the Council of the Royal Astronomical Society for June 1850, it states, “We may well doubt whether that body we call the Moon is the only satellite of the Earth.” In the report from the Academy of Sciences for October 12, 1846, and again for August 1847, the Director of one of the French Observatories provides several observations and calculations that led him to conclude that “there is at least one non-luminous body of considerable magnitude that is attached as a satellite to this Earth.”[19]

[19] Referred to in Lardner’s “Museum of Science,” p. 159.

[19] Mentioned in Lardner’s “Museum of Science,” p. 159.

Persons who are unacquainted with the methods of calculating Eclipses and other[104] astronomical phenomena, are prone to look upon the correctness of these calculations as powerful arguments in favour of the doctrine of the Earth’s rotundity and the Newtonian philosophy generally. But this is erroneous. Whatever theory is adopted, or if all theories are discarded, the same results may follow, because the necessary data may be tabulated and employed independently of all theory, or may be mixed up with any, even the most opposite doctrines, or kept distinct from every system, just as the operator may decide. The tables of the Moon’s relative positions for almost any second of time are purely practical, the result of long continued observation, and may or may not be mixed up with hypothesis. In Smith’s “Rise and progress of Astronomy,” speaking of Ptolemy, who lived in the 2nd century of the Christian Era, it is said, “The (considered) defects of his system did not prevent him from calculating all the Eclipses that were to happen for 600 years to come.” Professor Partington, at page 370 of his Lectures on Natural Philosophy, says, “The most ancient observations of which we are in possession, that are sufficiently accurate to be employed in astronomical calculations, are those made at Babylon about 719 before the Christian Era, of three Eclipses of the Moon. Ptolemy, who has transmitted them to us,[105] employed them for determining the period of the Moon’s mean motion; and therefore had probably none more ancient on which he could depend. The Chaldeans, however, must have made a long series of observations before they could discover their “Saros” or lunar period of 6,585¹⁄₃ days, or about 18 years; at which time, as they had learnt, the place of the Moon, her node and apogee return nearly to the same situation with respect to the Earth and the Sun, and, of course, a series of nearly similar Eclipses occur.”

People who aren’t familiar with how to calculate eclipses and other astronomical events often view the accuracy of these calculations as strong support for the idea that the Earth is round and for Newton's philosophy overall. However, this is a mistake. No matter what theory is chosen, or if all theories are ignored, the same outcomes can occur because the necessary data can be organized and used without relying on any theory, or it can be combined with any, even the most opposing beliefs, or kept separate from any system, depending on the operator's choice. The tables showing the Moon's positions at nearly any moment are entirely practical, resulting from extensive observations, and may or may not be associated with hypotheses. In Smith’s “Rise and Progress of Astronomy,” when discussing Ptolemy, who lived in the 2nd century CE, it states, “The (acknowledged) flaws in his system did not stop him from calculating all the eclipses that were set to occur for the next 600 years.” Professor Partington, on page 370 of his Lectures on Natural Philosophy, notes, “The oldest observations we have that are accurate enough for astronomical calculations were made in Babylon around 719 BCE of three lunar eclipses. Ptolemy, who passed them down to us,[105] used them to determine the Moon’s average motion; thus, he probably had no older data to rely on. However, the Chaldeans must have conducted a long series of observations before they could identify their 'Saros' or lunar cycle of 6,585¹⁄₃ days, or about 18 years; during which time, as they learned, the Moon’s position, its node, and apogee nearly return to the same position in relation to the Earth and the Sun, leading to a series of nearly identical eclipses.”

Sir Richard Phillips, in his “Million of Facts,” at page 388, says:—“The precision of astronomy arises, not from theories, but from prolonged observations, and the regularity of the motions, or the ascertained uniformity of their irregularities. Ephemerides of the planets’ places, of Eclipses, &c., have been published for above 300 years, and were nearly as precise as at present.”

Sir Richard Phillips, in his “Million of Facts,” at page 388, says:—“The accuracy of astronomy comes not from theories, but from extended observations and the consistency of movements, or the verified regularity of their irregularities. Ephemerides of the planets' positions, of eclipses, etc., have been published for over 300 years and were almost as accurate as they are today.”

“No particular theory is required to calculate Eclipses; and the calculations may be made with equal accuracy independent of every theory.”[20]

“No specific theory is needed to calculate eclipses; and the calculations can be done with the same accuracy regardless of any theory.”[20]

[20] Somerville’s Physical Sciences, p. 46.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Somerville’s Physical Sciences, p. 46.


[106]

[106]

SECTION 10.
Tide causes.

The doctrine of the Earth’s rotundity being fallacious, all ideas of “centre of attraction of gravitation,” “mutual attraction of Earth and Moon,” &c., &c., must be given up; and the cause of tides in the ocean must be sought for in another direction. It is certain that there is a constant pressure of the atmosphere upon the surface of the Earth and ocean. This is proved by ordinary barometrical observations, many Pneumatic experiments, and by the fact that during the most fearful storms at sea the surface only is disturbed; at the depth of a hundred feet the water is always calm—except in the path of well-marked currents and local submarine phenomena. The following quotations gathered from casual reading fully corroborate this statement. “It is amazing how superficial is the most terrible tempest. Divers assure us that in the greatest storms calm water is found at the depth of 90 feet.”[21]

The idea that the Earth is round is flawed, so we need to abandon concepts like the "center of gravitational attraction" and the "mutual attraction of the Earth and Moon." We should look for the cause of ocean tides elsewhere. It's clear that there is a constant atmospheric pressure on the surface of the Earth and ocean. This is demonstrated by regular barometric readings, various pneumatic experiments, and the fact that during severe storms at sea, only the surface is affected; at a depth of a hundred feet, the water is usually calm—unless there's a strong current or specific underwater event. The following quotes collected from casual reading support this point. "It's surprising how shallow the most intense storm is. Divers tell us that even during the worst storms, calm water is found at a depth of 90 feet."[21]

[21] Chambers’s Journal, No. 100, p. 379.

[21] Chambers’s Journal, No. 100, p. 379.

“This motion of the surface of the sea is not perceptible to a great depth. In the strongest[107] gale it is supposed not to extend beyond 72 feet below the surface; and at the depth of 90 feet the sea is perfectly still.”[22]

“This movement of the ocean's surface isn't felt at great depths. Even in the strongest gale, it's believed not to reach beyond 72 feet down; at a depth of 90 feet, the sea is completely calm.”[22]

[22] Penny Cyclopædia, Article Sea.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Penny Encyclopaedia, Article Sea.

“The people are under a great mistake who believe that the substance of the water moves to any considerable depth in a storm at sea. It is only the form or shadow which hurries along like a spirit, or like a thought over the countenance of the ‘great deep,’ at the rate of some forty miles an hour. Even when the ‘Flying Dutchman’ is abroad the great mass of water continues undisturbed and nearly motionless a few feet below the surface.”[23]

“The people are making a big mistake if they think the actual water moves to any significant depth during a storm at sea. It’s just the surface or the appearance that rushes by like a ghost, or like a thought across the face of the ‘great deep,’ at about forty miles an hour. Even when the ‘Flying Dutchman’ appears, the vast mass of water remains calm and nearly still just a few feet below the surface.”[23]

[23] London Saturday Journal, August 8, 1840, p. 71.

[23] London Saturday Journal, August 8, 1840, p. 71.

“The unabraded appearance of the shells brought up from great depths, and the almost total absence of the mixture of any detritus from the sea, or foreign matter, suggest most forcibly the idea of perfect repose at the bottom of the deep sea.”[24]

“The smooth look of the shells brought up from deep waters, along with the almost complete lack of any sea debris or foreign material, strongly suggests the notion of complete stillness at the bottom of the deep sea.”[24]

[24] Physical Geography of the Sea, by Lieut. Maury, p. 265.

[24] Physical Geography of the Sea, by Lieut. Maury, p. 265.

Bearing this fact in mind, that there exists a continual pressure of the atmosphere upon the Earth, and associating it with the fact that the Earth is a vast plane “stretched out upon the waters,” and it will be seen that it must of necessity slightly fluctuate, or slowly rise and fall in the water. As by the action of the[108] atmosphere the Earth is slowly depressed, the water moves towards the receding shores and produces the flood tide; and when by the reaction of the resisting oceanic medium the Earth gradually ascends the waters recede, and the ebb tide is produced. This is the general cause of tides. Whatever peculiarities are observable they may be traced to the reaction of channels, bays, headlands, and other local causes.

Keeping this fact in mind, that there is a constant pressure of the atmosphere on the Earth, and connecting it with the idea that the Earth is a huge surface "stretched out upon the waters," we can see that it must naturally fluctuate a bit or slowly rise and fall in the water. As the atmosphere slowly pushes down on the Earth, the water moves toward the retreating shores, creating the flood tide. When the Earth's surface begins to rise again due to the ocean's resistance, the water recedes, and the ebb tide occurs. This is the general cause of tides. Any specific characteristics observed can be attributed to the interaction of channels, bays, headlands, and other local factors.

If a raft, or a ship, or any other structure floating upon water be carefully observed, it will be seen to have a gentle fluctuating motion. However calm the water and the atmosphere may be, this gradual rising and falling of the floating mass is always more or less observable. If vessels of different sizes are floating near each other they will be seen to fluctuate with different velocities, the largest and heaviest will move the least rapidly. This motion will be observable whether the vessels be held by their anchors, or moored to buoys, or freely floating in still water. A large and heavily laden vessel will make several fluctuations in a minute of time; the Earth once only in about twelve hours, because it is proportionately larger.

If you closely observe a raft, a ship, or any other structure floating on water, you'll notice a gentle up-and-down motion. No matter how calm the water and air might be, this gradual rising and falling of the floating object is always somewhat noticeable. When vessels of different sizes are floating near each other, they'll be seen to move at different speeds, with the largest and heaviest ones moving the least quickly. This motion can be noticed whether the vessels are anchored, tied to buoys, or freely floating in still water. A large, heavily loaded vessel will make several up-and-down movements in a minute, while the Earth only does this about once every twelve hours because it's proportionately larger.

To this simple condition of the Earth,—the action or pressure upon it of the atmosphere, and the reaction or resistance to it of the water, may be traced all the leading peculiarities of the[109] tides. The simultaneous ebb and flow upon meridians 180° apart. The absence of high and low water in large inland seas and lakes; which being contained within and fluctuating with the Earth cannot therefore show a relative change in the altitude of the surface. The flux and reflux observed in several inland wells and basins though far from the sea, but being connected with it by subterranean passages, necessarily show a relative difference in the surface levels of the earth and water. And the regular ebb and flood of the water in the great Polar sea recently discovered by Dr. Kane, although it is separated from the great tidal current of the Atlantic Ocean by deep barriers of ice—as will be seen by the following quotation:—“Dr. Kane reported an open sea north of the parallel of 82°. To reach it his party crossed a barrier of ice 80 or 100 miles broad. Before gaining this open water he found the thermometer to show the extreme temperature of -60°. Passing this ice-bound region by travelling North, he stood on the shores of an iceless sea extending in an unbroken sheet of water as far as the eye could reach towards the pole. Its waves were dashing on the beach with the swell of a boundless ocean. The tides ebbed and flowed in it, and I apprehend that the tidal wave from the Atlantic can no more pass under this icy barrier to be propagated[110] in seas beyond than the vibrations of a musical string can pass with its notes a ‘fret’ upon which the musician has placed his finger. * * * These tides therefore must have been born in that cold sea, having their cradle about the North Pole; and we infer that most, if not all, the unexplored regions about the Pole are covered with deep water; for, were this unexpected area mostly land, or shallow water, it could not give birth to regular tides.”[25]

To this basic condition of the Earth—the pressure from the atmosphere and the response from the water—we can trace all the main characteristics of the[109] tides. The simultaneous ebb and flow occurring on meridians 180° apart. The lack of high and low water in large inland seas and lakes, which are contained within and fluctuate with the Earth, cannot show a relative change in the surface level. The rising and falling observed in several inland wells and basins, although far from the sea, but connected to it by underground passages, inevitably show a relative difference in the surface levels of the Earth and water. And the regular ebb and flood of the water in the great Polar sea recently discovered by Dr. Kane, even though it is separated from the major tidal current of the Atlantic Ocean by deep ice barriers—as will be illustrated by the following quote:—“Dr. Kane reported an open sea north of the parallel of 82°. To reach it, his team crossed a barrier of ice 80 or 100 miles wide. Before reaching this open water, he found the thermometer reading an extreme temperature of -60°. After passing this ice-covered area by heading north, he stood on the shores of a sea without ice, extending in an unbroken sheet of water as far as the eye could see towards the pole. Its waves were crashing on the shore with the swell of an endless ocean. The tides ebbed and flowed in it, and I believe that the tidal wave from the Atlantic cannot pass under this icy barrier to continue[110] in the seas beyond any more than the vibrations of a musical string can carry its notes past a ‘fret’ where the musician has placed their finger. * * * These tides must have originated in that cold sea, having their birthplace around the North Pole; and we conclude that most, if not all, of the unexplored regions near the Pole are covered with deep water; because if this unexpected area was mostly land or shallow water, it couldn’t create regular tides.”[25]

[25] Physical Geography of the Sea, by Lieut. Maury, p. 176.

[25] Physical Geography of the Sea, by Lieut. Maury, p. 176.

That the Earth has a vibratory or tremulous motion, such as must necessarily belong to a floating and fluctuating structure, is abundantly proved by the experience of astronomers and surveyors. If a delicate spirit-level be firmly placed upon a rock or upon the most solid foundation which it is possible to construct, the very curious phenomenon will be observed of constant change in the position of the air-bubble. However carefully the “level” may be adjusted, and the instrument protected from the atmosphere, the “bubble” will not maintain its position many seconds together. A somewhat similar influence has been noticed in astronomical observatories, where instruments of the best construction and placed in the most approved positions cannot always be relied upon without occasional re-adjustment.

That the Earth has a vibrating or shaky motion, which is something that must come with a floating and unstable structure, is clearly shown by the experiences of astronomers and surveyors. If a sensitive spirit level is securely placed on a rock or the strongest foundation possible, a very interesting phenomenon will be seen with the air bubble constantly changing position. No matter how carefully the “level” is adjusted and how protected the instrument is from the elements, the “bubble” won’t stay in place for more than a few seconds. A similar effect has been noted in astronomical observatories, where even the best instruments, set in the ideal positions, can’t always be trusted without occasional adjustments.


[111]

[111]

SECTION 11.
CONSTITUTION, CONDITION, AND FINAL DESTRUCTION OF THE EARTH BY FIRE.

Chemical analysis proves to us the important fact that the great bulk of the Earth—meaning thereby the land as distinct from the waters—is composed of metallic oxides or metals in combination with oxygen. When means are adopted to remove the oxygen it is found that most of these metallic bases are highly combustible. The different degrees of affinity existing among the elements of the Earth, give rise to all the rocks, minerals, ores, deposits, and strata which constitute the material habitable world. The different specific gravities or relative densities which these substances are found to possess, and the numerous evidences which exist of their former plastic or semi-fluid condition, afford positive proof that from a once commingled or chaotic state regular but rapid precipitation, stratification, crystallization, and concretion successively[112] occurred; and that in some way not yet clear to us sufficient chemical action was produced to ignite a great portion of the Earth, and to reduce it to a molten incandescent state, the volatile products of which being forcibly eliminated have broken up the stratified formations, and produced the irregular confused condition which we now observe. That such an incandescent molten state of a great portion of the lower parts of the Earth still exists is a matter of certainty; and there is evidence that the heat thus internally generated is gradually increasing.

Chemical analysis shows us the important fact that most of the Earth—meaning the land as separate from the waters—is made up of metallic oxides or metals combined with oxygen. When methods are used to remove the oxygen, it's found that many of these metallic bases are highly flammable. The different levels of attraction among the elements of the Earth lead to all the rocks, minerals, ores, deposits, and layers that make up the material world we live in. The varying specific gravities or relative densities of these substances, along with the many signs of their past plastic or semi-fluid states, provide clear evidence that from a once mixed or chaotic condition, regular but quick processes of precipitation, layering, crystallization, and solidification took place; and that somehow, not yet fully understood, enough chemical activity occurred to ignite a large part of the Earth and melt it into a glowing, liquid state. The volatile products of this process being forcefully released have disrupted the layered formations and created the irregular, chaotic condition we see today. That a molten, glowing state still exists in much of the lower parts of the Earth is certain; and there is evidence that the heat generated from within is gradually increasing.[112]

“The uppermost strata of the soil share in all the variations of temperature which depend upon the seasons; and this influence is exerted to a depth which, although it varies with the latitude, is never very great. Beyond this point the temperature rises in proportion as we descend to greater depths, and it has been shown, by numerous and often-repeated experiments, that the increase of temperature is on average one degree (Fahrenheit) for about every 545 feet. Hence it results that at a depth of about twelve miles from the surface, we should be on the verge of an incandescent mass.”[26]

“The top layer of soil experiences all the temperature changes that come with the seasons, and this effect reaches a depth that varies with latitude but is never very deep. Below this level, the temperature increases as we go deeper, and numerous experiments have shown that, on average, the temperature rises by one degree Fahrenheit for every 545 feet. Therefore, at a depth of about twelve miles from the surface, we would be close to an extremely hot mass.”[26]

[26] Rambles of a Naturalist, by M. de Quatrefages.

[26] Rambles of a Naturalist, by M. de Quatrefages.

“So great is the heat within the Earth, that in Switzerland, and other countries where the springs of water are very deep, they bring to the[113] surface the warm mineral waters so much used for baths and medicine for the sick; and it is said, that if you were to dig very deep down into the Earth, the temperature would increase at the rate of one degree of the thermometer for every 100 feet; so that, at the depth of 7000 feet, or one mile and a half, all the water that you found would be boiling; and at the depth of about ten miles all the rocks would be melted. * * * A day will yet come when this earth will be burned up by the fire. There is fire, as you have heard, within it, ready to burst forth at any moment.”[27] “This earth, although covered all round with a solid crust, is all on fire within. Its interior is supposed to be a burning mass of melted, glowing metals, fiery gas, and boiling lava. * * * * * The solid crust which covers this inward fire is supposed not to be much more than from 9 to 12 miles in thickness. Whenever this crust breaks open, or is cleft in any place, there rush out lava, fire, melted rocks, fiery gases, and ashes, sometimes in such floods as to bury whole cities. From time to time we read of the earth quaking, trembling, and sometimes opening, and of mountains and small islands (which are mountains in the sea)[114] being thrown up in a day.”[28]

“The heat inside the Earth is so intense that in Switzerland and other countries with deep water springs, they bring warm mineral water to the surface that is widely used for baths and medicine for the sick. It’s said that if you dig deep into the Earth, the temperature would rise by one degree for every 100 feet; so, at a depth of 7,000 feet, or one and a half miles, any water you find would be boiling, and at about ten miles deep, all the rocks would be melted. * * * One day, this Earth will be consumed by fire. There is fire, as you have heard, within it, ready to erupt at any moment. This Earth, although covered all around by a solid crust, is burning inside. Its interior is thought to be a seething mass of melted metals, fiery gas, and boiling lava. * * * * * The solid crust that shields this inner fire is believed to be only about 9 to 12 miles thick. Whenever this crust cracks open or is split anywhere, lava, fire, melted rocks, fiery gases, and ashes rush out, sometimes in such torrents that they can bury entire cities. From time to time, we read about earthquakes, tremors, and sometimes the ground opening up, as well as mountains and small islands (which are underwater mountains) being formed in a single day.”[27]

[27] “The World’s Birthday,” by Professor Gaussen, Geneva, p. 43.

[27] “The World’s Birthday,” by Professor Gaussen, Geneva, p. 43.

[28] “The World’s Birthday,” by Professor Gaussen, Geneva, p. 42.

[28] “The World’s Birthday,” by Professor Gaussen, Geneva, p. 42.

In a periodical called “Recreative Science,” at the end of an interesting article on volcanoes, &c., the following sentence occurs:—“The conclusion is therefore inevitable, that the general distribution all over the earth of volcanic vents, their similarity of action and products, their enormous power and seeming inexhaustibility, their extensiveness of action in their respective sites, the continuance of their energies during countless years, and the incessant burning day and night, from year to year, of such craters as Stromboli; and lastly, the apparent inefficiency of external circumstances in controlling their operations, eruptions happening beneath the sea as beneath the land, in the frigid as in the torrid zone, for these and many less striking phenomena, we must seek for some great and general cause, such only as the central heat of the earth affords us.”

In a magazine called “Recreative Science,” at the end of an interesting article on volcanoes, the following sentence appears: “The conclusion is therefore inevitable that the general distribution of volcanic vents all over the earth, their similar actions and products, their enormous power and apparent inexhaustibility, their extensive activity in their respective locations, the continuation of their energy over countless years, and the constant burning day and night, year after year, of craters like Stromboli; and finally, the seeming inability of external factors to control their operations, with eruptions occurring both under the sea and on land, in cold regions as well as in hot zones, for these and many less noticeable phenomena, we must look for some significant and overarching cause, such only as the central heat of the earth provides us.”

Sir Richard Phillips says, “at the depth of 50 feet (from the sea level) the temperature of the earth is the same winter and summer.” * * * “The deepest coal mine in England is at Killingworth, near Newcastle-upon-Tyne, and the mean annual temperature at 400 yards below the surface is 77°; and at 300 yards, 70°; while[115] at the surface it is but 48°, being about one degree of increase for every 15 yards. Hence, at 3,300 yards, the heat would be equal to boiling water, taking 20 yards to a degree. This explains the origin of hot springs. The heat of the Bath waters is 116°, hence they would appear to rise from a depth of 1,320 yards. By experiments made at the Observatory of Paris for ascertaining the increase of temperature from the surface of the earth towards the interior, 51 feet, or 17 yards, corresponds to the increase of one degree Fahrenheit’s thermometer. Hence, the temperature of boiling water would be at 8,212 feet, or about 1¹⁄₂ English miles under Paris.”

Sir Richard Phillips says, “At a depth of 50 feet (from sea level), the temperature of the earth stays the same in winter and summer.” * * * “The deepest coal mine in England is at Killingworth, near Newcastle-upon-Tyne, and the average annual temperature at 400 yards below the surface is 77°F; at 300 yards, it’s 70°F; while[115] at the surface, it’s only 48°F, which is an increase of about one degree for every 15 yards. Therefore, at 3,300 yards, the heat would equal boiling water, using 20 yards per degree. This explains how hot springs form. The temperature of the Bath waters is 116°F, suggesting they rise from a depth of 1,320 yards. Experiments conducted at the Observatory of Paris to determine the temperature increase from the earth's surface towards its center show that 51 feet, or 17 yards, corresponds to an increase of one degree on the Fahrenheit thermometer. Thus, boiling water would be found at 8,212 feet, or about 1½ English miles beneath Paris.”

Professor Silliman, of America, states “that in boring the Artesian wells in Paris, the temperature increased at the rate of 1 degree for every 50 feet downwards; and, reasoning from causes known to exist, the whole of the interior part of the earth, or, at least, a great part of it, is an ocean of melted rock agitated by violent winds.”

Professor Silliman from America states, “that while drilling the Artesian wells in Paris, the temperature increased by 1 degree for every 50 feet down. Based on known causes, the entire interior of the earth, or at least a significant portion of it, is an ocean of molten rock stirred by intense winds.”

Sir Charles Lyell, in his address to the British Association, assembled at Bath, September, 1864, speaking of hot springs generally, said “An increase of heat is always experienced as we descend into the interior of the earth. * * * The estimate deduced by Mr. Hopkins, from an accurate series of observations made in the[116] Monkwearmouth shaft, near Durham, and in the Dukenfield shaft, near Manchester, each of them 2,000 feet in depth. In these shafts the temperature was found to rise at the rate of 1° Fah. for every increase of depth of from 65 to 70 feet.”

Sir Charles Lyell, in his speech to the British Association gathered in Bath in September 1864, talked about hot springs in general and said, “You always feel an increase in heat as you go deeper into the earth. * * * The estimate made by Mr. Hopkins, based on a detailed series of observations in the [116] Monkwearmouth shaft near Durham and the Dukenfield shaft near Manchester, both of which are 2,000 feet deep, showed that in these shafts, the temperature increased at a rate of 1° Fahrenheit for every 65 to 70 feet of additional depth.”

“The observations made by M. Arago, in 1821, that the deepest Artesian wells are the warmest, threw great light on the origin of thermal springs, and on the establishment of the law, that terrestrial heat increases with increasing depth. It is a remarkable fact, which has but recently been noticed, that at the close of the third century St Patricius, probably Bishop of Partusa, was led to adopt very correct views regarding the phenomenon of the hot springs at Carthage. On being asked what was the cause of boiling water bursting from the earth, he replied, ‘Fire is nourished in the clouds, and in the interior of the earth, as Etna and other mountains near Naples may teach you. The subterranean waters rise as if through siphons. The cause of hot springs is this: waters which are more remote from the subterranean fire are colder, whilst those which rise nearer the fire, are heated by it, and bring with them to the surface which we inhabit, an insupportable degree of heat.’”[29]

“The observations made by M. Arago in 1821 that the deepest Artesian wells are the warmest shed significant light on the origin of thermal springs and established the principle that terrestrial heat increases with depth. It is noteworthy that at the end of the third century, St. Patricius, likely the Bishop of Partusa, had very accurate views about the hot springs in Carthage. When asked about the cause of boiling water erupting from the earth, he replied, ‘Fire is sustained in the clouds and in the depths of the earth, as seen with Etna and other mountains near Naples. The underground waters rise as if through siphons. The cause of hot springs is this: waters further away from the subterranean fire are colder, whereas those that are closer to the fire are heated by it and bring an unbearable degree of heat to the surface where we live.’”[29]

[29] “Humboldt’s Cosmos,” p. 220.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ "Humboldt's Cosmos," p. 220.

[117]

[117]

The investigations which have been made, and the evidence which has been brought together, render it undeniable that the lower parts of the earth are on fire. Of the intensity of the combustion, no practical idea can be formed. It is fearful beyond comparison. The lava thrown out from a volcano in Mexico, “was so hot that it continued to smoke for twenty years; and after three years and a half, a piece of wood took fire in it, at a distance of five miles from the crater.” In various parts of the world, large islands have been thrown up from the sea, in a red-hot glowing condition, and so intensely heated, that after being forced through many fathoms of salt water, and standing in the midst of it, exposed to wind and rain for several months, they were not sufficiently cooled for persons to approach and stand upon them. “A notable fact is the force exerted in volcanic action, Cotopaxi, in 1738, threw its fiery rockets 3,000 feet above its crater, while in 1744 the blazing mass, struggling for an outlet, roared like a furnace, so that its awful voice was heard at a distance of more than six hundred miles. In 1797, the crater of Tunguragua, one of the great peaks of the Andes, flung out torrents of mud, which dammed up rivers, opened new lakes, and in valleys of a thousand feet wide made deposits six hundred feet deep. The[118] stream from Vesuvius which, in 1737, passed through Torre del Greco, contained thirty-three million cubic feet of solid matter; and, in 1794, when Torre del Greco was destroyed a second time, the mass of lava amounted to forty-five million cubic feet. In 1669 Etna poured forth a flood which covered 84 square miles of surface, and measured nearly 100,000,000 cubic feet. On this occasion the sand and scoriæ formed the Monte Rossi, near Nicolosi, a cone two miles in circumference, and four hundred and fifty feet high. The stream thrown out by Etna, in 1819, was in motion, at the rate of a yard per day, for nine months after the eruption; and it is on record that the lavas of the same mountain, after a terrible eruption, were not thoroughly cooled and consolidated ten years after the event. In the eruption of Vesuvius, A.D. 79, the scoriæ and ashes vomited forth far exceeded the entire bulk of the mountain; while, in 1660, Etna disgorged more than twenty times its own mass. * * * Vesuvius has thrown its ashes as far as Constantinople, Syria, and Egypt; it hurled stones eight pounds in weight to Pompeii, a distance of six miles; while similar masses were tossed up 2,000 feet above its summit. Cotopaxi has projected a block one hundred cubic yards in volume a distance of nine miles, while Sumbawa, in 1815, during the most terrible eruption[119] on record, sent its ashes as far as Java, a distance of three hundred miles. * * * In viewing these evidences of enormous power, we are forcibly struck with the similarity of action with which they have been associated; and, carrying our investigation a step further, the same similarity of the producing power is hinted at in the identity of the materials ejected. Thus, if we classify the characteristics of all recorded eruptions, we shall find that the phenomena are all reducible to upheavals of the earth, rumblings and explosions, ejections of carbonic acid, fiery torrents of lava, cinders, and mud, with accompanying thunder and lightning. The last-named phenomena are extrajudicial in character; they are merely the result of the atmospheric disturbance consequent on the escape of great heat from the earth, just as the burning of an American forest causes thunder and rain. The connection that apparently exists, too, between neighbouring craters is strongly confirmed by the fact that in every distinct volcanic locus but one crater is usually active at a time. Since Vesuvius has resumed his activity, the numerous volcanic vents on the other side of the bay have sunk into comparative inactivity; for ancient writers, who are silent respecting the former, speak of the mephitic vapours of the Lake Avernus as destructive to animal existence, and[120] in earlier days than these Homer pictures the Phlegrean Fields as the entrance to the infernal regions, placed at the limits of the habitable world, unenlightened by rising or setting sun, and enveloped in eternal gloom. * * * * The earth contains within it a mass of heated material; nay, it is a heated and incandescent body, habitable only because surrounded with a cool crust—the crust being to it a mere shell, within which the vast internal fires are securely inclosed: and yet not securely, perhaps, unless such vents existed as those to which we apply the term volcano. * * * * Every volcano is a safety-valve, ready to relieve the pressure from within when that pressure rises to a certain degree of intensity; or permanently serving for the escape of conflagrations, which, if not so provided with escape, might rend the habitable crust to pieces.”[30]

The investigations that have been conducted, and the evidence that has been collected, make it clear that the lower parts of the Earth are on fire. It's impossible to fully grasp the intensity of the combustion. It's terrifying. The lava ejected from a volcano in Mexico was so hot that it continued to smoke for twenty years; and after three and a half years, a piece of wood ignited in it, five miles from the crater. In various places around the world, large islands have emerged from the sea, glowing red-hot, and so intensely heated that even after being pushed through many fathoms of saltwater and exposed to wind and rain for several months, they weren't cool enough for people to approach and stand on them. A notable fact is the force exerted during volcanic activity: Cotopaxi in 1738 shot fiery projectiles 3,000 feet above its crater, while in 1744 the raging mass, fighting for an outlet, roared like a furnace, and its terrifying voice was heard over six hundred miles away. In 1797, the crater of Tungurahua, one of the great peaks of the Andes, expelled torrents of mud that blocked rivers, created new lakes, and deposited six hundred feet deep in valleys that were a thousand feet wide. The stream from Vesuvius that passed through Torre del Greco in 1737 contained thirty-three million cubic feet of solid material; and when Torre del Greco was destroyed again in 1794, the lava amount was forty-five million cubic feet. In 1669, Etna released a flood that covered 84 square miles and measured nearly 100,000,000 cubic feet. During this event, the sand and scoria formed the Monte Rossi, near Nicolosi, which is a cone two miles around and four hundred and fifty feet high. The stream ejected by Etna in 1819 moved at a rate of one yard per day for nine months after the eruption, and it's recorded that the lavas from that mountain took ten years to fully cool and solidify after a terrible eruption. During the eruption of Vesuvius in A.D. 79, the scoria and ashes expelled far exceeded the entire bulk of the mountain; and in 1660, Etna released more than twenty times its own mass. Vesuvius has scattered its ashes as far as Constantinople, Syria, and Egypt; it hurled stones weighing eight pounds to Pompeii, six miles away, while similar masses were ejected 2,000 feet above its peak. Cotopaxi has projected a block one hundred cubic yards in volume nine miles away, while Sumbawa, during the most terrifying eruption on record in 1815, sent its ashes as far as Java, a distance of three hundred miles. In reviewing these signs of immense power, we're struck by the similarities in their activity; and taking our investigation a step further, the same similarities in the causing power are suggested by the identity of the materials released. If we classify the features of all documented eruptions, we find that the phenomena are all rooted in upheavals of the earth, rumblings and explosions, ejections of carbon dioxide, fiery streams of lava, cinders, and mud, along with thunder and lightning. The last mentioned phenomena are not essential; they're simply results of atmospheric disturbances caused by escaping heat from the earth, just like the burning of an American forest creates thunder and rain. The apparent connection between neighboring craters is strongly supported by the fact that usually only one crater is active at a time in any distinct volcanic area. Since Vesuvius has started erupting again, the various volcanic vents on the other side of the bay have become relatively inactive; ancient writers, who were silent about them, speak of the poisonous vapors of Lake Avernus as lethal to living creatures, and in earlier times, Homer described the Phlegraean Fields as the entrance to the underworld, located at the edge of the habitable world, shrouded in eternal darkness, without the light of the rising or setting sun. The earth contains a mass of heated material; in fact, it is a heated and incandescent body, capable of supporting life only because it is encased in a cool crust—the crust being merely a shell that securely contains the vast internal fires. Yet, it's perhaps not secure unless there are vents like those we call volcanoes. Every volcano acts as a safety valve, ready to relieve internal pressure when it rises to a certain level; or it serves as a continuous way for the escape of fires that, if not managed, could tear the habitable crust apart.

[30] Recreative Science, p.p. 257 to 260.

[30] Recreative Science, pp. 257 to 260.

Thus it is certain, from the phenomena of earthquakes, submarine and inland volcanoes which exist in every part of the earth from the frozen to the tropical regions, hot and boiling springs, fountains of mud and steam, lakes of burning sulphur, jets and blasts of destructive gases, and the choke and fire damps of our coal mines, that at a few miles only below the surface of the earth there exists a vast region of combustion,[121] the intensity and power of which are indescribable, and cannot be compared with anything within the range of human experience.

Thus, it is clear from the occurrences of earthquakes, underwater and land-based volcanoes found all over the planet—from the icy regions to the tropics, hot and boiling springs, mud and steam fountains, lakes of burning sulfur, jets and blasts of harmful gases, as well as the choke and fire damp found in our coal mines—that just a few miles below the earth's surface, there is a vast area of combustion,[121] the intensity and power of which are beyond description and cannot be compared to anything within human experience.

As the earth is an extended plane resting in and upon the waters of the “great deep” it may fitly be compared to a large vessel or ship floating at anchor, with her “Hold” or lower compartments beneath the water-line filled with burning materials; and, from our knowledge of the nature and action of fire, it is difficult to understand in what way the combustion can be prevented from extending, when it is known to be surrounded with highly inflammable substances. Wherever a fire is surrounded with heterogeneous materials—some highly combustible and others partially and indirectly combustible—it is not possible for it to remain continually in the same condition nor to diminish in extent and intensity, it must increase and extend itself. That the fire in the earth is so surrounded with inflammable materials is matter of certainty; the millions of tons of coals, peat, turf, mineral oils, rock tar, pitch, asphalte, bitumen, petroleum, mineral naphtha, and numerous other hydro-carbons which exist in various parts of the earth, and much of these far down below the surface, prove this condition to exist. The products of volcanic action being chiefly carbon in combination with hydrogen[122] and oxygen, prove also that these carbon compounds already exist in a state of combustion, and that as such immense quantities of the same fuel still exist, it is quite within the range of possibility that some of the lower strata of combustible matter may take fire and the action rapidly extend itself through the various and innumerable veins which ramify in every direction throughout the whole earth. Should such an action commence, knowing, as we do, that the rocks and minerals of the earth are but oxides of inflammable bases, and that the affinities of these bases are greatly weakened and almost suspended in the presence of highly heated carbon, we see clearly that such chemical action or fire would quickly extend and increase in intensity until the whole earth with everything entering into its composition, would rapidly decompose, volatilise, and burst into one vast indescribable, annihilating conflagration!

As the earth is a large flat surface resting on the waters of the "great deep," it can be likened to a big ship floating at anchor, with its lower compartments under the waterline filled with burning materials. Based on what we know about fire, it's hard to understand how the combustion can be stopped when it's surrounded by highly flammable substances. Whenever a fire is surrounded by different materials—some very combustible and others somewhat combustible—it can't stay the same or diminish; it will have to grow and spread. The fact that there are so many flammable materials surrounding the fire in the earth is certain; the millions of tons of coal, peat, turf, mineral oils, rock tar, pitch, asphalt, bitumen, petroleum, mineral naphtha, and various other hydrocarbons found in different parts of the earth, much of it deep underground, confirm this situation. The products of volcanic activity, primarily carbon combined with hydrogen and oxygen, also indicate that these carbon compounds are already in a state of combustion. Given the vast amounts of fuel that still exist, it's quite possible that some of the lower layers of combustible materials could catch fire, and the action could rapidly spread through the countless veins that branch out in all directions throughout the earth. If such an event were to occur, knowing that the rocks and minerals of the earth are mainly oxides of flammable bases and that the affinities of these bases are significantly weakened or nearly neutralized in the presence of highly heated carbon, it's clear that such a chemical reaction or fire would quickly spread and increase in intensity until the entire earth, along with everything in it, would rapidly decompose, volatilize, and erupt into one massive, indescribable, annihilating blaze!


[123]

[123]

SECTION 12.
Miscellaneous.

Moon’s Phases.—It has been shown that the Moon is not a reflector of the Sun’s light, but is self-luminous. That the luminosity is confined to one-half its surface is sufficiently shown by the fact that at “New Moon” the whole circle or outline of the Moon is often distinctly visible; but the darker outline is less, or the circle is smaller than the segment which is illuminated. From this it is easily seen that “New Moon,” “Full Moon,” and “Gibbous Moon” are but the different proportions of the illuminated surface which are presented to the observer on earth.

Moon Phases.—It has been proven that the Moon doesn’t just reflect the Sun’s light but actually generates its own light. The fact that this light only covers half of its surface is clearly illustrated by how, during a “New Moon,” the entire shape of the Moon is often clearly visible; however, the darker outline is smaller than the lit part. From this, it’s easy to understand that “New Moon,” “Full Moon,” and “Gibbous Moon” are simply the different amounts of illuminated surface that we see from Earth.

Moon’s Appearance.—Astronomers have indulged their imagination to such a degree that the Moon has been considered to be a solid, opaque, spherical world, having mountains, valleys, lakes, volcanic craters, and other conditions analogous to the surface of the earth. So far has this fancy been carried, that the whole visible disc has been mapped out, and special names given to its various peculiarities, as[124] though they had been carefully observed and measured by a party of terrestrial ordnance surveyors. All this has been done in direct opposition to the fact that whoever looks, without previous bias, through a powerful telescope at the Moon’s surface, will be puzzled to say what it is really like, or how to compare it with anything known. The comparison which may be made, will depend greatly upon the state of mind of the observer. It is well known that persons looking at the rough bark of a tree, or at the irregular lines or veins in certain kinds of marble and stone, or gazing at the red embers in a dull fire, will, according to the degree of activity of the imagination, be able to see different forms, even the outlines of animals and human faces. It is in this way that persons may fancy that the Moon’s surface is broken up into hills and valleys and other arrangements such as are found on earth. But that anything really similar to the surface of our own world is anywhere visible upon the Moon is altogether fallacious. This is admitted by some of those who have written upon the subject “Some persons when they look into a telescope for the first time, having heard that mountains are to be seen, and discovering nothing but these (previously described) unmeaning figures, break off in[125] disappointment, and have their faith in these things rather diminished than increased. I would advise, therefore, before the student takes even his first view of the Moon through a telescope, to form as clear an idea as he can how mountains, and valleys, and caverns situated at such a distance ought to look, and by what marks they may be recognised. Let him seize, if possible, the most favourable periods (about the time of the first quarter), and previously learn from drawings and explanations how to interpret everything he sees.”[31] “Whenever we exhibit celestial objects to inexperienced observers it is usual to precede the view with good drawings of the objects, accompanied by an explanation of what each appearance exhibited in the telescope indicates. The novice is told that mountains and valleys can be seen in the Moon by the aid of the telescope; but on looking he sees a confused mass of light and shade, and nothing which looks to him like either mountains or valleys! Had his attention been previously directed to a plain drawing of the Moon, and each particular appearance interpreted to him, he would then have looked through the telescope with intelligence and satisfaction!”[32] Thus it is[126] admitted by those who teach that the Moon is a spherical world, having hills and dales like the earth, can only see such things in imagination. “Nothing but unmeaning figures” are really visible, and “the students break off in disappointment, and have their faith in such things rather diminished than increased,” “until they previously learn from drawings and explanations how to interpret everything seen.” But who first made the drawings? Who first interpreted the “unmeaning figures” and the “confused mass of light and shade?” Who first declared them to indicate mountains and valleys, and ventured to make drawings and give explanations and interpretations for the purpose of biasing the minds, and fixing or guiding the imaginations of subsequent observers? Whoever they were, they at least had “given the reins to Fancy,” and afterwards took upon themselves to dogmatise and teach their crude and unwarranted imaginings to succeeding investigators. And this is the kind of evidence and “reasoning” which is obtruded in our seats of learning, and spread out in the numerous works which are published for the edification of society!

Moon's Look.—Astronomers have let their imaginations run wild, considering the Moon to be a solid, opaque, spherical planet with mountains, valleys, lakes, volcanic craters, and other features similar to Earth's surface. This fascination has gone so far that the entire visible disc has been mapped, with special names assigned to its various features, as if carefully recorded and measured by a group of Earth surveyors. All this has been done in direct contradiction to the fact that anyone looking through a powerful telescope at the Moon's surface without any prior bias will find it hard to say what it truly resembles or how to compare it to anything familiar. Any comparison made will depend heavily on the observer's state of mind. It is well known that people looking at the rough bark of a tree, the irregular lines or veins in certain types of marble and stone, or at the red embers in a dull fire will, depending on how vivid their imagination is, see different shapes, even outlines of animals and human faces. In this way, some may imagine that the Moon's surface is broken into hills and valleys and other configurations like those found on Earth. However, the idea that anything truly resembling our own world is visible on the Moon is entirely misleading. Some writers on the topic acknowledge this: “Some people looking into a telescope for the first time, having heard that mountains can be seen, find nothing but these (previously described) meaningless shapes and become disappointed, leading to a decrease rather than an increase in their belief in such things. Therefore, I suggest that before a student takes even their first view of the Moon through a telescope, they should have a clear idea of how mountains, valleys, and caverns at such a distance ought to look and what marks can help them recognize these features. They should seize, if possible, the most favorable times (around the first quarter) and beforehand learn from drawings and explanations how to interpret what they see.”[31] “Whenever we show celestial objects to inexperienced observers, it is common to start with good drawings of the objects, along with an explanation of what each appearance seen through the telescope indicates. The novice is told that mountains and valleys can be seen on the Moon with a telescope; but upon looking, they see a confusing blend of light and shadow, with nothing that looks like either mountains or valleys! If their attention had been directed to a clear drawing of the Moon, with each specific feature explained to them, they would have approached the telescope with understanding and satisfaction!”[32] Thus it is[126] acknowledged by instructors that those who claim the Moon is a spherical world with hills and valleys like Earth can only perceive such things in their imagination. “Nothing but meaningless shapes” are truly visible, and “students feel disappointed and have their belief in such things rather diminished than increased,” “until they learn from drawings and explanations how to interpret everything they see.” But who first created the drawings? Who first interpreted the “meaningless shapes” and the “confusing blend of light and shadow?” Who was it that initially claimed they represented mountains and valleys and dared to produce drawings and provide explanations and interpretations aimed at influencing the thoughts and guiding the imaginations of future observers? Whoever they were, they certainly “let their imagination run wild,” and then took it upon themselves to assert and teach their crude and unfounded ideas to those who came after. And this is the type of evidence and “reasoning” that is pushed in our educational institutions and spread through the many works published for society's enlightenment!

[31] “Mechanism of the Heavens,” by Denison Olmsted, LL.D., Professor of Natural Philosophy and Astronomy in Gale College, U.S.

[31] “Mechanism of the Heavens,” by Denison Olmsted, LL.D., Professor of Natural Philosophy and Astronomy at Gale College, U.S.

[32] Mitchell’s “Orbs of Heaven,” p. 232.

[32] Mitchell’s “Orbs of Heaven,” p. 232.

The Planet Neptune.—For some years the advocates of the earth’s rotundity, and of the Newtonian philosophy generally, were accustomed to refer with an air of pride and triumph[127] to the discovery of a new planet, which was called Neptune, as an undeniable evidence of the truth of their system or theory. The existence of this luminary was said to have been predicated from calculation only, and for a considerable period before it had been seen by the telescope. It was urged that therefore the system which would permit of such a discovery must be true. But the whole matter subsequently proved to be unsatisfactory. That a proper conception may be formed of the actual value of the calculations and their supposed verification, the following account will be useful. “In the year 1781, on March 13, Uranus was discovered by Sir William Herschel, who was examining some small stars near the feet of Gemini; and he observed one of them to have a sensible amount of diameter and less brightness than the others, and it was soon found to be a planet. It, however, had been seen before—first, by Flamstead, on December 23rd, 1690; and between this time and 1781 it had been observed 16 times by Flamstead, Bradley, Mayer, and Lemonnier; these astronomers had classed it as a star of the sixth magnitude. Between 1781 and 1820 it was of course very frequently observed; and it was hoped that at the latter time sufficient data existed to construct accurate tables of its motions. This task was undertaken[128] by M. Bouvard, Member de L’Academie des Sciences, but he met with unforeseen difficulties. It was found utterly impossible to construct tables which would represent the 17 ancient observations, and at the same time the more numerous modern ones; and it was finally concluded that the ancient observations were erroneous, or that some strange and unknown action disturbed, or had disturbed, the planet; consequently M. Bouvard discarded entirely the old observations, and used only those taken between 1781 and 1820, in constructing the tables of Uranus. For some years past it has been found that the tables thus constructed do not agree any better with modern observations, than they do with the ancient observations; consequently it was evident that the planet was under the influence of some unknown cause. Several hypotheses have been suggested as to the nature of this cause; some persons talked of a resisting medium; others of a great satellite which might accompany Uranus; some even went so far as to suppose that the vast distance Uranus is from the Sun caused the law of gravitation to lose some of its force; others thought that the rapid flight of a comet had disturbed its regular movements; others thought of the existence of a planet beyond Uranus, whose disturbing force caused the anomalous[129] motions of the planet; but no one did otherwise than follow the bent of his inclination, and did not support his assertion by any positive considerations.

Neptune Planet.—For several years, supporters of the earth's roundness and the Newtonian theory proudly pointed to the discovery of a new planet named Neptune as clear evidence that their ideas were correct. They claimed that this celestial body was predicted purely through calculations long before anyone observed it through a telescope. They argued that a system capable of making such a prediction must be valid. However, the situation ultimately proved to be unsatisfactory. To understand the real value of the calculations and their supposed confirmation, the following account will be helpful. “In 1781, on March 13, Sir William Herschel discovered Uranus while he was examining some faint stars near the feet of Gemini; he noticed one of them had a noticeable diameter and was dimmer than the others, and it was soon identified as a planet. However, it had been seen before—first by Flamstead on December 23, 1690; between that time and 1781, it had been observed 16 times by Flamstead, Bradley, Mayer, and Lemonnier, who classified it as a sixth-magnitude star. Between 1781 and 1820, it was, of course, frequently observed, and it was hoped that by the latter date, there would be enough data to create accurate tables of its movements. This task was taken on by M. Bouvard, Member de L’Academie des Sciences, but he faced unexpected challenges. It turned out to be impossible to create tables that would represent both the 17 ancient observations and the more numerous modern ones, leading to the conclusion that the ancient observations were incorrect, or that some unusual and unknown force was affecting the planet; consequently, M. Bouvard completely discarded the old observations and used only those recorded between 1781 and 1820 to create the tables for Uranus. In recent years, it’s been found that the tables produced in this way do not match modern observations any better than they match the ancient ones; thus, it was clear that the planet was influenced by some unknown factor. Several theories have been proposed regarding this factor; some people suggested a resisting medium, others a large satellite accompanying Uranus; some even speculated that the great distance of Uranus from the Sun weakened the force of gravity; others thought that the quick passage of a comet disturbed its regular movements; others considered the existence of a planet beyond Uranus, whose gravitational influence caused the unusual [129] motion of the planet; but no one provided solid evidence for their claims, merely following their own inclinations.

“Thus was the theory of Uranus surrounded with difficulties, when M. Le Verrier, an eminent French mathematician, undertook to investigate the irregularities in its motions. His first paper appeared on the 10th November, 1845, and his second on June 1, 1846 (published in the Comptes Rendûs). In this second paper, after a most elaborate and careful investigation, he proves the utter incompatibility of any of the preceding hypotheses to account for the planet’s motions, except only that of the last one, viz., that of a new planet. He then successively proves that this planet cannot be situated either between the Sun and Saturn, or between Saturn and Uranus; but that it must be beyond Uranus. And in this paper he asks the following questions:—‘Is it possible that the irregularities of Uranus can be owing to the action of a planet situated in the ecliptic, at a distance of twice the mean distance of Uranus from the Sun? If so, where is it actually situated? What is its mass? What are the elements of the orbit it describes?”

“Thus, the theory of Uranus faced challenges when M. Le Verrier, a distinguished French mathematician, decided to explore the irregularities in its motions. His first paper was published on November 10, 1845, and his second on June 1, 1846 (published in the Comptes Rendus). In this second paper, after a thorough and detailed investigation, he demonstrates the complete incompatibility of any previous hypotheses to explain the planet’s movements, except for the most recent one, which suggests the existence of a new planet. He then goes on to prove that this planet cannot be located between the Sun and Saturn or between Saturn and Uranus; rather, it must be beyond Uranus. In this paper, he poses the following questions:—‘Is it possible that the irregularities of Uranus are due to the influence of a planet located in the ecliptic, at a distance twice that of Uranus from the Sun? If so, where is it actually located? What is its mass? What are the elements of the orbit it follows?’”

This was the problem he set himself to work upon, by the means of solving the inverse problem of the perturbations; for instead of[130] having to measure the action of a determined planet, he had to deduce the elements of the orbit of the disturbing planet, and its place in the heavens from the recognised inequalities of Uranus. And this problem M. Le Verrier has successfully solved. In his second paper he deduces the place in the heavens that the body must be as 325° of helio-centric longitude. On the 31st August last he published his third paper. In this he has calculated that the period of the planet is 217 years; and that it moves in an orbit at the distance of more than 3,000 millions of miles from the Sun; that its mean longitude on January 1st, 1847, will be 318° 17′; its true longitude 326° 32′; and that the longitude of its perihelion will be 284° 45′; that it will appear to have a diameter of 3¹⁄₄ seconds of arc as seen from the earth; and that it is now about 5° E. of Delta Capricorni.

This was the problem he focused on, by solving the inverse problem of the perturbations; instead of measuring the effect of a specific planet, he had to figure out the orbit of the disturbing planet and its position in the sky based on the recognized inconsistencies of Uranus. And M. Le Verrier successfully solved this problem. In his second paper, he calculated the position in the sky that the body must be at 325° of heliocentric longitude. On August 31st, he published his third paper. In this one, he calculated that the planet has a period of 217 years and that it orbits at a distance of over 3 billion miles from the Sun; its mean longitude on January 1st, 1847, will be 318° 17′; its true longitude 326° 32′; and the longitude of its perihelion will be 284° 45′; it will appear to have a diameter of 3¹⁄₄ seconds of arc as viewed from Earth; and it is currently about 5° east of Delta Capricorni.

“These remarkable calculations have pointed out a position which has very nearly proved to be the true one.

“These remarkable calculations have highlighted a position that has almost been confirmed as the true one.”

“On September 23, Dr. Galle at Berlin discovered a star of the eighth magnitude, which has proved to be the planet. Its place at the time was five degrees from Delta Capricorni. It was found to have a disc of 3 seconds as predicted; and its longitude at the time differs less than a degree from the longitude computed[131] from the above elements. Its daily motion, too, is found to agree very closely with the predicted; and, judging from this last circumstance, the planet’s distance, as stated above, must be nearly the truth.

“On September 23, Dr. Galle in Berlin discovered a star of the eighth magnitude, which turned out to be a planet. At that time, it was located five degrees from Delta Capricorni. It had a disc of 3 seconds as expected; and its longitude at the time differed by less than a degree from the longitude calculated[131] from the elements mentioned above. Its daily motion also closely matched the predictions; and based on this last observation, the planet’s distance, as stated earlier, must be quite accurate.”

“Thus the result of these calculations was the discovery of a new planet in the place assigned to it by theory, whose mass, distance, position in the heavens, and orbit it describes round the Sun, were all approximately determined before the planet had ever been seen; and all agrees with observations, so far as can at present be determined. It is found to have a disc, and its diameter cannot be much less than 40,000 miles, and may be more; its motions are very slow; it is at present in the constellation of Aquarius as indicated by theory; and it will be in the constellation of Capricornus all the year 1847. It may be readily seen in a telescope of moderate power.

“Thus, the result of these calculations was the discovery of a new planet in the location predicted by theory, whose mass, distance, position in the sky, and orbit around the Sun were all roughly determined before the planet had ever been observed; and everything aligns with observations, as far as we can currently determine. It has been found to have a disk, and its diameter can't be much less than 40,000 miles, and might be more; its movements are very slow; it's currently in the constellation of Aquarius as theorized; and it will be in the constellation of Capricorn all of 1847. It can be easily seen through a telescope of moderate power.”

“Whatever view we take of this noble discovery it is most gratifying, whether at the addition of another planet to our list; whether at the proving the correctness of the theory of universal gravitation; or in what view soever, it must be considered as a splendid discovery, and the merit is chiefly due to theoretical astronomy. This discovery is perhaps the greatest triumph[132] of astronomical science that has ever been recorded.”[33]

"Whatever perspective we have on this amazing discovery, it’s incredibly satisfying, whether it’s adding another planet to our list, confirming the correctness of the theory of universal gravitation, or however you look at it, it should be seen as a remarkable achievement, and the credit primarily goes to theoretical astronomy. This discovery is possibly the greatest triumph[132] of astronomical science that has ever been documented."[33]

[33] “Illustrated London Almanack for 1847.”

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ "Illustrated London Almanack 1847."

If such things as criticism, experience, and comparative observation did not exist, the tone of exultation in which the above article indulges might be properly shared in by the astronomical student; but let the following extracts be carefully read, and it will be seen that such a tone was premature and unwarranted. “Paris, Sept. 15, 1848. The only sittings of the Academy of late in which there was anything worth recording, and even this was not of a practical character, were those of the 29th ult. and the 11th inst. On the former day M. Babinet made a communication respecting the planet Neptune, which has been generally called M. Le Verrier’s planet, the discovery of it having, as it was said, been made by him from theoretical deductions, which astonished and delighted the scientific public. What M. Le Verrier had inferred from the action on other planets of some body which ought to exist was verified, at least so it was thought at the time, by actual vision. Neptune was actually seen by other astronomers, and the honour of the theorist obtained additional luster. But it appears from a communication of M. Babinet that this is not the planet of M. Le Verrier. He had placed his planet at a distance[133] from the Sun equal to thirty-six times the limit of the terrestrial orbit; Neptune revolves at a distance equal to thirty times of these limits, which makes a difference of nearly two hundred millions of leagues! M. Le Verrier had assigned to his planet a body equal to thirty-eight times that of the earth; Neptune has only one third of this volume! M. Le Verrier had stated the revolutions of his planet round the Sun to take place in two hundred and seventeen years; Neptune performs its revolutions in one hundred and sixty-six years! Thus then Neptune is not M. Le Verrier’s planet; and all his theory as regards that planet falls to the ground! M. Le Verrier may find another planet, but it will not answer the calculations which he had made for Neptune. In the sitting of the 14th, M. Le Verrier noticed the communication of M. Babinet, and to a great extent admitted his own error! He complained indeed that much of what he said was taken in too absolute a sense; but he evinces much more candour than might have been expected from a disappointed explorer. M. Le Verrier may console himself with the reflection that if he has not been so successful as he thought he had been, others might have been equally unsuccessful, and as he has still before him an immense field for the exercise of observation and calculation, we[134] may hope that he will soon make some discovery which will remove the vexation of his present disappointment.”[34]

If there weren't things like criticism, experience, and comparisons, the excitement in the article above could be felt by the astronomy student. But if you read the following excerpts carefully, you'll see that such excitement was premature and unjustified. “Paris, Sept. 15, 1848. Recently, the only meetings of the Academy that were worth noting, though even these weren't particularly practical, were on the 29th of last month and the 11th of this month. On the former date, M. Babinet talked about the planet Neptune, which has often been called M. Le Verrier’s planet because, as it was said, he discovered it through theoretical deductions that amazed and thrilled the scientific community. What M. Le Verrier inferred from the effect on other planets of a body that should exist was confirmed, or so it seemed at the time, by actual observations. Neptune was indeed seen by other astronomers, giving the theorist’s reputation an extra boost. However, M. Babinet later communicated that this is not the planet of M. Le Verrier. He had placed his planet at a distance from the Sun equal to thirty-six times the Earth’s orbit; Neptune orbits at a distance equal to thirty times these limits, which results in a difference of nearly two hundred million leagues! M. Le Verrier estimated his planet's mass to be thirty-eight times that of Earth; Neptune has only one third of that volume! M. Le Verrier predicted that his planet would take two hundred seventeen years to orbit the Sun; Neptune completes its orbit in one hundred sixty-six years! Therefore, Neptune is not M. Le Verrier’s planet, and all his theories about that planet collapse! M. Le Verrier might find another planet, but it won't align with the calculations he made for Neptune. During the meeting on the 14th, M. Le Verrier acknowledged M. Babinet's communication and largely admitted his own error! He did express that much of what he said was taken too absolutely, but he shows much more honesty than one might expect from a disappointed discoverer. M. Le Verrier might comfort himself with the thought that while he may not have been as successful as he believed, others might also have had similar disappointments. With a vast area still available for observation and calculations, we[134] hope he will soon make a discovery that alleviates the frustration of his present discontent.”[34]

[34] “Times” Newspaper, Monday, Sept. 18, 1848.

[34] “Times” Newspaper, Monday, Sept. 18, 1848.

“As the data of Le Verrier and Adams stand at present there is a discrepancy between the predicted and the true distance; and in some other elements of the planet. It remains, therefore, for these or future astronomers to reconcile theory with fact; or, perhaps, as in the case of Uranus, to make the new planet the means of leading to yet greater discoveries. It would appear, from the most recent observations, that the mass of Neptune, instead of being as at first stated one nine thousand three hundredth is only one twenty three thousandth that of the Sun; whilst its periodic time is now given with a greater probability at 166 years; and its mean distance from the Sun nearly thirty. Le Verrier gave the mean distance from the Sun thirty-six times that of the Earth; and the period of revolution 217 years.[35]

“As the data from Le Verrier and Adams currently show, there is a difference between the predicted and actual distance, as well as in some other characteristics of the planet. Therefore, it is up to these or future astronomers to align theory with fact; or, perhaps, similar to what happened with Uranus, to use this new planet as a way to uncover even greater discoveries. Recent observations suggest that Neptune's mass, instead of being previously stated as one out of nine thousand three hundred, is actually one out of twenty-three thousand of the Sun's mass; while its orbital period is now estimated with greater certainty at 166 years, and its average distance from the Sun is nearly thirty. Le Verrier originally stated the mean distance from the Sun as thirty-six times that of Earth, and the orbital period as 217 years.[35]

[35] “Cosmos,” by Humboldt, p. 75.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ "Cosmos," by Humboldt, p. 75.

“May 14, 1847. A Paper was read before the Royal Astronomical Society, by Professor Schumacher, ‘on the identity of the planet Neptune (M. Le Verrier’s) with a star observed by M. Lalande in May, 1795.’”[36]

“May 14, 1847. A paper was presented to the Royal Astronomical Society by Professor Schumacher, discussing ‘the identification of the planet Neptune (M. Le Verrier’s) with a star that M. Lalande observed in May 1795.’”[36]

[36] “Report of Royal Astronomical Society,” for Feb. 11, 1848, No. 4, vol. 8.

[36] “Report of the Royal Astronomical Society,” for Feb. 11, 1848, No. 4, vol. 8.

[135]

[135]

Such mistakes as the above ought at least to make the advocates of the Newtonian theory less positive, and more ready to acknowledge that at best their system is but hypothetical and must sooner or later give place to a philosophy the premises of which are demonstrable, and which is in all its details sequent and consistent.

Such mistakes like the ones mentioned above should at least make the supporters of the Newtonian theory less certain and more willing to admit that, at best, their system is merely hypothetical and will eventually be replaced by a philosophy whose foundations are provable and which is coherent and consistent in all its details.

PENDULUM EXPERIMENTS AS PROOFS OF EARTH’S MOTION.

In the early part of the year 1851, the scientific journals and nearly all the newspapers published in Great Britain and on the Continents of Europe and America were occupied in recording and discussing certain experiments with the pendulum, first made by M. Foucault, of Paris; and the public were startled by the announcement that the results furnished a practical proof of the Earth’s rotation.

In early 1851, scientific journals and almost all newspapers in Great Britain and across Europe and America were focused on recording and discussing experiments with the pendulum initially conducted by M. Foucault from Paris. The public was amazed by the announcement that the results provided practical evidence of the Earth's rotation.

The subject was referred to in the Literary Gazette, in the following words:—“Everybody knows what is meant by a pendulum in its simplest form, a weight hanging by a thread to a fixed point. Such was the pendulum experimented upon long ago by Galileo, who discovered the well-known law of isochronous vibrations, applicable to the same. The subject has since[136] received a thorough examination, as well theoretical as practical, from mathematicians and mechanicians; and yet, strange to say, the most remarkable feature of the phenomenon has remained unobserved and wholly unsuspected until within the last few weeks, when a young and promising French physicist, M. Foucault, who was induced by certain reflections to repeat Galileo’s experiments in the cellar of his mother’s house at Paris, succeeded in establishing the existence of a fact connected with it which gives an immediate and visible demonstration of the Earth’s rotation. Suppose the pendulum already described to be set moving in a vertical plane from north to south, the plane in which it vibrates, to ordinary observation, would appear to be stationary. M. Foucault, however, has succeeded in showing that this is not the case, but that the plane is itself slowly moving round the fixed point as a centre in a direction contrary to the Earth’s rotation, i.e., with the apparent heavens, from east to west. His experiments have since been repeated in the hall of the observatory, under the superintendence of M. Arago, and fully confirmed. If a pointer be attached to the weight of a pendulum suspended by a long and fine wire, capable of turning round in all directions, and nearly in contact with the floor of a room, the line which this[137] pointer appears to trace on the ground, and which may easily be followed by a chalk mark, will be found to be slowly, but visibly, and constantly moving round, like the hand of a watch dial; and the least consideration will show that this ought to be the case, and will excite astonishment that so simple a consequence as this is, of the most elementary laws of Geometry and Mechanics, should so long have remained unobserved. * * * The subject has created a great sensation in the mathematical and physical circles of Paris. It is proposed to obtain permission from the Government to carry on further observations by means of a pendulum suspended from the dome of the Pantheon, length of suspension being a desideratum in order to make the result visible on a larger scale, and secure greater constancy and duration in the experiment. The time required for the performance of a complete revolution of the plane of vibration would be about 32 hours 8 minutes for the parallel of Paris; 30 hours 40 minutes for that of London; and at 30 degrees from the equator exactly 48 hours. Certainly any one who should have proposed not many weeks back to prove the rotation of the Earth upon which we stand by means of direct experiment made upon its surface would have run the risk, with the mob of gentlemen who write upon mechanics, of being[138] thought as mad as if he were to have proposed reviving Bishop Wilkins’s notable plan for going to the North American colonies in a few hours, by rising in a balloon from the Earth and gently floating in the air until the Earth, in its diurnal rotation, have turned the desired quarter towards the suspended æronaut, whereupon as gently to descend; so necessary and wholesome is it occasionally to reconsider the apparently simplest and best established conclusions of science.”

The topic was mentioned in the Literary Gazette in the following way:—“Everyone understands a pendulum in its most basic form—a weight hanging from a fixed point by a thread. This is the type of pendulum that Galileo experimented with long ago, and he discovered the well-known law of isochronous vibrations associated with it. Since then, this topic has been thoroughly explored, both theoretically and practically, by mathematicians and engineers. Yet, surprisingly, the most notable aspect of the phenomenon went unnoticed and completely unexamined until just a few weeks ago, when a young and talented French physicist, M. Foucault, inspired by some reflections, decided to repeat Galileo’s experiments in his mother’s cellar in Paris. He managed to establish a fact related to it that provides a direct and visible demonstration of the Earth's rotation. If we take the pendulum as described and set it swinging in a vertical plane from north to south, the plane in which it swings would seem stationary to an ordinary observer. However, M. Foucault showed that this is not true; instead, the plane slowly rotates around the fixed point as if it were a center, moving against the Earth’s rotation, i.e., in line with the apparent skies, from east to west. His experiments have since been duplicated in the observatory hall, overseen by M. Arago, and confirmed completely. If we attach a pointer to the weight of a pendulum suspended by a long, thin wire able to pivot in all directions and almost touching the floor, the path traced by this pointer on the ground—easily marked with chalk—will be observed to move slowly but visibly and constantly around, like the hand of a clock. A little thought will reveal why this occurs, and it’s astonishing that such a simple outcome of basic Geometry and Mechanics has gone unnoticed for so long. * * * This topic has generated a significant stir in the mathematical and scientific communities of Paris. There are plans to obtain permission from the Government to conduct further observations using a pendulum suspended from the dome of the Pantheon, as a longer suspension is needed to make the results more visible on a larger scale and to ensure greater stability and duration in the experiment. The time taken for a complete rotation of the vibration plane would be approximately 32 hours and 8 minutes for Paris, 30 hours and 40 minutes for London, and exactly 48 hours at 30 degrees from the equator. Certainly, anyone who had proposed, just a few weeks ago, to prove the Earth's rotation through direct experimentation on its surface would have risked being thought as crazy as someone suggesting reviving Bishop Wilkins’s famous plan for reaching North America in a few hours by rising in a balloon and quietly floating in the air until the Earth’s daily rotation turned the desired point towards the suspended balloonist, allowing for a gentle descent; such is the necessity of occasionally revisiting seemingly straightforward and well-established scientific conclusions.”

The following is from the Scotsman, which has always been distinguished for the accuracy of its scientific papers. The article bears the initials “C. M.,” which will at once be recognised as those of Mr. Charles Maclaren, for many years the accomplished editor of that journal:—“The beautiful experiment contrived by M. Foucault to demonstrate the rotation of the globe, has deservedly excited universal interest. * * * A desire has always been felt that some method could be devised of rendering this rotation palpable to the senses. Even the illustrious Laplace participated in this feeling and has left it on record. ‘Although,’ he says, ‘the rotation of the Earth is now established with all the certainty which the physical sciences require, still a direct proof of that phenomenon ought to interest both geometricians and astronomers.’ No man ever knew the laws of the planetary[139] motions better than Laplace, and before penning such a sentence, it is probable that he had turned the subject in his mind, and without discovering any process by which the object could be attained; but it does not follow that if he had applied the whole force of his genius to the task, he would not have succeeded. Be this as it may, here we have the problem solved by a man not probably possessing a tithe of his science or talent; and, what is very remarkable, after the discovery was made, it was found to be legitimately deducible from mathematical principles. * * * In this, as in many other cases, the fact comes first, and takes us by surprise; after which we find that we had long been in possession of the principles from which it flowed, and that, with the clue we had in our hands, theory should have revealed the fact to us long before. M. Foucault’s communication describing his experiments is in the Comptes Rendus of the Academy of Sciences, for 3rd February, 1851. His first experiments were made with a pendulum only two metres (6ft. 6¹⁄₄in.) in length, consisting of a steel wire from ⁶⁄₁₀ths to ¹¹⁄₁₀ths of a millimetre in diameter (the millimetre is the 25th part of an inch); to the lower end of which was attached a polished brass ball, weighing 5 kilogrammes, or 11 English pounds. * * * A metallic[140] point projecting below the ball, and so directed as if it formed a continuation of the suspension wire, served as an index to mark the change of position more precisely. The pendulum hung from a steel plate in such a manner as to move freely in any vertical plane. To start the oscillatory movement without giving the ball any bias, it was drawn to one side with a cord, which held the ball by a loop; the cord was then burned, after which the loop fell off, and the vibrations (generally limited to an arc of 15 or 20 degrees) commenced. In one minute the ball had sensibly deviated from the original plane of vibration towards the observer’s left. Afterwards he experimented at the Observatory with a pendulum 11 metres (30 feet) long, and latterly at the Pantheon with one still longer. The advantage of a large pendulum, as compared with a small one, is, that a longer time elapses before it comes to a state of rest; for machinery cannot be employed here, as in a clock, to continue the motion. The pendulum is suspended over the centre of a circular table, whose circumference is divided into degrees and minutes. The vibrations are begun in the manner above described, and in a short time it is observed that the pendulum, instead of returning to the same point of the circle from which it started, has shifted to the left. If[141] narrowly observed, the change in the plane of vibration (says M. Foucault) is perceptible in one minute, and in half an hour, “Il saute aux yeux,” it is quite palpable. At Paris the change exceeds 11 degrees in an hour. Thus, supposing the oscillations to commence in a plane directed south and north, in two hours the oscillations will point SSW. and NNE.; in four hours they will point SW. and NE.; and in eight hours the oscillations will point due east and west, or at right angles to their original direction. To a spectator the change seems to be in the pendulum, which, without any visible cause, has shifted round a quarter of a circle; but the real change is in the table, which, resting on the Earth, and accompanying it in its rotation, has performed a fourth (and something more) of its diurnal revolution.

The following is from the Scotsman, which has always been known for the accuracy of its scientific articles. The article is authored by “C. M.,” recognized as Mr. Charles Maclaren, who was the skilled editor of that journal for many years:—“The remarkable experiment designed by M. Foucault to show the rotation of the Earth has rightfully captured widespread interest. * * * There has always been a wish to find a way to make this rotation tangible to our senses. Even the renowned Laplace shared this sentiment and documented it. ‘Although,’ he states, ‘the rotation of the Earth is now established with all the certainty that physical sciences require, a direct proof of this phenomenon should interest both mathematicians and astronomers.’ No one understood the laws of planetary motion better than Laplace, and before writing such a sentence, he likely reflected on the topic without finding a method to achieve it. However, that doesn’t mean he wouldn’t have succeeded if he had fully applied his genius to the task. Regardless, we now have this problem solved by someone who probably lacks a fraction of his scientific knowledge or talent; and what's particularly noteworthy is that after the discovery was made, it was found to be logically derivable from mathematical principles. * * * In this instance, as in many others, the fact comes first, surprising us; afterward, we realize that we had long possessed the principles from which it emerged and that, with the clues we had, theory should have revealed the fact to us much sooner. M. Foucault’s report detailing his experiments appears in the Comptes Rendus of the Academy of Sciences, dated February 3, 1851. His initial experiments used a pendulum just two meters (6 ft. 6¼ in.) long, made from a steel wire measuring between ⁶⁄₁₀ths and ¹¹⁄₁₀ths of a millimeter in diameter (the millimeter is the 25th part of an inch); at the lower end, there was a polished brass ball weighing 5 kilograms, or 11 English pounds. * * * A metallic point extending below the ball, aligned to appear as a continuation of the suspension wire, served as an index to mark the change in position more accurately. The pendulum was suspended from a steel plate to move freely in any vertical plane. To initiate the oscillatory movement without giving the ball any bias, it was pulled to one side with a cord that held the ball by a loop; the cord was then burned, causing the loop to fall off, and the vibrations (usually limited to an arc of 15 or 20 degrees) began. In one minute, the ball noticeably deviated from the original plane of vibration toward the observer’s left. Later, he experimented at the Observatory with an 11-meter (30 feet) long pendulum, and eventually at the Pantheon with an even longer one. The benefit of a larger pendulum, compared to a smaller one, is that it takes a longer time to come to a stop; machinery can’t be used here, unlike in a clock, to maintain the motion. The pendulum is suspended above the center of a circular table whose circumference is marked in degrees and minutes. The vibrations begin as described above, and it soon becomes evident that the pendulum, instead of returning to the same point on the circle from which it started, has shifted to the left. If closely observed, the change in the plane of vibration (as M. Foucault notes) is noticeable in one minute, and in half an hour, “Il saute aux yeux,” it becomes quite clear. In Paris, the change is more than 11 degrees per hour. Therefore, if the oscillations start in a plane facing south and north, in two hours they will be directed SSW and NNE; in four hours they will point SW and NE; and in eight hours, the oscillations will point due east and west, or at right angles to their initial direction. To an observer, it seems as if the change is happening in the pendulum, which appears to have shifted a quarter of a circle without any visible cause; however, the real change is in the table, which, resting on the Earth and moving along with it in its rotation, has completed a quarter (and a little more) of its daily rotation.

No one anticipated such a result; and the experiment has been received by some with incredulity, by all with wonderment; and one source of the incredulity arises from the difficulty of conceiving how, amidst the ten thousand experiments of which the pendulum has been the subject, so remarkable a fact could have escaped notice so long. Fully admitting that these experiments have generally been conducted with pendulums which had little freedom of motion horizontally, we still think odd that[142] somebody did not stumble upon the curious fact.

No one expected such a result, and the experiment has been met with disbelief by some and amazement by everyone; one reason for the disbelief is the challenge of understanding how, out of the countless experiments involving the pendulum, such an extraordinary fact could have gone unnoticed for so long. While we acknowledge that these experiments have usually been done with pendulums that had limited horizontal movement, we still find it strange that[142] someone didn’t discover this fascinating fact.

Though all the parts of the Earth complete their revolution in the same space of time, it is found that the rate of horizontal motion in Foucault’s pendulum varies with the latitude of the place where the experiment is made. At the pole, the pendulum would pass over 15 degrees in an hour, like the Earth itself, and complete its circuit in 24 hours. At Edinburgh, the pendulum would pass over 12¹⁄₂ degrees in an hour, and would complete its revolution in 29 hours 7 minutes. At Paris, the rate of motion is 11 degrees and 20 minutes per hour, and the revolution should be completed in 32 hours.

Though all parts of the Earth complete their revolution in the same amount of time, the rate of horizontal motion in Foucault’s pendulum varies based on the latitude of the location where the experiment is conducted. At the pole, the pendulum would cover 15 degrees in an hour, like the Earth itself, and finish its circuit in 24 hours. In Edinburgh, the pendulum would cover 12½ degrees in an hour, completing its revolution in 29 hours and 7 minutes. In Paris, the motion rate is 11 degrees and 20 minutes per hour, and the revolution would take 32 hours to complete.

Schematic representation of surface

FIG. 31.

FIG. 31.

[143]

[143]

Let the above figure represent a portion of the Earth’s surface near the north pole N. Suppose the pendulum to be set in motion at m, so as to vibrate in the direction x y, which coincides with that of the meridian m N or m r. The Earth in the meantime is pursuing its easterly course, and the meridian line m N has come in six hours into the position n N. It has been hitherto supposed that the pendulum would now vibrate in the new direction n N, assumed by the meridian, but thanks to M. Foucault, we now know that this is a mistake. The pendulum will vibrate in a plane x n y, parallel to its original plane at m, as will be manifest if the plane of vibration points to some object in absolute space, such as a star. While the meridian line m N will in the course of 24 hours range round the whole circle of the heavens, and point successively in the direction n N, o N, p N, r N, s N, t N, and u N, the pendulum’s plane of vibration x y, whether at m, at n, at o, at p, at r, at s, at t, or at u, will always be parallel to itself, pointing invariably to the same star, and were a circular table placed under the pendulum, its plane of vibration, while really stationary, would appear to perform a complete revolution.

Let the above figure represent a section of the Earth’s surface near the North Pole N. Suppose the pendulum is set in motion at m, so it vibrates in the direction x y, which aligns with the meridian m N or m r. Meanwhile, the Earth is moving eastward, and the meridian line m N has shifted into position n N after six hours. It was previously assumed that the pendulum would now vibrate in the new direction n N that the meridian has taken, but thanks to M. Foucault, we now know this is incorrect. The pendulum will vibrate in a plane x n y, parallel to its original plane at m, which becomes evident if the plane of vibration points to a fixed object in space, like a star. While the meridian line m N will rotate around the entire circle of the heavens over 24 hours, successively pointing in the directions n N, o N, p N, r N, s N, t N, and u N, the pendulum’s plane of vibration x y, whether at m, n, o, p, r, s, t, or u, will always remain parallel to itself, consistently pointing to the same star. If a circular table were placed under the pendulum, its plane of vibration, while actually stationary, would appear to make a full revolution.

This stationary position of the plane of vibration at the pole seems to present little[144] difficulty. We impress a peculiar motion on the pendulum in setting it a going. The Earth is at the same time carrying the pendulum eastward, but at the pole the one motion will not interfere with the other. The only action of the Earth on the pendulum there is that of attracting it towards its own (the Earth’s) centre. But this attraction is exactly in the plane of vibration and merely tends to continue the oscillatory motion without disturbing it. It is otherwise if the experiment is made at some other point, say 20 degrees distant from the pole. Supposing the vibrations to commence in the plane of the meridian, then as the tendency of the pendulum is to continue its vibrations in planes absolutely parallel to the original plane, it will be seen, if we trace both motions, that, while it is carried eastward with the Earth along a parallel of latitude, this tendency will operate to draw the plane of vibration away from a ‘great circle’ into a ‘small circle’ (that is, from a circle dividing the globe into two equal parts, into one dividing it into two unequal parts). But the pendulum must necessarily move in a ‘great circle,’ and hence to counteract its tendency to deviate into a ‘small circle,’ a correctory movement is constantly going on, to which the lengthening of the period necessary to complete a revolution must be ascribed. At Edinburgh[145] the period is about 29 hours, at Paris 32, at Cairo 48, at Calcutta 63. At the Equator, the period stretches out to infinity. M. Foucault’s rule is, that the angular space passed over by the pendulum at any latitude in a given time, is equal to the angular motion of the Earth in the period, multiplied by the sine of the latitude. The angular motion of the Earth is 15 degrees per hour; and at the latitude of 30, for example, the sine being to radius as 500 to 1000, the angular motion of the pendulum will consequently be 7¹⁄₂ degrees per hour. It is, therefore, easily found. It follows that the motions of the pendulum may be employed in a rough way to indicate the latitude of a place.”[37]

This stationary position of the plane of vibration at the pole seems to present little[144] difficulty. We give the pendulum a unique motion when we start it. The Earth is also moving the pendulum eastward, but at the pole the two motions won't interfere with each other. The only effect the Earth has on the pendulum there is pulling it toward its own (the Earth’s) center. This pull is right in the plane of vibration and just helps continue the oscillatory motion without disturbing it. It’s different if the experiment is conducted somewhere else, say 20 degrees away from the pole. If the vibrations start in the plane of the meridian, then since the pendulum tends to keep its vibrations in planes that are parallel to the original plane, we’ll see, when tracking both motions, that while it moves eastward with the Earth along a line of latitude, this tendency will pull the plane of vibration away from a ‘great circle’ into a ‘small circle’ (that is, from a circle dividing the globe into two equal parts to one dividing it into two unequal parts). But the pendulum must move in a ‘great circle,’ so to counteract its tendency to shift into a ‘small circle,’ a corrective movement is always happening, which is why the period that’s needed to complete a revolution becomes longer. In Edinburgh[145] the period is about 29 hours, in Paris 32, in Cairo 48, and in Calcutta 63. At the Equator, the period stretches out to infinity. M. Foucault’s rule states that the angular space covered by the pendulum at any latitude in a given time equals the angular motion of the Earth during that period multiplied by the sine of the latitude. The angular motion of the Earth is 15 degrees per hour; at a latitude of 30, for example, since the sine is to radius as 500 to 1000, the pendulum's angular motion will therefore be 7¹⁄₂ degrees per hour. It is, therefore, easy to determine. It follows that the motions of the pendulum can be used roughly to indicate the latitude of a location.”[37]

[37] Supplement of the Manchester Examiner, of May 24, 1851.

[37] Supplement of the Manchester Examiner, of May 24, 1851.

Notwithstanding the apparent certainty of these pendulum experiments, and the supposed exactitude of the conclusions deducible therefrom, many of the same school of philosophy differed with each other, remained dissatisfied, and raised very serious objections both to the value of the experiments themselves, and to the supposed proof which they furnished of the Earth’s rotation. One writer in the Times newspaper of the period, who signs himself “B. A. C.,” says, “I have read the accounts of the Parisian experiment as they have appeared in many of our papers, and must confess that I[146] still remain unconvinced of the reality of the phenomenon. It appears to me that, except at the pole where the point of suspension is immovable, no result can be obtained. In other cases the shifting of the direction of passage through the lowest point that takes place during an excursion of the pendulum, from that point in one direction and its return to it again, will be exactly compensated by the corresponding shifting in the contrary direction during the pendulum’s excursion on the opposite side. Take a particular case. Suppose the pendulum in any latitude to be set oscillating in the meridian plane, and to be started from the vertical towards the south. It is obvious that the wire by which it is suspended does not continue to describe a plane, but a species of conoidal surface; that when the pendulum has reached its extreme point its direction is to the south-west, and that as the tangent plane to the described surface through the point of suspension necessarily contains the normal to the Earth at the same point, the pendulum on its return passes through the same point in the direction north-east. Now, starting again from this point, we have exactly the circumstances of the last case, the primary plane being shifted slightly out of the meridian; when, therefore, the pendulum has reached its extreme point of excursion the[147] direction of the wire is to the west of this plane, and when it returns to the vertical the direction of passage through the lowest point is as much to the west of this plane as it was in the former case to the west of the meridian plane; but since it is now moving from north to south instead of from south to north, as in the former case, its former deviation receives complete compensation, and the primary plane returns again to the meridian, when the whole process recurs.”

Despite the apparent certainty of these pendulum experiments and the supposed accuracy of the conclusions drawn from them, many philosophers from the same school disagreed with each other, remained unsatisfied, and raised serious objections to both the value of the experiments themselves and to the supposed evidence they provided of the Earth’s rotation. One writer in the Times newspaper of that time, who signs as “B. A. C.,” states, “I have read the reports of the Parisian experiment as they have appeared in various papers, and I must admit that I remain unconvinced of the reality of the phenomenon. It seems to me that, except at the pole where the point of suspension is fixed, no result can be obtained. In other scenarios, the shifting of the pendulum’s lowest point during its swing in one direction and its return will be completely balanced by the corresponding shift in the opposite direction during its swing on the other side. Let’s consider a specific example. Suppose the pendulum in any latitude is set to swing in the meridian plane and is started from the vertical towards the south. It’s clear that the wire by which it is suspended does not maintain a plane, but instead traces a sort of conical surface; when the pendulum reaches its farthest point, its direction is to the southwest, and since the tangent plane to the described surface at the point of suspension must also contain the normal to the Earth at that same point, the pendulum, during its return, passes through that point now heading northeast. Now, starting again from this point, we find ourselves in the exact same situation as before, with the primary plane slightly shifted from the meridian; as the pendulum reaches its farthest point in this excursion, the direction of the wire is to the west of this plane, and when it returns to vertical, the direction it passes through the lowest point is just as much to the west of this plane as it was in the earlier case to the west of the meridian plane; but since it is now moving from north to south instead of from south to north as before, its previous deviation is completely balanced, and the primary plane shifts back to the meridian when the whole process repeats.”

In the Liverpool Mercury of May 23, 1851, the following letter appeared:—“The supposed manifestation of the Rotation of the Earth.—The French, English, and European continental journals have given publicity to an experiment made in Paris with a pendulum; which experiment is said to have had the same results when made elsewhere. To the facts set forth no contradiction has been given, and it is therefore to be hoped that they are true. The correctness of the inferences drawn from the facts is another matter. The first position of these theorists is, that in a complete vacuum beyond the sphere of the Earth’s atmosphere, a pendulum will continue to oscillate in one and the same original plane. On that supposition their whole theory is founded. In making this supposition the fact is overlooked that there is no vibratory motion[148] unless through atmospheric resistance, or by force opposing impulse. Perpetual progress in rectilinear motion may be imagined, as in the corpuscular theory of light; circular motion may also be found in the planetary systems; and parabolic and hyperbolic motions in those of comets; but vibration is artificial and of limited duration. No body in nature returns the same road it went, unless artificially constrained to do so. The supposition of a permanent vibratory motion such as is presumed in the theory advanced, is unfounded in fact, and absurd in idea; and the whole affair of this proclaimed discovery falls to the ground. It is what the French call a ‘mystification’—anglice a ‘humbug.’ Liverpool, 22nd May, 1851.” “T.”

In the Liverpool Mercury of May 23, 1851, the following letter appeared:—“The supposed evidence of the Earth's rotation.—French, English, and other European journals have reported on an experiment conducted in Paris with a pendulum, which supposedly yielded similar results when performed in other locations. No contradictions have been made against the facts presented, so we can hope they are true. However, the validity of the conclusions drawn from these facts is a different issue. The primary claim of these theorists is that in a complete vacuum outside the Earth's atmosphere, a pendulum will continue to swing in the same original plane. Their entire theory hinges on this assumption. In making this assumption, it's overlooked that there is no vibratory motion[148] without atmospheric resistance or an opposing force. Constant motion in a straight line can be imagined, as in the corpuscular theory of light; circular motion can also be observed in planetary systems; and parabolic and hyperbolic motions can be found in comets; but vibration is artificial and has a limited duration. No object in nature retraces its path unless it's forced to do so. The idea of a permanent vibratory motion as assumed in this theory is not based on fact and is absurd in concept; thus, the entire notion of this claimed discovery collapses. It is what the French call a ‘mystification’—in English, a ‘humbug.’ Liverpool, May 22, 1851.” “T.”

Another writer declared that he and others had made many experiments and had discovered that the plane of vibration had nothing whatever to do with the meridian longitude nor with the Earth’s motion, but followed the plane of the magnetic meridian.

Another writer stated that he and others had conducted numerous experiments and found that the plane of vibration was not related to the meridian longitude or the Earth's motion, but instead followed the plane of the magnetic meridian.

“A scientific gentleman in Dundee recently tried the pendulum experiment, and he says—‘that the pendulum is capable of showing the Earth’s motion I regard as a gross delusion; but that it tends to the magnetic meridian I have found to be a fact.’”[38]

“A scientist in Dundee recently tried the pendulum experiment, and he says—‘that the pendulum can show the Earth's movement I see as a gross delusion; but that it aligns with the magnetic meridian I have found to be true.’”[38]

[38] Liverpool Journal, May 17, 1851.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Liverpool Journal, May 17, 1851.

[149]

[149]

In many cases the experiments have not shown a change at all in the plane of oscillation of the pendulum; in others the alteration in the plane of vibration has been in the wrong direction; and very often the rate of variation has been altogether different to that which theory indicated. The following is a case in illustration:—“On Wednesday evening the Rev. H. H. Jones, F.R.A.S., exhibited the apparatus of Foucault to illustrate the diurnal rotation of the Earth, in the Library Hall of the Manchester Athenæum. The preparations were simple. A circle of chalk was drawn in the centre of the floor, immediately under the arched skylight. The circle was exactly 360 inches in its circumference, every inch being intended to represent one degree. According to a calculation Mr. Jones had made, and which he produced at the Philosophical Society six weeks ago, the plane of oscillation of the pendulum would, at Manchester, diverge about one degree in five minutes, or perhaps a very little less. He therefore drew this circle exactly 360 inches round, and marked the inches on its circumference. The pendulum was hung from the skylight immediately over the centre of the circle, the point of suspension being 25 feet high. At that length of wire, it should require 2¹⁄₂ seconds to make each oscillation across the circle. The brazen ball, which at the end of a[150] fine wire constituted the pendulum, was furnished with a point, to enable the spectator to observe the more easily its course. A long line was drawn through the diameter of the circle, due north and south, and the pendulum started so as to swing exactly along this line; to the westward of which, at intervals of three inches at the circumference, two other lines were drawn, passing through the centre. According to the theory, the pendulum should diverge from its original line towards the west, at the rate of one inch or degree in five minutes. This, however, Mr. Jones explained, was a perfection of accuracy only attainable in a vacuum, and rarely could be approached where the pendulum had to pass through an atmosphere subject to disturbances; besides, it was difficult to avoid giving it some slight lateral bias at starting. In order to obviate this as much as possible, the steel wire was as fine as would bear the weight, ¹⁄₃₀th of an inch thick; and the point of suspension was adjusted with delicate nicety. An iron bolt was screwed into the frame-work of the skylight; into it a brass nut was inserted—the wire passed through the nut (the hollow sides of which were bell-shaped, in order to give it fair play), and at the top the wire ended in a globular piece, there being also a fine screw to keep it from slipping. * * * The pendulum was gently drawn up to one side, at the southern end[151] of the diametrical line, and attached by a thread to something near. When it hung quite still the thread was burnt asunder, and the pendulum began to oscillate to and fro across the circle. * * * Before it had been going on quite seven minutes, it had reached nearly the third degree towards the west, whereas it ought to have occupied a quarter of an hour in getting thus far from its starting line, even making no allowance for the resistance of the atmosphere.”[39]

In many cases, the experiments haven't shown any change in the plane of oscillation of the pendulum; in other cases, the change in the plane of vibration has been in the wrong direction; and very often, the rate of variation has been completely different from what theory suggested. Here's an example: "On Wednesday evening, Rev. H. H. Jones, F.R.A.S., demonstrated Foucault's apparatus to illustrate the Earth's daily rotation in the Library Hall of the Manchester Athenæum. The setup was straightforward. A chalk circle was drawn in the center of the floor, right under the arched skylight. The circle had a circumference of exactly 360 inches, with each inch representing one degree. Based on a calculation Mr. Jones had made, which he presented to the Philosophical Society six weeks ago, the plane of oscillation of the pendulum in Manchester should diverge about one degree every five minutes, or maybe just a bit less. He therefore drew this circle precisely 360 inches around and marked the inches along its edge. The pendulum was hung from the skylight directly above the center of the circle, with the point of suspension set 25 feet high. At that wire length, it should take 2¹⁄₂ seconds to complete each swing across the circle. The brass ball at the end of a[150] fine wire acted as the pendulum and was pointed to help spectators more easily see its movement. A long line was drawn through the diameter of the circle from north to south, and the pendulum was started to swing exactly along this line; west of it, two more lines were drawn at three-inch intervals along the circumference, extending through the center. According to the theory, the pendulum should diverge from its starting line toward the west at the rate of one inch or degree every five minutes. However, Mr. Jones clarified that this level of accuracy could only be achieved in a vacuum and was rarely realistic in an atmosphere that could cause disturbances; besides, it was tough to prevent giving it a slight lateral tilt when starting. To reduce this as much as possible, the steel wire was as fine as it could be to hold the weight, measuring ¹⁄₃₀th of an inch thick; the point of suspension was adjusted with great precision. An iron bolt was secured into the framework of the skylight; a brass nut was inserted into it—the wire passed through the nut (which had hollow, bell-shaped sides for smooth movement), and at the top, the wire ended in a round piece, also secured with a fine screw to keep it from slipping. * * * The pendulum was gently pulled to one side at the southern end of the diameter line and attached to something nearby with a thread. When it was completely still, the thread was burned through, and the pendulum started to swing back and forth across the circle. * * * Before it had been going for seven minutes, it had almost reached three degrees towards the west, while it should have taken a quarter of an hour to get that far from its starting line, even without considering the atmospheric resistance."[39]

[39] “Manchester Examiner” (Supplement), May 24, 1851.

[39] “Manchester Examiner” (Supplement), May 24, 1851.

Besides the irregularities so often observed in the time and direction of the pendulum vibrations, and which are quite sufficient to render them worthless as evidence of the Earth’s motion, the use which the Newtonian astronomers made of the general fact that the plane of oscillation is variable, was most unfair and illogical. It was proclaimed to the world as a visible proof of the Earth’s diurnal motion; but the motion was assumed to exist, and then employed to explain the cause of the fact which was first called a proof of the thing assumed! A greater violation of the laws of investigation was never perpetrated! The whole subject as developed and applied by the theoretical philosophers is to the fullest degree unreasonable and absurd—not a “jot or tittle” better than the reasoning contained in the following letter:—“Sir,—Allow me to call your[152] serious and polite attention to the extraordinary phenomenon, demonstrating the rotation of the Earth, which I at this present moment experience, and you yourself or anybody else, I have not the slightest doubt, would be satisfied of, under similar circumstances. Some sceptical and obstinate individuals may doubt that the Earth’s motion is visible, but I say from personal observation its a positive fact. I don’t care about latitude or longitude, or a vibratory pendulum revolving round the sine of a tangent on a spherical surface, nor axes, nor apsides, nor anything of the sort. That is all rubbish. All I know is, I see the ceiling of this coffee-room going round. I perceive this distinctly with the naked eye—only my sight has been sharpened by a slight stimulant. I write after my sixth go of brandy-and-water, whereof witness my hand,”—“Swiggins”—Goose and Gridiron, May 5, 1851.—“P.S. Why do two waiters come when I only call one?”[40]

Aside from the irregularities often seen in the timing and direction of the pendulum's swings, which is enough to make them unreliable as proof of the Earth's motion, the way Newtonian astronomers used the general fact that the plane of oscillation changes was completely unfair and illogical. They presented it to the world as visible evidence of the Earth's daily rotation; however, the motion was just assumed to exist, and then used to explain the cause of the fact that was first declared as proof of the very assumption! A greater violation of investigative principles has never occurred! The entire topic as developed and applied by theoretical philosophers is utterly unreasonable and absurd—not a “jot or tittle” better than the reasoning in the following letter:—“Sir,—I would like to bring your[152] serious and respectful attention to the extraordinary phenomenon that demonstrates the rotation of the Earth, which I am currently experiencing, and I have no doubt that you or anyone else would agree under similar circumstances. Some skeptical and stubborn people may question whether the Earth's motion is visible, but I say from personal observation that it is a definite fact. I don’t care about latitude or longitude, or a pendulum moving in a circle on a spherical surface, nor axes, nor apsides, nor anything like that. That’s all nonsense. All I know is that I see the ceiling of this coffee room spinning around. I can clearly perceive this with my own eyes—although my vision has been sharpened by a little drink. I’m writing this after having my sixth brandy-and-water, as my hand can attest,”—“Swiggins”—Goose and Gridiron, May 5, 1851.—“P.S. Why do two waiters come when I only called for one?”[40]

[40] “Punch,” May 10, 1851.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ "Punch," May 10, 1851.

The whole matter as handled by the astronomical theorists is fully deserving of the ridicule implied in the above quotation from Punch; but because great ingenuity has been shewn, and much thought and devotion manifested in connection with it, and the general public thereby greatly deceived, it is necessary that the subject[153] should be fairly and seriously examined. What are the facts?

The way astronomical theorists have dealt with this issue definitely deserves the mockery expressed in the quote from Punch; however, because a lot of creativity and thoughtful dedication has been involved, and the general public has been misled by it, it's important that we take a closer, serious look at the topic. So, what are the facts? [153]

First.—When a pendulum, constructed according to the plan of M. Foucault, is allowed to vibrate, its plane of vibration is often variable—not always. The variation when it does occur, is not uniform—is not always the same in the same place; nor always the same either in its rate or velocity, or in its direction. It cannot therefore be taken as evidence; for that which is inconstant cannot be used in favour of or against any given proposition. It therefore is not evidence and proves nothing!

First.—When a pendulum, built according to M. Foucault's design, is set in motion, its plane of vibration can be inconsistent—not always. When it does change, the variation is not uniform—it doesn’t always behave the same way in the same location; and it can also vary in its speed and direction. Therefore, it can’t be considered reliable evidence; something that is inconsistent can’t support or refute any particular claim. So, it is not evidence and proves nothing!

Secondly.—If the plane of vibration is observed to change, where is the connection between such change and the supposed motion of the Earth? What principle of reasoning guides the experimenter to the conclusion that it is the Earth which moves underneath the pendulum, and not the pendulum which moves over the Earth? What logical right or necessity forces one conclusion in preference to the other?

Secondly.—If the plane of vibration is seen to change, what is the link between this change and the idea that the Earth is moving? What reasoning principles lead the experimenter to conclude that it is the Earth moving beneath the pendulum, rather than the pendulum moving above the Earth? What logical justification or necessity favors one conclusion over the other?

Thirdly.—Why was not the peculiar arrangement of the point of suspension of the pendulum specially considered, in regard to its possible influence upon the plane of oscillation? Was it not known, or was it overlooked, or was it, in the climax of theoretical revelry, ignored that a “ball-and-socket” joint is one which facilitates circular[154] motion more readily than any other? and that a pendulum so suspended (as was M. Foucault’s), could not, after passing over one arc of vibration, return through the same arc without there being many chances to one that its globular point of suspension would slightly turn or twist in its bed, and therefore give to the return or backward oscillation a slight change of direction? Let the immediate cause of the pendulum’s liability to change its plane of vibration be traced; and it will be found not to have the slightest connection with the motion or non-motion of the surface over which it vibrates.

Thirdly.—Why wasn't the specific design of the pendulum’s suspension point specifically considered regarding its potential impact on the plane of oscillation? Was it unknown, overlooked, or ignored in the height of theoretical excitement that a “ball-and-socket” joint allows for circular[154] motion more easily than any other type? A pendulum suspended this way (like M. Foucault’s) couldn't, after swinging through one arc of motion, return through the same arc without a significant chance that its spherical suspension point would slightly turn or twist in its mount, thus causing the return or backward swing to have a slight change in direction? Let’s trace the immediate cause of the pendulum’s tendency to change its plane of vibration, and it will be found to have no connection at all with the motion or stillness of the surface it vibrates over.

At a recent meeting of the French Academy of sciences, “M. Dehaut sent in a note, stating that M. Foucault (whose experiments on the pendulum effected a few years ago at the Pantheon, are of European notoriety) is not the first discoverer of the fact that the plane of oscillation of the free pendulum is invariable; but that the honour of the discovery is due to Poinsinet de Sivry, who, in 1782, stated, in a note to his translation of ‘Pliny,’ that a mariner’s compass might be constructed without a magnet, by making a pendulum and setting it in motion in a given direction; because, provided the motion were continually kept up, the pendulum would continue to oscillate in the same direction, no matter by how many points, or how often the ship might happen to change her course.”

At a recent meeting of the French Academy of Sciences, “Mr. Dehaut submitted a note stating that Mr. Foucault (whose pendulum experiments conducted a few years ago at the Pantheon are well-known across Europe) is not the first to discover that the plane of oscillation of a free pendulum is constant; instead, the credit for this discovery goes to Poinsinet de Sivry, who remarked in 1782, in a note to his translation of ‘Pliny,’ that a mariner’s compass could be made without a magnet by creating a pendulum and setting it in motion in a specific direction. As long as the motion was maintained, the pendulum would keep oscillating in the same direction, regardless of how many times or how much the ship changed its course.”


[155]

[155]

SECTION 13.
VIEW OF THE OCEAN.

It has been shown (at pages 25 to 34) that the law of perspective, as commonly taught in our Schools of Art, is fallacious and contrary to everything seen in nature. If an object be held up in the air, and gradually carried away from an observer who maintains his position, it is true that all its parts will converge to one and the same point; but if the same object be placed upon the ground and similarly moved away from a fixed observer, the same predicate is false. In the first case the centre of the object is the datum to which every point of the exterior converges; but in the second case the ground becomes the datum, in and towards which every part of the object converges in succession, beginning with the lowest, or that nearest to it.

It has been shown (at pages 25 to 34) that the law of perspective, as commonly taught in our Art Schools, is flawed and goes against everything observed in nature. If an object is held in the air and gradually moved away from an observer who remains stationary, all its parts will indeed converge to a single point. However, if the same object is placed on the ground and similarly moved away from a fixed observer, that statement is false. In the first scenario, the center of the object is the datum to which every point on the outside converges; but in the second case, the ground becomes the datum, towards which every part of the object converges in order, starting with the lowest point, or that which is closest to it.

Instances:—A man with light trousers and black boots walking along a level path, will appear at a certain distance as though the boots had been removed, and the trousers brought in contact with the ground.

Instances:—A man in light pants and black boots walking along a flat path will appear from a distance as if the boots have been taken off and the pants are touching the ground.

[156]

[156]

A young girl, with short garments terminating ten or twelve inches above the feet, will, in walking forward, appear to sink towards the Earth, the space between which and the bottom of the clothes will appear to gradually diminish, and in the distance of half-a-mile the limbs, which were first seen for ten or twelve inches, will be invisible—the bottom of the garment will seem to touch the ground.

A young girl, wearing short clothes that end ten to twelve inches above her feet, will, as she walks forward, seem to sink toward the ground. The gap between the bottom of her clothes and the Earth will seem to get smaller, and at a distance of half a mile, her legs, which were initially visible for ten or twelve inches, will disappear—the bottom of her outfit will look like it’s touching the ground.

A small dog running along will appear to gradually shorten by the legs, which, in less than half a mile, will be invisible, and the body appear to glide upon the earth.

A small dog running along will seem to gradually shrink in its legs, which, in less than half a mile, will become invisible, and the body will look like it's gliding over the ground.

Horses and cattle moving away from a given point will seem to have lost their hoofs, and to be walking upon the outer bones of the limbs.

Horses and cattle moving away from a specific point will appear to have lost their hooves and to be walking on the outer bones of their legs.

Carriages similarly receding will seem to lose that portion of the rim of the wheels which touches the Earth; the axles will seem to get lower; and at the distance of a few miles, the body will appear to drag along in contact with the ground. This is very remarkable in the case of a railway carriage when moving away upon a straight and level portion of line several miles in length. These instances, which are but a few of what might be quoted, will be sufficient to prove, beyond the power of doubt or the necessity for controversy, that upon a plane or horizontal surface, the lowest part of bodies receding from[157] a given point of observation will disappear before the higher. This is precisely what is observed in the case of a ship at sea, when outward bound—the lowest part—the hull, disappearing before the higher parts—the sails and mast head. Abstractedly, when the lowest part of a receding object thus disappears by entering the “vanishing point,” it could be seen again to any and every extent by a telescope, if the power were sufficient to magnify at the distance observed. This is to a great extent practicable upon smooth horizontal surfaces, as upon frozen lakes or canals; and upon long straight lines of railway. But the power of restoring such objects is greatly modified and diminished where the surface is undulating or otherwise moveable, as in large and level meadows, and pasture lands generally; in the vast prairies and grassy plains of America; and especially so upon the ocean, where the surface is always more or less in an undulating condition. In Holland and other level countries, persons have been seen in winter, skating upon the ice, at distances varying from ten to twenty miles. On some of the straight and “level” lines of railway which cross the prairies of America, the trains have been observed for more than twenty miles; but upon the sea the conditions are altered, and the hull of a receding vessel can only be seen for a few miles, and this[158] will depend very greatly—the altitude of the observer being the same, upon the state of the water. When the surface is calm, the hull may be seen much farther than when it is rough and stormy; but under ordinary circumstances, when to the naked eye the hull has just become invisible, or is doubtfully visible, it may be seen again distinctly by the aid of a powerful telescope. Although abstractedly or mathematically there should be no limit to this power of restoring by a telescope a lost object upon a smooth horizontal surface, upon the sea this limit is soon observed; the water being variable in its degree of agitation, the limit of sight over its surface is equally variable, as shown by the following experiments:—In May, 1864, on several occasions when the water was unusually calm, from the landing stairs of the Victoria pier at Portsmouth, and from an elevation of 2 ft. 8 in. above the water, the greater part of the hull of the Nab Light-ship was, through a good telescope, distinctly visible; but on other experiments being made, when the water was less calm, no portion of it could be seen from the same elevation, notwithstanding that the most powerful telescopes were employed. At other times half the hull, and sometimes only the upper part of the bulwarks, were visible. If the hull had been invisible from the rotundity of the Earth, the following[159] calculation will show that it should at all times have been 24 feet below the horizon:—The distance of the light-ship from the pier is 8 statute miles. The elevation of the observer being 32 inches above the water, would require 2 miles to be deducted as the distance of the supposed convex horizon; for the square of 2 multiplied by 8 inches (the fall in the first mile of the Earth’s curvation) equals 32 inches. This deducted from the 8 miles, will leave 6 miles as the distance from the horizon to the light ship. Hence 6² × 8 in. = 288 inches, or 24 feet. The top of the bulwarks, it was said, rose about 10 ft. above the water line; hence, deducting 10 from 24 feet, under all circumstances, even had the water been perfectly smooth and stationary, the top of the hull should have been 14 feet below the summit of the arc of water, or beneath the line of sight! This one fact is entirely fatal to the doctrine of the Earth’s rotundity. But such facts have been observed in various other places—the north-west light-ship in Liverpool Bay, and the light vessels of many other channels near the southern, eastern, and western shores of Great Britain. From the beach of Southsea Common, near Portsmouth, the observer lying down near the water, above the surface of which the eye was 2¹⁄₂ feet, and with a telescope looking across Spithead to the quarantine ship lying in[160] the “Roads,” between Ryde and Cowes, in the Isle of Wight, a distance of 7 miles, the copper sheathing of that vessel was distinctly seen, the depth of which was about 2 feet. Making the usual calculation in accordance with the doctrine of the Earth’s convexity, it will be seen that an arc of water ought to have existed between the two points, the summit of which arc should have been 16 feet above the copper sheathing of the vessel!

Carriages moving away will appear to lose the part of the wheel rims that touches the ground; the axles will seem to lower; and from a few miles away, the body will look like it’s dragging along the ground. This is particularly noticeable with a railway carriage traveling down a straight, flat stretch of track for several miles. These examples, just a few of many that could be cited, clearly demonstrate that on a flat or horizontal surface, the lowest part of objects moving away from a given point will vanish before the higher parts. This is exactly what happens with a ship at sea when it sails away—the lowest part—the hull—disappears before the higher parts—the sails and masthead. In a more abstract sense, when the lowest part of a receding object disappears into the “vanishing point,” it could be seen again at any distance with a telescope, provided it has enough magnification for that range. This is often possible on smooth, horizontal surfaces, like frozen lakes or canals, and along long, straight railway tracks. However, the ability to see these objects again is greatly reduced when the surface is uneven or otherwise moving, as in large, flat meadows and pasture lands; in the vast prairies and grassy plains of America; and especially on the ocean, where the surface is always somewhat undulating. In Holland and other flat countries, people have been seen skating on ice at distances from ten to twenty miles in the winter. On some of the straight and “level” railway lines crossing the American prairies, trains have been spotted for more than twenty miles; but at sea, the conditions change, and the hull of a receding ship can only be seen for a few miles, which depends significantly on the state of the water, given that the observer's height remains the same. When the water is calm, the hull may be visible from much farther away than when it is rough and stormy; but under typical conditions, when at the naked eye the hull has just become invisible or is barely visible, it can be seen again clearly with the help of a powerful telescope. Although, theoretically or mathematically, there should be no limit to this ability to restore a lost object on a smooth horizontal surface, such a limit quickly becomes evident at sea; since the water’s agitation varies, the limit of visibility over its surface varies too, as shown by the following experiments:—In May 1864, on several occasions when the water was unusually calm, from the landing stairs of Victoria Pier in Portsmouth, and from a height of 2 ft. 8 in. above the water, most of the hull of the Nab Light-ship was clearly visible through a good telescope; but in other tests conducted when the water was less calm, nothing could be seen from the same height, even with the most powerful telescopes. At other times, half the hull, and sometimes just the upper part of the bulwarks, were visible. If the hull had been invisible due to the curvature of the Earth, the following calculation indicates that it should have always been 24 feet below the horizon:—The light-ship is 8 statute miles from the pier. Given that the observer’s elevation is 32 inches above the water, 2 miles should be subtracted as the distance of the supposed curved horizon; because the square of 2 multiplied by 8 inches (the drop in the first mile due to the Earth’s curvature) equals 32 inches. Subtracting this from 8 miles leaves 6 miles as the distance from the horizon to the light-ship. Thus, 6² × 8 in. = 288 inches, or 24 feet. The top of the bulwarks was said to rise about 10 ft. above the water line; therefore, deducting 10 from 24 feet, even if the water had been perfectly smooth and stationary, the top of the hull should have been 14 feet below the peak of the water arc, or beneath the line of sight! This fact completely undermines the theory of the Earth’s curvature. Similar observations have been made in various other locations—the north-west light-ship in Liverpool Bay, and light vessels in many other channels near the southern, eastern, and western coasts of Great Britain. From Southsea Common beach, near Portsmouth, an observer lying down near the water, with their eye just 2½ feet above the surface and using a telescope to look across Spithead at the quarantine ship lying in the “Roads,” between Ryde and Cowes on the Isle of Wight, a distance of 7 miles, was able to clearly see the copper sheathing of that vessel, which was about 2 feet deep. Using the usual calculations based on the theory of the Earth’s curvature, it will be evident that an arc of water should have existed between the two points, with the peak of that arc being 16 feet above the copper sheathing of the vessel!

From an elevation of 2¹⁄₂ feet above the water opposite the Royal Yacht Club House, in West Cowes, Isle of Wight, the pile work and promenade of the pier at Stake’s Bay, near Gosport, and nearly opposite Osborne House, were easily distinguished through various telescopes: the distance is 7 miles, the altitude of the promenade 10 feet, and the usual calculation will show that this pier ought to have been many feet below the horizon!

From a height of 2.5 feet above the water in front of the Royal Yacht Club House, in West Cowes, Isle of Wight, the pier's pile work and promenade at Stake’s Bay, near Gosport, and almost directly across from Osborne House, were clearly visible through different telescopes: the distance is 7 miles, the height of the promenade is 10 feet, and standard calculations suggest that this pier should have been several feet below the horizon!

It is a well-known fact that the light of the Eddystone lighthouse is often plainly visible from the beach in Plymouth Sound; and sometimes, when the sea is very calm, persons can see it distinctly when sitting in ordinary rowing boats in that part of the Sound which will allow the line of sight to pass between Drake’s Island and the western end of the Breakwater. The distance is 14 statute miles. In a list of lighthouses in a[161] work called “The Lighthouses of the World,” by A. G. Findlay, F.R.G.S., published in 1862, by Richard H. Lawrie, 53, Fleet Street, London, it is said, at page 28:—“In the Tables the height of the flame above the highest tide high water level is given, so that it is the minimum range of the light; to this elevation 10 feet is added for the height of the deck of the ship above the sea. Besides the increased distance to which low water will cause the light to be seen, the effect of refraction will also sometimes increase their range.” In the “Tables” above referred to, at page 36 the Eddystone light is said to be visible 13 miles. But these 13 miles are nautical measure; and as 3 nautical miles equal 3¹⁄₂ statute miles, the distance at which the Eddystone light is visible is over 15 statute miles. Notwithstanding that the Eddystone light is actually visible at a distance of 15 statute miles, and admitted to be so both by the Admiralty authorities and by calculation according to the doctrine of rotundity, very often at the same distance, the lantern is not visible at an elevation of 4 feet from the water; showing that the law of perspective, previously referred to, is greatly influenced by the state of the surface of the water over which the line of sight is directed. A remarkable illustration of this influence is given in the Western Daily Mercury,[162] published in Plymouth, of October 25, 1864. Several discussions had previously taken place at the Plymouth Athenæum and the Devonport Mechanics’ Institute, on the true figure of the Earth; subsequent to which a committee was formed for the purpose of making experiments bearing on the question at issue. The names of the gentlemen as given in the above-named journal were “Parallax” (the author of this work), “Theta” (Mr. Henry, a teacher in Her Majesty’s Dock-yard, Devonport), and Messrs. Osborne, Richards, Rickard, Mogg, Evers, and Pearce, all of Plymouth. From the report published as above stated, the following quotation is made:—Observation 6th: “On the beach, at 5 feet from the water level, the Eddystone was entirely out of sight.”

It’s a well-known fact that the light from the Eddystone lighthouse is often clearly visible from the beach in Plymouth Sound. Sometimes, when the sea is very calm, people can see it distinctly while sitting in regular rowing boats in the part of the Sound that allows a line of sight between Drake’s Island and the western end of the Breakwater. The distance is 14 statute miles. In a list of lighthouses in a[161] work called “The Lighthouses of the World,” by A. G. Findlay, F.R.G.S., published in 1862 by Richard H. Lawrie, 53, Fleet Street, London, it states on page 28:—“In the Tables, the height of the flame above the highest tide high water level is given, so that it is the minimum range of the light; to this elevation, 10 feet is added for the height of the deck of the ship above the sea. Besides the increased distance to which low water will allow the light to be seen, the effect of refraction will sometimes also extend their range.” In the “Tables” mentioned above, on page 36, the Eddystone light is said to be visible 13 miles. However, these 13 miles are nautical miles; and since 3 nautical miles equals 3½ statute miles, the distance at which the Eddystone light can be seen is over 15 statute miles. Even though the Eddystone light is actually visible at a distance of 15 statute miles, and this is acknowledged by both the Admiralty authorities and calculations based on the curvature of the Earth, often at the same distance, the lantern is not visible at an elevation of 4 feet above the water. This shows that the rule of perspective, previously mentioned, is significantly influenced by the condition of the surface of the water over which the line of sight is directed. A striking example of this effect is noted in the Western Daily Mercury,[162] published in Plymouth on October 25, 1864. Several discussions had earlier taken place at the Plymouth Athenæum and the Devonport Mechanics’ Institute on the true shape of the Earth; afterward, a committee was formed to conduct experiments related to the topic. The names of the gentlemen mentioned in the journal were “Parallax” (the author of this work), “Theta” (Mr. Henry, a teacher in Her Majesty’s Dock-yard, Devonport), and Messrs. Osborne, Richards, Rickard, Mogg, Evers, and Pearce, all from Plymouth. From the report published as stated above, the following quote is made:—Observation 6th: “On the beach, at 5 feet from the water level, the Eddystone was completely out of sight.”

The matter may be summarized as follows:—At any time when the sea is calm and the weather clear, the Light of the Eddystone, which is 89 feet above the foundation on the rock, may be distinctly seen from an elevation of 5 feet above the water level; according to the Admiralty directions, it “may be seen 13 nautical (or 15 statute) miles,”[41] or one mile still farther away than the position of the observers on the above-named occasion; and yet on that occasion, and at a distance of only 14 statute miles, notwithstanding[163] that it was a very fine autumn day, and a clear back ground existed, not only was the lantern, which is 89 feet high, not visible, but the top of the vane, which is 100 feet above the foundation was, as stated in the report, “entirely out of sight.”

The situation can be summarized like this: At any time the sea is calm and the weather is clear, the Light of the Eddystone, which is 89 feet above the foundation on the rock, can be clearly seen from an elevation of 5 feet above the water level. According to the Admiralty directions, it “can be seen 13 nautical (or 15 statute) miles,”[41] or one mile even farther away than where the observers were positioned on the occasion mentioned. Yet, on that occasion, at a distance of only 14 statute miles, even though it was a beautiful autumn day with a clear background, not only was the lantern, which is 89 feet high, not visible, but the top of the vane, which is 100 feet above the foundation, was reported as “entirely out of sight.”

[41] “Lighthouses of the World,” p. 36.

[41] “Lighthouses of the World,” p. 36.

Lighthouse

FIG. 32.

FIG. 32.

That vessels and lighthouses are sometimes more distinctly seen than at others; and that the lower parts of such objects are sooner lost sight of when the sea is rough than when it is calm, are items in the experience of seafaring people as common as their knowledge of the changes in the weather; and prominence is only given here to the above case because it was verified by persons of different opinions upon the subject of the Earth’s form, and in the presence of several hundreds of the most learned and respectable inhabitants of Plymouth and the neighbourhood. The conclusion which such observations necessitate and force upon us is, that the law of perspective which is everywhere visible on land, is modified when observed in connection with objects upon or near the sea. But how modified? If the water of the ocean were frozen and at perfect rest, any object upon its surface would be seen as far as telescopic or magnifying power could be brought to bear upon it. But because this is not the case—because the water is always more or less in[164] motion, not only of progression but of fluctuation, the swells and waves, into which the surface is broken operate to prevent the line of sight from passing parallel to the horizontal surface of the water. It has been shown at pages 16 to 20, and also at 25 to 33, that the surface of the Earth and Sea appears to rise up to the level, or altitude of the eye; and that at a certain distance the line of sight and the surface which is parallel to it appear to converge to a “vanishing point;” which point is “the horizon.” If this horizon, or vanishing point, were formed by the apparent junction of two perfectly stationary parallel lines, it could be penetrated by a telescope of sufficient power to magnify at the distance; but because upon the sea the surface of the water is not stationary, the line of sight at the vanishing point becomes angular instead of parallel, and telescopic power is of little avail in restoring objects beyond this point. The following diagram will render this clear:—The horizontal line C D E and the line of sight A B are parallel to each other, and appear to meet at the vanishing point B. But at and about this point[165] the line A B is intercepted by the undulating, or fluctuating surface of the water; the degree of which is variable, being sometimes very great and at others inconsiderable, and having to pass over the crest of the waves, as at H, is obliged to become A H, instead of A B, and will therefore fall upon a ship, lighthouse, or other object at the point S, or higher or lower as such objects are more or less beyond the point H.

That ships and lighthouses can sometimes be seen more clearly than at other times, and that the lower parts of these objects disappear from view more quickly when the sea is rough than when it’s calm, are experiences as familiar to sailors as their knowledge of weather changes. This particular case is highlighted here because it was confirmed by people with different views on the Earth’s shape, and in front of several hundred educated and respected residents of Plymouth and the surrounding area. The conclusion drawn from such observations is that the law of perspective we see on land is modified when applied to objects on or near the sea. But how is it modified? If the ocean’s water were frozen and completely still, any object on its surface could be seen as far as telescopic or magnifying power would allow. However, since this isn't the case—because the water is always in some state of motion, both moving and undulating, the swells and waves break the surface and prevent the line of sight from remaining parallel to the water's horizontal surface. It has been demonstrated on pages 16 to 20, and also on pages 25 to 33, that the Earth and Sea’s surface seems to rise up to the level of the observer’s eye; at a certain distance, the line of sight and the surface parallel to it seem to converge to a “vanishing point,” which is “the horizon.” If this horizon, or vanishing point, were formed by the apparent meeting of two perfectly stationary parallel lines, a telescope with enough power could penetrate it at that distance. But because the surface of the sea is not stationary, the line of sight at the vanishing point becomes angled instead of parallel, making telescopic power ineffective in revealing objects beyond this point. The following diagram clarifies this:—The horizontal line C D E and the line of sight A B are parallel and appear to meet at the vanishing point B. However, at and near this point, the line A B is interrupted by the undulating surface of the water; the degree of disruption varies, sometimes being quite significant and at other times minor, and as it rises over the crest of the waves, as shown at H, it becomes A H instead of A B, causing it to fall upon a ship, lighthouse, or other object at point S, or higher or lower depending on how far these objects are beyond point H.

It is worthy of note that the waves at the point H, whatever their real magnitude may be, are magnified and rendered more obstructive by the very instrument—the telescope—which is employed to make the objects beyond more plainly visible: and thus the phenomenon is often very strikingly observed—that while a powerful telescope will render the sails and rigging of a ship when beyond the point H, or the optical horizon, so distinct that the very ropes are easily distinguished, not the slightest portion of the hull can be seen. The “crested waters” form a barrier to the horizontal line-of-sight, as substantial as would the summit of an intervening rock or island.

It's important to note that the waves at point H, no matter their actual size, are magnified and become more obstructive because of the telescope used to make distant objects clearer: this creates a noticeable effect where, while a powerful telescope can show the sails and rigging of a ship beyond point H, or the optical horizon, so clearly that you can see the ropes, not even a bit of the hull is visible. The "crested waters" act as a barrier to the line of sight, just like the peak of a rock or island would.

In the report which appeared in the Western Daily Mercury, of Oct. 25, 1864, the following observations were also recorded:—“On the sea-front of the Camera house, and at an elevation of 110 feet from the mean level of the sea, a[166] plane mirror was fixed, by the aid of a plumb-line, in a true vertical position. In this mirror the distant horizon was distinctly visible on a level with the eye of the observer. This was the simple fact, as observed by the several members of the committee which had been appointed. But some of the observers remarked that the line of the horizon in the mirror rose and fell with the eye, as also did every thing else which was reflected, and that this ought to be recorded as an addendum—granted. The surface of the sea appeared to regularly ascend from the base of the Hoe to the distant horizon. The horizon from the extreme east to the west, as far as the eye could see, was parallel to a horizontal line.”

In the report published in the Western Daily Mercury on October 25, 1864, the following observations were also noted:—“On the sea-front of the Camera house, at an elevation of 110 feet above sea level, a[166] plane mirror was set up using a plumb line, positioned perfectly vertical. In this mirror, the distant horizon was clearly visible at eye level. This was the straightforward fact, as noted by various members of the appointed committee. However, some observers pointed out that the horizon line in the mirror rose and fell with the observer's eye, as did everything else reflected, and that this should be mentioned as an addendum—which is accepted. The surface of the sea seemed to steadily rise from the base of the Hoe to the distant horizon. The horizon from the far east to the west, as far as one could see, was in line with a horizontal line.”

The following version was recorded in the same journal, of the same date, and was furnished by one of the committee who had manifested a very marked aversion to the doctrine that the surface of all water is horizontal:—“A vertical looking-glass was suspended from the Camera and the horizon seen in it, as well as various other objects reflected, rising and falling with the eye. The water was seen in the glass to ascend from the base of the Hoe to the horizon. The horizon appeared parallel to a horizontal line.”

The following version was recorded in the same journal, on the same date, and was provided by one of the committee members who clearly disliked the idea that the surface of all water is level:—“A vertical mirror was hung from the Camera, and the horizon seen in it, along with various other objects reflected, moved up and down with the eye. The water was visible in the mirror as it rose from the base of the Hoe to the horizon. The horizon looked parallel to a straight line.”

It will be observed that the two reports are substantially the same, and very strongly corroborate[167] the remarks made at pages 15, 16, and 17 of this work. Indeed no other report could have been given without the author’s becoming subject to the charge of glaring, obstinate, and wilful misrepresentation. What then has again been demonstrated? That the surface of all water is horizontal, and that, therefore, the Earth cannot possibly be anything other than a Plane. All appearances to the contrary have been shown to be purely optical and adventitious.

It can be seen that the two reports are essentially the same and strongly support the comments made at pages 15, 16, and 17 of this work. In fact, no other report could have been presented without the author facing accusations of clear and deliberate misrepresentation. So, what has been proven again? That the surface of all water is horizontal, and therefore, the Earth can only be a Plane. All contrary appearances have been shown to be purely optical and coincidental.

Horizontal sea

FIG. 33.

FIG. 33.

Curved sea

FIG. 34.

FIG. 34.

Another proof that the surface of all water is horizontal and that therefore the Earth cannot be a globe is furnished by the following experiment, which was made in May, 1864, on the new pier at Southsea, near Portsmouth:—A telescope was fixed upon a stand and directed across the water at Spithead to the pier head at Ryde, in the Isle of Wight, as shown in the subjoined diagram. The line of sight crossed a certain part of the funnel of one of the regular steamers trading between Portsmouth and the Isle of Wight; and it was observed to cut or fall upon the same part during the whole of the passage to Ryde Pier, thus proving that the water between[168] the two piers is horizontal, because it was parallel to the line of sight from the telescope fixed at Southsea. If the Earth were a globe the channel between Ryde and Southsea would be an arc of a circle, and as the distance across is 4¹⁄₂ statute miles the centre of the arc would be 40 inches higher than the two sides; and the steamer would have ascended an inclined plane for 2¹⁄₄ miles, or to the centre of the channel, and afterwards descended for the same distance towards Ryde. This ascent and descent would have been marked by the line of sight falling 40 inches nearer to the deck of the steamer when on the centre of the arc of water, as represented in the following diagram; but as the line of sight did not cut the steamer lower down when in the centre of the channel, and no such ascent and descent was observed, it follows necessarily that the surface of the water between Southsea and the Isle of Wight is not convex, and therefore the Earth as a whole is not a globe. The evidence against the doctrine of the Earth’s rotundity is so clear and perfect, and so completely fulfils the conditions required in special[169] and independent investigations, that it is impossible for any person who can put aside the bias of previous education to avoid the opposite conclusion that the Earth is a plane. This conclusion is greatly confirmed by the experience of mariners in regard to certain lighthouses. Where the light is fixed and very brilliant it can be seen at a distance, which the present doctrine of the Earth’s rotundity would render altogether impossible. For instance, at page 35 of “Lighthouses of the World,” the Ryde Pier Light, erected in 1852, is described as a bright fixed light, 21 feet above high water, and visible from an altitude of 10 feet at the distance of 12 nautical or 14 statute miles. The altitude of 10 feet would place the horizon at the distance of 4 statute miles from the observer. The square of the remaining 10 statute miles multiplied by 8 inches will give a fall or curvature downwards from the horizon of 66 feet. Deduct from this 21 feet, the altitude of the light, and we have 45 feet as the amount which the light ought to be below the horizon!

Another proof that the surface of all water is horizontal and that the Earth cannot be a globe comes from an experiment conducted in May 1864 at the new pier in Southsea, near Portsmouth. A telescope was mounted on a stand and aimed across the water at Spithead, focusing on the pier head at Ryde, located on the Isle of Wight, as shown in the diagram below. The line of sight intersected a specific part of the funnel of one of the regular steamers operating between Portsmouth and the Isle of Wight; it was noted that this intersection remained consistent throughout the entire passage to Ryde Pier. This shows that the water between the two piers is horizontal because it was aligned with the line of sight from the telescope set up at Southsea. If the Earth were a globe, the channel between Ryde and Southsea would form an arc of a circle, and since the distance across is 4½ statute miles, the center of the arc would be 40 inches higher than the two ends. Consequently, the steamer would have traveled up an incline for 2¼ miles to reach the center of the channel and then descended the same distance towards Ryde. This ascent and descent would have been indicated by the line of sight dropping 40 inches closer to the deck of the steamer when it was at the center of the arc of water, as illustrated in the following diagram. However, since the line of sight did not intersect the steamer lower when it was at the center of the channel, and no such ascent or descent was noted, it must be concluded that the surface of the water between Southsea and the Isle of Wight is not convex, confirming that the Earth in general is not a globe. The evidence against the idea of the Earth being round is so clear and compelling, and meets all the criteria required for specific and independent investigations, that anyone who can set aside their previous education will inevitably arrive at the opposite conclusion that the Earth is a plane. This conclusion is further supported by sailors' experiences regarding certain lighthouses. When the light is fixed and very bright, it can be seen from a distance that the current belief in the Earth’s being round would deem impossible. For example, on page 35 of “Lighthouses of the World,” the Ryde Pier Light, built in 1852, is noted as a bright fixed light, 21 feet above high water, and visible from a height of 10 feet at a distance of 12 nautical or 14 statute miles. The height of 10 feet would place the horizon 4 statute miles away from the observer. Squaring the remaining 10 statute miles and multiplying by 8 inches gives a downward curve or drop from the horizon of 66 feet. Subtracting 21 feet, the height of the light, leaves us with 45 feet as the amount that the light should be below the horizon!

By the same authority, at page 39, the Bidston Hill Lighthouse, near Liverpool, is 228 feet above high water, one bright fixed light, visible 23 nautical or very nearly 27 statute miles. Deducting 4 miles for the height of the observer, squaring the remaining 23 miles and multiplying[170] that product by 8 inches we have a downward curvature of 352 feet; from this deduct the altitude of the light, 228 feet, and there remains 124 feet as the distance which the light should be below the horizon!

By the same authority, on page 39, the Bidston Hill Lighthouse, located near Liverpool, stands 228 feet above high water. It emits a bright fixed light that can be seen from 23 nautical miles, which is almost 27 statute miles. If we subtract 4 miles for the observer's height, square the remaining 23 miles, and multiply that by 8 inches, we find a downward curvature of 352 feet. Then, if we subtract the light’s altitude of 228 feet, we are left with 124 feet as the distance the light should be below the horizon!

Again, at page 40:—“The lower light on the ‘Calf of Man’ is 282 feet above high water, and is visible 23 nautical miles.” The usual calculation will show that it ought to be 70 feet below the horizon!

Again, at page 40:—“The lower light on the ‘Calf of Man’ is 282 feet above high water and can be seen from 23 nautical miles away.” The usual calculation shows that it should be 70 feet below the horizon!

At page 41 the Cromer light is described as having an altitude of 274 feet above high water, and is visible 23 nautical miles, whereas it ought to be at that distance 78 feet below the horizon!

At page 41, the Cromer light is described as being 274 feet above high water, and it's visible for 23 nautical miles, even though it should be 78 feet below the horizon at that distance!

At page 9 it is said:—“The coal fire (which was once used) on the Spurn Point Lighthouse, at the mouth of the Humber, which was constructed on a good principle for burning, has been seen 30 miles off.” If the miles here given are nautical measure they would be equal to 35 statute miles. Deducting 4 miles as the usual amount for the distance of the horizon, there will remain 31 miles, which squared and multiplied by 8 inches will give 640 feet as the declination of the water from the horizon to the base of the Lighthouse, the altitude of which is given at page 42 as 93 feet above high water. This amount deducted from the above 640 feet will leave 547 feet as the distance which the[171] Spurn Light ought to have been below the horizon!

At page 9 it says:—“The coal fire (which was once used) on the Spurn Point Lighthouse, at the mouth of the Humber, was built on a good principle for burning and has been seen 30 miles away.” If the miles mentioned are nautical, they would equal 35 standard miles. Subtracting 4 miles, which is the usual distance for the horizon, leaves 31 miles. Squaring that and multiplying by 8 inches gives 640 feet as the drop in water level from the horizon to the base of the Lighthouse, which is stated on page 42 to be 93 feet above high water. If we deduct this amount from the 640 feet, we find that the Spurn Light should have been below the horizon by 547 feet!

The two High Whitby Lights are 240 feet above high water (see page 42), and are visible 23 nautical miles at sea. The proper calculation will be 102 feet below the horizon!

The two High Whitby Lights are 240 feet above high water (see page 42) and can be seen from 23 nautical miles at sea. The correct calculation will be 102 feet below the horizon!

At page 43, it is said that the Lower Farne Island Light is visible for 12 nautical or 14 statute miles, and the height above high water is 45 feet. The usual calculation will show that this light ought to be 67 feet below the horizon!

At page 43, it states that the Lower Farne Island Light can be seen from 12 nautical miles or 14 statute miles away, and it's 45 feet above high water. The usual calculation shows that this light should be 67 feet below the horizon!

The Hekkengen Light, on the west coast of Norway (see page 54), is 66 feet above high water, and visible 16 statute miles. It ought to be sunk beneath the horizon 30 feet!

The Hekkengen Light, located on the west coast of Norway (see page 54), stands 66 feet above high water and can be seen from 16 statute miles away. It should be below the horizon by 30 feet!

The Trondhjem Light (see p. 55), on the Ringholm Rock, west coast of Norway, is 51 feet high, and is visible 16 statute miles; but ought to be 45 feet below the horizon!

The Trondhjem Light (see p. 55), on the Ringholm Rock, west coast of Norway, is 51 feet high and can be seen from 16 statute miles away; however, it should be 45 feet below the horizon!

The Rondö Light, also on the west coast of Norway (see p. 55), is 161 feet high, and is visible for 25 statute miles; the proper calculation will prove that it ought to be above 130 feet below the horizon!

The Rondö Light, also on the west coast of Norway (see p. 55), stands at 161 feet tall and can be seen from 25 miles away; the right calculation will show that it should be over 130 feet below the horizon!

The Egerö Light, on west point of Island, south coast of Norway (see p. 56), and which is fitted up with the first order of the dioptric lights, is visible for 28 statute miles, and the altitude above high water is 154 feet; making[172] the usual calculation we find this light ought to be depressed, or sunk, below the horizon 230 feet!

The Egerö Light, located on the west point of the island on the southern coast of Norway (see p. 56), is equipped with first-order dioptric lights and can be seen from 28 statute miles away. Its height above high water is 154 feet, which leads to the common calculation showing that this light should be 230 feet below the horizon![172]

The Dunkerque Light, on the north coast of France (see p. 71), is 194 feet high, and visible 28 statute miles. The ordinary calculation will show that it ought to be 190 feet below the horizon!

The Dunkerque Light, on the northern coast of France (see p. 71), is 194 feet tall and can be seen from 28 statute miles away. A simple calculation would indicate that it should be 190 feet below the horizon!

The Goulfar Bay Light, on the west coast of France, is said at page 77, to be visible 31 statute miles, and to have an altitude at high water of 276 feet, at the distance given it ought to be 210 feet below the horizon!

The Goulfar Bay Light, on the west coast of France, is said on page 77 to be visible 31 statute miles and to have an altitude at high water of 276 feet; at that distance, it should be 210 feet below the horizon!

At page 78, the Cordonan Light, on the River Gironde, west coast of France, is given as being visible 31 statute miles, and its altitude 207 feet, which would give its depression below the horizon as nearly 280 feet!

At page 78, the Cordonan Light, on the River Gironde, west coast of France, is noted as being visible 31 miles away, and its height is 207 feet, which means it's nearly 280 feet below the horizon!

The Light at Madras (p. 104), on the Esplanade, is 132 feet high, and visible 28 statute miles, whereas at that distance it ought to be beneath the horizon above 250 feet!

The Light at Madras (p. 104), on the Esplanade, is 132 feet high and visible 28 miles away, even though at that distance, it should be below the horizon if it were over 250 feet high!

The Port Nicholson Light, in New Zealand, erected in 1859 (p. 110), is visible 35 statute miles, the altitude is 420 feet above high water, and ought, if the water is convex, to be 220 feet below the horizon!

The Port Nicholson Light, in New Zealand, erected in 1859 (p. 110), is visible 35 statute miles away, stands 420 feet above high water, and should, if the water is curved, be 220 feet below the horizon!

The Light on Cape Bonavista, Newfoundland, is 150 feet above high water, and is visible 35[173] statute miles (p. 111), this will give on calculation for the Earth’s rotundity, 491 feet that the Light should be below the horizon!

The Light on Cape Bonavista, Newfoundland, is 150 feet above high water and can be seen 35[173] statute miles away (p. 111). Taking into account the curvature of the Earth, this means the Light should actually be 491 feet below the horizon!

Many other cases could be given from the same work, shewing that the practical observations of mariners, engineers, and surveyors, entirely ignore the doctrine that the Earth is a globe. The following cases taken from miscellaneous sources will be interesting as bearing upon and leading to the same conclusion. In the Illustrated London News of Oct. 20, 1849, an engraving is given of a new Lighthouse erected on the Irish coast, The accompanying descriptive matter contains the following sentence:—“Ballycotton Island rises 170 feet above the level of the sea; the height of the Lighthouse is 60 feet including the Lantern; giving the light an elevation of 230 feet, which is visible upwards of 35 miles to sea.” If the 35 miles are nautical measure the distance in statute measure would be over 40 miles; and allowing the usual distance for the horizon, there would be 36 miles from thence to the Lighthouse. The square of 36 multiplied by 8 inches amounts to 864 feet; deduct the total altitude of the Lantern, 230 feet, and the remainder, 634 feet, is the distance which the Light of Ballycotton ought to be below the horizon!

Many other examples could be provided from the same work, showing that the practical observations of sailors, engineers, and surveyors completely disregard the idea that the Earth is a globe. The following cases taken from various sources will be interesting as they relate to and support the same conclusion. In the Illustrated London News from October 20, 1849, there’s an engraving of a new lighthouse built on the Irish coast. The accompanying description includes the following sentence: “Ballycotton Island rises 170 feet above the sea level; the height of the lighthouse is 60 feet including the lantern; making the light's elevation 230 feet, which can be seen from over 35 miles at sea.” If the 35 miles are measured nautically, the distance in statute measure would be over 40 miles; and considering the usual distance to the horizon, there would be 36 miles from there to the lighthouse. The square of 36 multiplied by 8 inches equals 864 feet; subtract the total height of the lantern, 230 feet, and the remainder, 634 feet, is the distance that the light from Ballycotton should be below the horizon!

[174]

[174]

In the Times newspaper of Monday, Oct. 16, 1854, in an account of her Majesty’s visit to Great Grimsby from Hull, the following paragraph occurs:—“Their attention was first naturally directed to a gigantic tower which rises from the centre pier to the height of 300 feet, and can be seen 60 miles out at sea.” The 60 miles if nautical, and this is always understood when referring to distances at sea, would make 70 statute miles, to which the fall of 8 inches belongs, and as all observations at sea are considered to be made at an elevation of 10 feet above the water, for which four miles must be deducted from the whole distance, 66 statute miles will remain, the square of which multiplied by 8 inches, gives a declination towards the tower of 2,904 feet; deducting from this the altitude of the tower, 300 feet, we obtain the startling conclusion that the tower should be at the distance at which it is visible, (60 nautical miles,) more than 2,600 feet below the horizon!

In the Times newspaper from Monday, Oct. 16, 1854, in an article about Her Majesty’s visit to Great Grimsby from Hull, the following paragraph appears: “Their attention was first naturally drawn to a giant tower that rises from the center pier to a height of 300 feet and can be seen 60 miles out at sea.” The 60 miles, if measured nautically (which is the common understanding when discussing distances at sea), would equate to 70 statute miles, to which an 8-inch drop applies. Since all observations at sea are considered to be made from an elevation of 10 feet above the water, four miles must be deducted from the total distance, leaving 66 statute miles. The square of 66 miles multiplied by 8 inches results in a drop towards the tower of 2,904 feet; after subtracting the tower's height of 300 feet, we arrive at the shocking conclusion that the tower, visible at a distance of 60 nautical miles, should be situated more than 2,600 feet below the horizon!

The only modification which can be made or allowed in the preceding calculations is that for refraction, which is considered by surveyors generally to amount to about ¹⁄₁₂th of the altitude of the object observed. If we make this allowance it will reduce the various quotients by ¹⁄₁₂th, which is so little that the whole will[175] be substantially the same. Take the last quotation as an instance—2,600 feet divided by 12 gives 206, which deducted from 2,600 leaves 2,384 as the corrected amount for refraction.

The only change that can be made or allowed in the previous calculations is for refraction, which surveyors generally consider to be about 1/12th of the height of the object being observed. If we take this into account, it will reduce the various quotients by 1/12th, which is such a small amount that the overall result will[175] be basically the same. For example, 2,600 feet divided by 12 gives 206, which when subtracted from 2,600 leaves 2,384 as the adjusted amount for refraction.


[176]

[176]

SECTION 14.
GENERAL SUMMARY—APPLICATION—CUI BONO?

In the preceding sections it has been shown that the Copernican, or Newtonian theory of Astronomy is “an absurd composition of truth and error;” and, as admitted by its founder, “not necessarily true or even probable,” and that instead of its being a general conclusion derived from known and admitted facts, it is a heterogeneous compound of assumed premises, isolated truths, and variable appearances in nature. Its advocates are challenged to show a single instance wherein a phenomenon is explained, a calculation made, or a conclusion advanced without the aid of an avowed or implied assumption! The very construction of a theory at all, and especially such as the Copernican, is a complete violation of that natural and legitimate mode of investigation to which the term zetetic has been applied. The doctrine of the universality of gravitation is an assumption, made only in accordance[177] with that “pride and ambition which has led philosophers to think it beneath them to offer anything less to the world than a complete and finished system of nature.” It was said, in effect, by Newton, and has ever since been insisted upon by his disciples—“Allow us, without proof, the existence of two universal forces—centrifugal and centripetal, or attraction and repulsion, and we will construct a system which shall explain all the leading mysteries of nature. An apple falling from a tree, or a stone rolling downwards, and a pail of water tied to a string set in rapid motion were assumed to be types of the relations existing among all the bodies in the universe. The moon was assumed to have a tendency to fall towards the Earth, and the Earth and Moon together towards the Sun. The same relation was assumed to exist between all the smaller and larger luminaries in the firmament; and it soon became necessary to extend this assumption to infinity. The universe was parcelled out into systems—co-existent and illimitable. Suns, Planets, Satellites, and Comets were assumed to exist, infinite in number and boundless in extent; and to enable the theorists to explain the alternating and constantly recurring phenomena which were everywhere observable, these numberless and for-ever-extending objects were assumed to be spheres. The Earth[178] we inhabit was called a planet; and because it was thought to be reasonable that the luminous objects in the firmament which were called planets were spherical and had motion, so it was only reasonable to suppose that as the Earth was a planet it must also be spherical and have motion—ergo, the Earth is a globe, and moves upon axes and in an orbit round the Sun! And as the Earth is a globe, and is inhabited, so again it is only reasonable to conclude that the planets are worlds like the Earth, and are inhabited by sentient beings! What reasoning! Assumption upon assumption, and the conclusion derived therefrom called a thing proved, to be employed as a truth to substantiate the first assumption! Such a “juggle and jumble” of fancies and falsehoods, extended and intensified as it is in theoretical astronomy, is calculated to make the unprejudiced inquirer revolt in horror from the terrible conjuration which has been practised upon him; to sternly resolve to resist its further progress; to endeavour to overthrow the entire edifice, and to bury in its ruins the false honours which have been associated with its fabricators, and which still attach to its devotees. For the learning, the patience, the perseverance, and devotion for which they have ever been examples, honour and applause need not be withheld; but their false reasoning, the advantages they have[179] taken of the general ignorance of mankind in respect to astronomical subjects, and the unfounded theories they have advanced and defended, cannot but be regretted, and ought to be resisted. It has become a duty, paramount and imperative, to meet them in open, avowed, and unyielding rebellion; to declare that their unopposed reign of error and confusion is over; and that henceforth, like a falling dynasty, they must shrink and disappear, leaving the throne and the kingdom to those awakening intellects whose numbers are constantly increasing, and whose march is rapid and irresistible. The soldiers of truth and reason have drawn the sword, and ere another generation has been educated, will have forced the usurper to abdicate. The axe is lifted—it is falling, and in a very few years will have “cut the cumberer down.”

In the previous sections, it has been shown that the Copernican or Newtonian theory of Astronomy is “an absurd mix of truth and error”; and, as its founder admitted, “not necessarily true or even likely,” and that rather than being a general conclusion derived from known facts, it is a mixed bag of assumed premises, isolated truths, and changing appearances in nature. Its supporters are challenged to show even one instance where a phenomenon is explained, a calculation done, or a conclusion reached without relying on an explicit or implied assumption! The very idea of constructing a theory, especially one like the Copernican, completely goes against the natural and legitimate way of investigation known as zetetic. The doctrine of universal gravitation is just an assumption, made in line with that “pride and ambition that has led philosophers to think it beneath them to offer anything less to the world than a complete and finished system of nature.” Newton essentially said, and his followers have since insisted—“Just allow us, without proof, the existence of two universal forces—centrifugal and centripetal, or attraction and repulsion, and we will build a system that explains all the main mysteries of nature.” An apple falling from a tree, a stone rolling down, and a pail of water tied to a string being spun were assumed to represent the relationships among all objects in the universe. It was assumed that the moon has a tendency to fall towards the Earth, and that the Earth and Moon together fall towards the Sun. The same relationship was assumed to exist among all the smaller and larger celestial bodies, and this assumption was quickly extended to infinity. The universe was divided into systems—coexisting and limitless. Suns, Planets, Satellites, and Comets were assumed to exist in infinite numbers and limitless reach; and to help the theorists explain the various repeating phenomena observable everywhere, these countless and ever-expanding objects were assumed to be spheres. The Earth we live on was called a planet; and because it was thought reasonable that the glowing objects in the sky called planets were spherical and had motion, it was logical to assume that since the Earth is a planet, it too must be spherical and in motion—ergo, the Earth is a globe and revolves on an axis and orbits the Sun! And since the Earth is a globe and is inhabited, it is reasonable to conclude again that the planets are worlds like Earth and are inhabited by living beings! What reasoning! Assumption upon assumption, and the conclusions drawn from them claimed as proven facts, used as truths to support the initial assumption! Such a “juggle and jumble” of fanciful ideas and falsehoods, elaborated and intensified as it is in theoretical astronomy, is sure to make the unbiased inquirer recoil in horror from the terrible deception that has been foisted upon them; to firmly resolve to resist its further spread; to work towards dismantling the entire system, and to bury in its ruins the false accolades associated with its creators, and which still linger around its followers. For the knowledge, patience, perseverance, and dedication for which they have always been examples deserve honor and applause; but their faulty reasoning, the advantages they’ve taken of the widespread ignorance of people regarding astronomical matters, and the unfounded theories they’ve promoted and defended cannot be overlooked and should be opposed. It has become a crucial and urgent responsibility to confront them openly, resolutely, and unwaveringly; to declare that their unchallenged reign of error and confusion is over; and that from now on, like a crumbling dynasty, they must shrink and fade away, leaving the throne and kingdom to those awakening minds whose numbers are steadily increasing, and whose progress is swift and unstoppable. The champions of truth and reason have drawn their swords, and before another generation is educated, they will have forced the usurpers to step down. The axe is raised—it is coming down, and in just a few years will have “cut the cumberer down.”

The Earth a Globe, and it is necessarily demanded that it has a diurnal and an annual and various other motions; for a globular world without motion would be useless—day and night, winter and summer, the half year’s light and darkness at the “North Pole,” and other phenomena could not be explained by the supposition of rotundity without the assumption also of rapid and constant motion. Hence it is assumed that the Earth and Moon, and all the Planets[180] and their Satellites move in relation to each other, and that the whole move together in different planes round the Sun. The Sun and its “system” of revolving bodies are now assumed to have a general and all-inclusive motion, in common with an endless series of other Suns and systems, around some other and “central Sun” which has been assumed to be the true axis and centre of the Universe! These assumed general motions with the particular and peculiar motions which are assigned to the various bodies in detail, together constitute a system so confused and complicated that it is almost impossible and always difficult of comprehension by the most active and devoted minds. The most simple and direct experiments, however, may be shown to prove that the Earth has no progressive motion whatever; and here again the advocates of this interminable and entangling arrangement are challenged to produce a single instance of so called proofs of these motions which does not involve an assumption—often a glaring falsehood—but always a point which is not, or cannot be demonstrated.

The Earth is a globe, and it’s necessary for it to have daily, yearly, and various other movements; a spherical world without motion would serve no purpose—day and night, winter and summer, the six months of light and darkness at the "North Pole," and other phenomena couldn't be explained by the idea of roundness without assuming quick and constant motion. So it’s assumed that the Earth and Moon, along with all the planets and their moons, move in relation to each other, and that they all orbit together in different paths around the Sun. It's now believed that the Sun and its system of revolving bodies share a general motion along with countless other suns and systems around some other "central Sun," which is thought to be the true axis and center of the Universe! These assumed general motions, along with the specific and unique movements assigned to the various bodies, create a system so confusing and complicated that it’s nearly impossible and always challenging for even the most focused minds to comprehend. However, the simplest and most straightforward experiments can show that the Earth has no forward motion whatsoever; and here too, the supporters of this endless and tangled framework are challenged to provide a single instance of so-called proof of these motions that doesn’t rely on an assumption—often a glaring falsehood—but always a point that can't be proven.

The magnitudes, distances, velocities, and periodic times which these assumed motions eliminate, are all glaringly fictitious, because they are only such as a false theory creates a necessity for. It is geometrically demonstrable[181] that all the visible luminaries in the firmament are within a distance of a few thousand miles, not more than the space which stretches between the North Pole and the Cape of Good Hope; and the principle of measurement—that of plane triangulation—which demonstrates this important fact, is one which no mathematician, demanding to be considered a master in the science, dare for a moment deny. All these luminaries then, and the Sun itself, being so near to us, cannot be other than very small as compared with the Earth we inhabit. They are all in motion over the Earth, which is alone immoveable, and therefore they cannot be anything more than secondary and subservient structures, ministering to this fixed material world, and to its inhabitants. This is a plain, simple, and in every respect demonstrable philosophy, agreeing with the evidence of our senses, borne out by every fairly instituted experiment, and never requiring a violation of those principles of investigation which the human mind has ever recognized, and depended upon in its every day life. The modern, or Newtonian Astronomy, has none of these characteristics. The whole system taken together constitutes a most monstrous absurdity. It is false in its foundation; irregular, unfair, and illogical in its details; and in its conclusions inconsistent and contradictory. Worse than all,[182] it is a prolific source of irreligion and of atheism, of which its advocates are, practically, supporters! By defending a system which is directly opposite to that which is taught in connection with all religions, they lead the more critical and daring intellects to reject the scriptures altogether, to ignore the worship, and doubt and deny the existence of a Supreme Ruler of the world. Many of the primest minds are thus irreparably injured, robbed of those present pleasures, and that cheering hope of the future which the earnest christian devotee holds as of far greater value than all earthly wealth and grandeur; or than the mastery of all the philosophical complications which the human mind ever invented.

The sizes, distances, speeds, and times involved in these assumed motions are all obviously made-up because they only arise from a flawed theory. It's geometrically proven[181] that all the visible stars in the sky are just a few thousand miles away, no farther than the distance from the North Pole to the Cape of Good Hope. The measurement principle, which is based on plane triangulation, confirms this important fact, and any mathematician who wants to be regarded as an expert in the field cannot deny it. Since all these celestial bodies, including the Sun, are so close to us, they must be very small compared to our Earth. They all move around the Earth, which is the only thing that remains still, so they can only be secondary and supporting structures that serve this fixed material world and its inhabitants. This is a straightforward, clear, and completely demonstrable philosophy that aligns with our sensory evidence, supported by every properly conducted experiment, and it never requires violating any principles of investigation that humanity has always recognized and relied upon in everyday life. Modern or Newtonian Astronomy doesn’t have any of these qualities. The entire system is a massive absurdity. Its foundation is false, its details are inconsistent, unfair, and illogical, and its conclusions are contradictory. Worse than that,[182] it is a major source of irreligion and atheism, backed by its advocates! By supporting a system that opposes what is taught in all religions, they drive more critical and bold thinkers to completely reject scripture, disregard worship, and doubt or deny the existence of a Supreme Ruler of the world. Many brilliant minds are thus permanently harmed, deprived of the joy of the present and the hopeful outlook for the future that an earnest Christian believer values far more than any earthly riches or the mastery of all the philosophical complexities the human mind has ever devised.

The doctrine of the Earth’s rotundity and motion is now shown to be unconditionally false; and therefore the scriptures which assert the contrary, are, in their philosophical teachings at least, literally true. In practical science therefore, atheism and denial of scriptural authority have no foundation. If human theories are cast aside, and the facts of nature, and legitimate reasoning alone depended upon, it will be seen that religion and true philosophy are not antagonistic, and that the hopes which both encourage may be fully relied upon. To the religious mind this matter is most important, it is indeed no less than a sacred question, for it renders complete[183] the evidence that the Jewish and Christian scriptures are true, and must have been communicated to mankind by an anterior and supernal Being. For if after so many ages of mental struggling, of speculation and trial, and change and counterchange, we have at length discovered that all astronomical theories are false, that the Earth is a plane, and motionless, and that the various luminaries above it are lights only and not worlds; and that these very doctrines have been taught and recorded in a work which has been handed down to us from the earliest times; from a time, in fact, when mankind could not have had sufficient experience to enable them to criticise and doubt, much less to invent, it follows that whoever dictated and caused such doctrines to be recorded and preserved to all future generations, must have been superhuman, omniscient, and, to the Earth and its inhabitants pre-existent.

The idea that the Earth is round and moves is now completely proven to be false; therefore, the scriptures that claim otherwise are, at least in their philosophical teachings, literally true. In practical science, atheism and rejection of scriptural authority have no basis. If we ignore human theories and focus only on the facts of nature and sound reasoning, it becomes clear that religion and true philosophy aren't in conflict, and the hopes that both inspire can be fully trusted. For the religious person, this issue is extremely important—it's truly a sacred question—because it provides definitive evidence that the Jewish and Christian scriptures are true and must have been communicated to humanity by a higher power. If, after so much time spent struggling with thoughts, speculating, testing, changing, and re-evaluating, we have finally discovered that all astronomical theories are incorrect, that the Earth is flat and motionless, and that the various lights in the sky are just lights and not worlds; and if these very beliefs have been taught and recorded in a work that has been passed down to us from ancient times—at a time when people could not have possibly had enough experience to criticize, doubt, or invent such ideas—it follows that whoever inspired and ensured these doctrines were recorded and preserved for all future generations must have been superhuman, all-knowing, and pre-existing to the Earth and its inhabitants.

To the dogged Atheist, whose “mind is made up” not to enter into any further investigation, and not to admit of possible error in his past conclusions, this question is of no more account than it is to an Ox. He who cares not to re-examine from time to time his state of mind, and the result of his accumulated experience is in no single respect better than the lowest animal in creation. He may see nothing higher,[184] more noble, more intelligent or beautiful than himself; and in this his pride, conceit, and vanity find an incarnation. To such a creature there is no God, for he is himself an equal with the highest being he has ever recognised! Such Atheism exists to an alarming extent among the philosophers of Europe and America; and it has been mainly fostered by the astronomical and geological theories of the day. Besides which, in consequence of the differences between the language of Scripture and the teachings of modern Astronomy, there is to be found in the very hearts of Christian and Jewish congregations a sort of “smouldering scepticism;” kind of faint suspicion which causes great numbers to manifest a cold and visible indifference to religious requirements. It is this which has led thousands to desert the cause of earnest, active Christianity, and which has forced the majority of those who still remain in the ranks of religion to declare “that the Scriptures were not intended to teach correctly other than moral and religious doctrines; that the references so often made to the physical world, and to natural phenomena generally, are given in language to suit the prevailing notions and the ignorance of the people.” A Christian philosopher who wrote almost a century ago in reference to remarks similar to the above, says, “Why should we suspect that[185] Moses, Joshua, David, Solomon, and the later prophets and inspired writers have counterfeited their sentiments concerning the order of the universe, from pure complaisance, or being in any way obliged to dissemble with a view to gratify the prepossessions of the populace? These eminent men being kings, lawgivers, and generals themselves, or always privileged with access to the courts of sovereign princes, besides the reverence and awful dignity which the power of divination and working of miracles procured to them, had great worldly and spiritual authority.... They had often in charge to command, suspend, revert, and otherwise interfere with the course and laws of nature, and were never daunted to speak out the truth before the most mighty potentates on earth, much less would they be overawed by the vox populi.” To say that the Scriptures were not intended to teach science truthfully, is in substance to declare that God himself has stated, and commissioned His prophets to teach things which are utterly false! Those Newtonian philosophers who still hold that the sacred volume is the Word of God, are thus placed in a fearful dilemma. How can the two systems, so directly opposite in character, be reconciled? Oil and water alone will not combine—mix them by violence as we may, they will again separate when allowed to rest. Call[186] oil oil, and water water, and acknowledge them to be distinct in nature and value; but let no “hodge-podge” be attempted, and passed off as a genuine compound of oil and water. Call Scripture the Word of God—the Creator and Ruler of all things, and the Fountain of all Truth; and call the Newtonian or Copernican Astronomy the word and work of man, of man, too, in his vainest mood—so vain and conceited as not to be content with the direct and simple teachings of his Maker, but who must rise up in rebellion and conjure into existence a fanciful complicated fabric, which being insisted upon as true, creates and necessitates the dark and horrible interrogatives—Is God a deceiver? Has He spoken direct and unequivocal falsehood? Can we no longer indulge in the beautiful and consoling thought that God’s justice, and love, and truth are unchanging and reliable for ever? Let Christians—for Sceptics and Atheists may be left out of the question—to whatever division of the Church they belong, look at this matter calmly and earnestly. Let them determine to uproot the deception which has led them to think that they can altogether ignore the plainest astronomical teaching of Scripture, and endorse a system to which it is in every sense opposed. The following language is quoted as an instance of the manner in which the doctrine of the[187] Earth’s rotundity and the plurality of worlds interferes with Scriptural teachings:—“The theory of original sin is confuted (by our astronomical and geological knowledge), and I cannot permit the belief, when I know that our world is but a mere speck, a perishable atom in the vast space of creation, that God should just select this little spot to descend upon and assume our form, and clothe Himself in our flesh, to become visible to human eyes, to the tiny beings of this comparatively insignificant world.... Thus millions of distant worlds, with the beings allotted to them, were to be extirpated and destroyed in consequence of the original sin of Adam. No sentiment of the human mind can surely be more derogatory to the Divine attributes of the Creator, nor more repugnant to the known economy of the celestial bodies. For in the first place, who is to say, among the infinity of worlds, whether Adam was the only creature who was tempted by Satan and fell, and by his fall involved all the other worlds in his guilt.”[42]

To the stubborn Atheist, whose “mind is made up” not to explore any further and not to accept any possibility of error in his past conclusions, this question matters no more than it does to an ox. Anyone who doesn’t take the time to reevaluate their mindset and the results of their experiences is no better than the lowest animal on earth. They may see nothing higher, more noble, more intelligent, or beautiful than themselves; in this, their pride, arrogance, and vanity take form. To such a person, there is no God, for they see themselves as equal to the highest being they have ever acknowledged! Such Atheism is alarmingly prevalent among the philosophers of Europe and America, largely fueled by the astronomical and geological theories of today. Additionally, due to the differences between the language of Scripture and the teachings of modern Astronomy, there exists a sort of “smoldering skepticism” within the hearts of Christian and Jewish congregations—a subtle suspicion that leads many to show a cold and noticeable indifference to religious obligations. This mindset has prompted thousands to abandon the cause of sincere, active Christianity and has forced most of those who still identify with religion to state that “the Scriptures were not intended to teach scientific truths accurately, but only moral and religious doctrines; that the references often made to the physical world and natural phenomena are presented in language that fits the prevailing beliefs and ignorance of the people.” A Christian philosopher who wrote almost a century ago regarding similar remarks said, “Why should we suspect that Moses, Joshua, David, Solomon, and the later prophets and inspired writers faked their views on the order of the universe out of mere politeness, or felt pressured to deceive in order to please the biases of the public? These remarkable individuals were kings, lawmakers, and generals themselves, or always had access to the courts of sovereign princes, and their revered position from the power of divination and miracles gave them significant worldly and spiritual authority…. They were often tasked with commanding, suspending, reverting, and otherwise interfering with the laws of nature, and they were never intimidated to speak the truth before the most powerful rulers on earth, much less would they be cowed by the voice of the people.” To assert that Scriptures were not meant to teach science accurately is essentially to claim that God himself has declared, and sent His prophets to communicate things that are completely false! Those Newtonian philosophers who still believe that the sacred text is the Word of God are caught in a troubling dilemma. How can the two opposing systems be reconciled? Oil and water will not blend—mix them forcefully as we might, they will separate again when allowed to settle. Call oil oil, and water water, and acknowledge that they are distinct in nature and value; but let no attempted mixture be passed off as a genuine blend of oil and water. Call Scripture the Word of God—the Creator and Ruler of all, and the Source of all Truth; and call the Newtonian or Copernican Astronomy the product of human effort, too, from his vainest mindset—so vain and prideful that he isn’t satisfied with the simple teachings of his Maker and must rebel and conjure an elaborate fictional structure that, when insisted upon as true, leads to dark and horrible questions—Is God a deceiver? Has He spoken direct and undeniable falsehood? Can we no longer enjoy the beautiful and comforting thought that God’s justice, love, and truth are unchanging and reliable forever? Let Christians—since Skeptics and Atheists can be set aside—regardless of the Church division they belong to, approach this issue calmly and earnestly. Let them decide to uproot the deception that has made them believe they can completely ignore the clearest astronomical teachings of Scripture while endorsing a system that opposes them in every way. The following statement is quoted as an example of how the idea of the Earth’s roundness and the existence of multiple worlds contradicts Scriptural teachings: “The theory of original sin is contradicted by our astronomical and geological knowledge, and I cannot believe, knowing that our world is just a tiny, perishable speck in the vast space of creation, that God would choose this little spot to descend upon and take our form, to clothe Himself in our flesh, to become visible to human eyes, to the tiny beings of this comparatively insignificant world…. Thus, millions of distant worlds, with the beings on them, would need to be eradicated due to the original sin of Adam. No sentiment in the human mind could be more degrading to the Divine attributes of the Creator, nor more conflicting with the known realities of celestial bodies. For who among the infinite worlds can say whether Adam was the only being who was tempted by Satan and fell, and by his fall implicated all the other worlds in his guilt?”[42]

[42] Encyclopædia Londenensis, p. 457, vol. 2.

[42] Encyclopædia Londonensis, p. 457, vol. 2.

The difficulty experienced by the author of the above remarks is clearly one which can no longer exist, when it is seen that the doctrine of a plurality of worlds is an impossibility. That it is an impossibility is shown by the fact that the Sun, Moon, and Stars are very small bodies,[188] and very near to the earth; this fact is proved by actual non-theoretical measurement; this measurement is made on the principle of plane trigonometry: this principle of plane trigonometry is adopted because the Earth is a Plane; and all the base lines employed in the triangulation are horizontal. By the same practical method of reasoning, all the difficulties which, upon geological and astronomical grounds, have been raised to the literal teachings of the scriptures, may be completely destroyed. Instances:—The scriptures repeatedly declare that the Sun moves over the Earth—“His going forth is from the end of the heaven, and his circuit unto the ends of it.” “He ariseth and goeth down, and hasteth to his place whence he arose.” “The sun stood still in the midst of heaven.” “Great is the Earth, high is the heaven, swift is the Sun in his course.” In the religious poems of all ages the same fact is presented. Christians especially, of every denomination, are familiar with, and often read and sing with delight such poetry as the following:—

The challenges faced by the author of the above comments are clearly ones that can no longer exist when we understand that the idea of multiple worlds is impossible. It’s proven impossible by the fact that the Sun, Moon, and Stars are very small objects and very close to Earth; this is backed up by actual measurements, not just theories. These measurements are based on the principles of plane trigonometry, which are used because the Earth is flat, and all the baseline measurements in the triangulation are horizontal. Using the same practical reasoning, all the challenges raised on geological and astronomical grounds against the literal teachings of the scriptures can be completely debunked. Examples: The scriptures repeatedly state that the Sun moves across the Earth—“His going forth is from the end of the heaven, and his circuit unto the ends of it.” “He arises and goes down, and hastens to his place whence he arose.” “The sun stood still in the midst of heaven.” “Great is the Earth, high is the heaven, swift is the Sun in his course.” This same fact is echoed in the religious poetry of all time. Christians of every denomination are especially familiar with, and often read and joyfully sing, poetry like the following:—

“My God who makes the Sun to know
His proper hour to rise,
And to give light to all below
Doth send him round the skies.”
“When from the chambers of the east
His morning race begins,
He never tires nor stops to rest,
But round the world he shines.”
[189]
“God of the morning, at whose voice,
The cheerful sun makes haste to rise,
And, like a giant, doth rejoice,
To run his journey through the skies.”
“He sends the sun his circuit round,
To cheer the fruits and warm the ground.”
“How fair has the day been!
How bright was the Sun!
How lovely and joyful
The course that he run.”

All the expressions of scripture are consistent with the fact of the Sun’s motion. They never declare anything to the contrary. Whenever they speak of the subject it is in the same manner. The direct evidence of our senses confirms it; and actual and special observations, as well as the most practical scientific experiments, declare the same thing. The progressive and concentric motion of the Sun over the Earth is in every sense demonstrable; yet the Newtonian astronomers insist upon it that the Sun does not really move, that it only appears to move, and that this appearance arises from the motion of the Earth; that when, as the scriptures affirm, the “Sun stood still in the midst of heaven,” it was the Earth which stood still and not the Sun! that the scriptures therefore speak falsely, and the experiments of science, and the observations and applications of our senses are never to be relied upon. Whence comes this bold and arrogant denial of the value of our senses and judgement,[190] and the authority of scripture? The Earth or the Sun moves. Our senses tell us, and the scriptures declare that the Earth is fixed and that it is the Sun which moves above and around it; but a theory, which is absolutely false in its groundwork, and ridiculously illogical in its details, demands that the Earth is round and moves upon axes, and in several other and various directions; and that these motions are sufficient to account for certain phenomena without supposing that the Sun moves, therefore the Sun is a fixed body, and his motion is only apparent! Such reasoning is a disgrace to philosophy, and fearfully dangerous to the religious interests of humanity!

All the expressions in scripture are consistent with the fact that the Sun is moving. They never say otherwise. Whenever they address this topic, it's in the same way. The clear evidence from our senses backs this up, and both actual observations and practical scientific experiments confirm the same thing. The Sun's progressive and concentric motion over the Earth is demonstrable in every way; yet the Newtonian astronomers insist that the Sun doesn’t really move, that it only seems to move, and that this illusion is due to the Earth's motion. When the scriptures state that the “Sun stood still in the midst of heaven,” they mean it was the Earth that stood still, not the Sun! This leads to the claim that scripture is false and that scientific experiments and the observations of our senses are never to be trusted. Where does this bold and arrogant denial of our senses and judgment come from, along with the authority of scripture? Either the Earth or the Sun moves. Our senses tell us the Earth is fixed and that it's the Sun that moves above and around it; however, a theory, which is completely false at its core and absurdly illogical in its details, insists that the Earth is round and rotates on axes, among other directions; and that these motions are sufficient to explain certain phenomena without suggesting that the Sun moves, therefore the Sun is a fixed body, and its movement is only apparent! Such reasoning is a disgrace to philosophy and is extremely dangerous to humanity's religious interests!

Christian ministers and commentators find it a most unwelcome task when called upon to reconcile the plain and simple philosophy of the scriptures with the monstrous teachings of theoretical astronomy. Dr. Adam Clark, in a letter to the Rev. Thomas Roberts, of Bath,[43] speaking of the progress of his commentary, and of his endeavours to reconcile the statements of scripture with the modern astronomy, says: “Joshua’s Sun and Moon standing still, have kept me going for nearly three weeks! That one chapter has afforded me more vexation than anything I have ever met with; and even now I am but[191] about half satisfied with my own solution of all the difficulties, though I am confident that I have removed mountains that were never touched before; shall I say that I am heartily weary of my work, so weary that I have a thousand times wished I had never written one page of it, and am repeatedly purposing to give it up.”

Christian ministers and commentators find it a really challenging task when they have to reconcile the straightforward philosophy of the scriptures with the complicated teachings of theoretical astronomy. Dr. Adam Clark, in a letter to Rev. Thomas Roberts of Bath, talking about the progress of his commentary and his efforts to align the statements of scripture with modern astronomy, says: “Joshua’s Sun and Moon standing still have kept me busy for nearly three weeks! That one chapter has caused me more frustration than anything I’ve ever encountered; and even now I’m only about half satisfied with my own solution to all the difficulties, though I’m confident that I have tackled issues that have never been addressed before; should I say that I am really tired of my work, so tired that I have wished a thousand times that I had never written a single page of it, and I keep planning to give it up.”

[43] Life of Adam Clark, 8vo Edition.

[43] Life of Adam Clark, 8vo Edition.

The Rev. John Wesley, in his journal, writes as follows:—“The more I consider them the more I doubt of all systems of astronomy. I doubt whether we can with certainty know either the distance or magnitude of any star in the firmament; else why do astronomers so immensely differ, even with regard to the distance of the Sun from the Earth? Some affirming it to be only three and others ninety millions of miles.”[44]

The Rev. John Wesley, in his journal, writes as follows:—“The more I think about them, the more I question all systems of astronomy. I wonder if we can truly know the distance or size of any star in the sky; otherwise, why do astronomers so greatly disagree, even about the distance from the Sun to the Earth? Some say it's only three million miles, while others claim it's ninety million.”[44]

[44] Extracts from works of Rev. J. Wesley, 3rd Edition, 1829. Published by Mason, London, p. 392, vol. 2.

[44] Extracts from works of Rev. J. Wesley, 3rd Edition, 1829. Published by Mason, London, p. 392, vol. 2.

In vol. 3, page 203, the following entry occurs:—“January 1st, 1765.—This week I wrote an answer to a warm letter published in the London Magazine, the author whereof is much displeased that I presume to doubt of the ‘modern astronomy.’ I cannot help it. Nay, the more I consider the more my doubts increase; so that at present I doubt whether any man on earth knows either the distance or magnitude, I will not say of a fixed Star, but Saturn or Jupiter—yea of the Sun or Moon.”

In vol. 3, page 203, the following entry occurs:—“January 1st, 1765.—This week I wrote a response to a passionate letter published in the London Magazine, which expresses the author's frustration over my skepticism about ‘modern astronomy.’ I can’t help it. In fact, the more I think about it, the more my doubts grow; so right now, I’m not sure if anyone on earth knows either the distance or size, not just of a fixed star, but also of Saturn or Jupiter—even of the Sun or Moon.”

[192]

[192]

In vol. 13, page 359, he says:—“And so the whole hypothesis of innumerable Suns and worlds moving round them vanishes into air.” And again at page 430 of same volume, the following words occur:—“The planets revolutions we are acquainted with, but who is able to this day, regularly to demonstrate either their magnitude or their distance? Unless he will prove, as is the usual way, the magnitude from the distance, and the distance from the magnitude. * * * Dr. Rogers has evidently demonstrated that no conjunction of the centrifugal and centripetal forces can possibly account for this, or even cause any body to move in an ellipsis.” There are several other incidental remarks to be found in his writings which shew that the Rev. John Wesley was well acquainted with the then modern astronomy; and that he saw clearly both its self-contradictory and its anti-scriptural character.

In vol. 13, page 359, he says:—“And so the whole idea of countless Suns and worlds orbiting around them disappears.” And again on page 430 of the same volume, the following words appear:—“We know the revolutions of the planets, but who can today regularly demonstrate either their size or their distance? Unless, as is usually done, one proves the size from the distance and the distance from the size. * * * Dr. Rogers has clearly shown that no combination of centrifugal and centripetal forces can possibly explain this or even make any body move in an ellipse.” There are several other comments in his writings that show that Rev. John Wesley was well aware of the contemporary astronomy of his time and that he recognized both its contradictions and its conflict with scripture.

It is a very popular idea among modern astronomers that the stellar universe is an endless congeries of systems, of Suns and attendant worlds peopled with sentient beings analogous in the purpose and destiny of their existence to the inhabitants of this earth. This doctrine of a plurality of worlds, although it conveys the most magnificent ideas of the universe, is purely fanciful, and may be compared to the “dreams of the alchemists” who laboured with unheard[193] of enthusiasm to discover the “philosopher’s stone,” the elixir vitæ, and the “universal solvent.” However grand the first two projects might have been in their realisation, it is known that they were never developed in a practical sense, and the latter idea of a solvent which would dissolve everything was suddenly and unexpectedly destroyed by the few remarks of a simple but critical observer, who demanded to know what service a substance would be to them which would dissolve all things? What could they keep it in? for it would dissolve every vessel wherein they sought to preserve it! This idea of a plurality of worlds is but a natural and reasonable conclusion drawn from the doctrine of the Earth’s rotundity. But this doctrine being false its off shoot is equally so. The supposition that the heavenly bodies are Suns and inhabited worlds is demonstrably impossible in nature, and has no foundation whatever in Scripture. “In the beginning God created the Heaven and the Earth.” One Earth only is created; and the fact is more especially described in Genesis, ch. i., v. 10. Where, instead of the word “Earth” meaning both land and water as together forming a globe, as it does in the Newtonian astronomy, only the dry land was called earth,” and “the gathering together of the waters called He seas.” The Sun, Moon, and[194] Stars are described as lights only and not worlds. A great number of passages might be quoted which prove that no other material world is ever in the slightest manner referred to by the sacred writers. The creation of the world; the origin of evil, and the fall of man; the plan of redemption by the death of Christ; the day of judgement, and the final consummation of all things are invariably associated with this Earth alone. The expression in Hebrews, ch. i., v. 2, “by whom also he made the worlds,” and in Heb., ch. ii., v. 3, “through faith we understand that the worlds were framed,” are known to be a comparatively recent rendering from the original Greek documents. The word which has been translated worlds is fully as capable of being rendered in the singular number as the plural; and previous to the introduction of the Copernican Astronomy was always translated “the world.” The Roman Catholic and the French Protestant Bibles still contain the singular number; and in a copy of an English Protestant Bible printed in the year 1608, the following translation is given:—“Through faith we understand that the world was ordained.” So that either the plural expression “worlds” was used in later translations to accord with the astronomical notions then recently introduced, or it was meant to include the Earth and the spiritual world, as referred to in:—

It’s a popular belief among today’s astronomers that the starry universe is an endless collection of systems made up of suns and their planets, inhabited by intelligent beings with purposes and destinies similar to those of people on Earth. This idea of multiple worlds, while it suggests grand concepts about the universe, is entirely fanciful and can be likened to the “dreams of alchemists” who excitedly tried to discover the “philosopher’s stone,” the elixir vitæ, and the “universal solvent.” No matter how impressive the first two pursuits were, they were never practically achieved, and the idea of a solvent that could dissolve anything was abruptly challenged by a simple yet critical observer, who asked what good a substance that could dissolve everything would do for them. What could they store it in? It would dissolve every container they had! This notion of multiple worlds is merely a natural and logical conclusion based on the idea of the Earth’s roundness. But since that idea is false, its offshoot is false as well. The assumption that celestial bodies are suns and habitable worlds is demonstrably impossible in nature and has no basis in Scripture. “In the beginning, God created the Heaven and the Earth.” Only one Earth exists; and this fact is specifically described in Genesis, ch. i., v. 10. Here, the word “Earth” refers only to dry land, and “the gathering together of the waters” is called “the seas.” The Sun, Moon, and Stars are described as lights only, not as worlds. Numerous passages could be cited to show that the sacred writers never in any way refer to another physical world. The creation of the world; the origin of evil, and the fall of man; the plan of redemption through Christ’s death; the day of judgment, and the final culmination of all things are always associated with this Earth alone. The phrase in Hebrews, ch. i., v. 2, “by whom also he made the worlds,” and in Heb., ch. ii., v. 3, “through faith we understand that the worlds were framed,” is recognized as a relatively recent translation of the original Greek documents. The word translated as worlds can equally be rendered as singular as it can as plural; and before the adoption of Copernican Astronomy, it was always translated as “the world.” The Roman Catholic and French Protestant Bibles still use the singular form; and an English Protestant Bible printed in 1608 gives the following translation:—“Through faith we understand that the world was ordained.” So, either the plural term “worlds” was used in later translations to fit the recently introduced astronomical concepts, or it was meant to encompass the Earth and the spiritual world, as referred to in:—

[195]

[195]

Hebrews ii., 5—“For unto angels hath he not put into subjection the world to come.”

Hebrews ii., 5—“For he has not placed the future world under the control of angels.”

Ephesians i., 21—“Far above all principality and power, and might, and dominion, and every name that is named not only in this world, but also in that which is to come.”

Ephesians i., 21—“Far above all authority, power, strength, and rule, and every name that is named not only in this world, but also in the world to come.”

Luke xviii., 29, 30—“There is no man that hath left house, or parents, or brethren, or wife, or children, for the kingdom of God’s sake, who shall not receive manifold more in this present time, and in the world to come life everlasting.”

Luke xviii., 29, 30—“No one who has left a house, parents, siblings, a wife, or children for the sake of the kingdom of God will fail to receive many more times as much in this present life, and in the age to come eternal life.”

Matthew xii., 32—“Whosoever speaketh against the Holy Ghost, it shall not be forgiven him, neither in this world neither in the world to come.”

Matthew xii., 32—“Anyone who speaks against the Holy Spirit will not be forgiven, either in this world or in the world to come.”

The Scriptures teach that in the day of the Lord “the Heavens shall pass away with a great noise, and the elements shall melt with fervent heat,” and the “stars of Heaven fall unto the Earth even as a fig tree casteth her untimely figs when shaken of a mighty wind.” The Newtonian system of astronomy declares that the stars and planets are mighty worlds—nearly all of them much larger than this Earth. The fixed stars are considered to be suns, equal to if not greater than our own sun, which is said to be above 800,000 miles in diameter. All this is proveably false, but to those who have been led to believe it, the difficult question arises,—“How can[196] thousands of stars fall upon the Earth, which is many times less than any one of them?” How can the Earth with a supposed diameter of 8000 miles receive the numerous suns of the firmament many of which are said to be a million miles in diameter?

The Scriptures say that on the day of the Lord, “the heavens will disappear with a loud noise, and the elements will melt with intense heat,” and that “the stars of heaven will fall to the earth just like unripe figs falling from a fig tree when it’s shaken by a strong wind.” The Newtonian system of astronomy states that stars and planets are huge worlds—most of them much bigger than our Earth. The fixed stars are thought to be suns, equal to or even larger than our own sun, which is said to be over 800,000 miles wide. All of this is provably false, but for those who’ve been led to believe it, a challenging question comes up: “How can thousands of stars fall to the Earth, which is many times smaller than any one of them?” How can the Earth, with a supposed diameter of 8,000 miles, accommodate the numerous suns in the sky, many of which are said to be a million miles wide?

These stars are assumed to have positions so far from the Earth that the distance is almost inexpressible; figures indeed may be arranged on paper but in reading them no practical idea is conveyed to the mind. Many of them are said to be so distant that should they fall with the velocity of light or above one hundred and sixty thousand miles in a second, or six hundred millions of miles per hour, they would require nearly two millions of years to reach the Earth! Sir William Herschel in a paper on “The power of telescopes to penetrate into space,” published in the Philosophical Transactions for the year 1800, affirms, that with his powerful instruments he discovered brilliant luminaries so far from the Earth that the light from them “could not have been less than one million nine hundred thousand years in its progress.” Again the difficulty presents itself—“If the stars of Heaven begin to fall to-day, and with the greatest imaginable velocity, millions of years must elapse before they reach the Earth!” But the Scriptures declare that these changes[197] shall occur suddenly—shall come, indeed, “as a thief in the night.”

These stars are believed to be positioned so far from Earth that their distance is nearly beyond comprehension; numbers can be written down, but they don't really communicate any practical idea to us. Many of them are said to be so far away that if they were to travel at the speed of light, or over one hundred sixty thousand miles per second, or six hundred million miles per hour, it would take almost two million years to reach Earth! Sir William Herschel, in a paper titled “The Power of Telescopes to Penetrate into Space,” published in the Philosophical Transactions in 1800, claimed that with his powerful instruments, he found bright stars so far away that their light “could not have taken less than one million nine hundred thousand years in its progress.” Yet again, the question arises—“If the stars in the sky were to start falling today, even at the maximum speed conceivable, it would take millions of years for them to reach Earth!” But the Scriptures state that these changes[197] will happen suddenly—coming, indeed, “like a thief in the night.”

The same theory, with its false and inconceivable distances and magnitudes, operates to destroy all the ordinary, common sense, and scripturally authorised chronology. Christian and Jewish commentators, unless astronomically educated, hold and teach that the Earth, as well as the Sun, Moon, and Stars, were created about 4,000 years before the birth of Christ, or less than 6,000 years before the present time. But if many of these luminaries are so distant that their light would require above a million of years to reach us; and if, as we are taught, bodies are visible to us because of the light which they reflect or radiate, then their light has reached us, because we have been able to see them, and therefore they must have been shining, and must have been created at least one million nine hundred thousand years ago! The chronology of the bible indicates that a period of six thousand years has not yet elapsed since “the Heavens and the Earth were finished, and all the Host of them.”

The same theory, with its unbelievable distances and sizes, works to undermine all the typical common sense and biblically accepted timeline. Christian and Jewish commentators, unless they have a background in astronomy, believe and teach that the Earth, along with the Sun, Moon, and Stars, was created about 4,000 years before Christ’s birth, or less than 6,000 years ago. But if many of these celestial bodies are so far away that their light takes over a million years to reach us; and if, as we are taught, we can see these bodies because of the light they reflect or emit, then their light must have reached us, since we can see them, which means they must have been shining and must have been created at least one million nine hundred thousand years ago! The chronology of the Bible suggests that a period of six thousand years has not yet passed since “the Heavens and the Earth were finished, and all the Host of them.”

In the modern astronomy, Continents, Oceans, Seas, and Islands, are considered as together forming one vast Globe of 25,000 miles in circumference. This has been shown to be fallacious, and it is clearly contrary to the plain, literal teaching of the scriptures. In the first chapter[198] of Genesis, we find the following language: “and God said let the waters under the heaven be gathered unto one place, and let the dry land appear; and it was so. And God called the dry land Earth, and the gathering together of the waters called He Seas.” Here the Earth and Seas—Earth and the great body of waters, are described as two distinct and independent regions, and not as together forming one Globe which astronomers call “the Earth.” This description is confirmed by several other passages of scripture.

In modern astronomy, continents, oceans, seas, and islands are seen as making up one huge globe with a circumference of 25,000 miles. This idea has been shown to be incorrect and contradicts the clear, straightforward teachings of the scriptures. In the first chapter[198] of Genesis, we find the following: “And God said, let the waters under the heaven be gathered into one place, and let the dry land appear; and it was so. And God called the dry land Earth, and the gathering together of the waters He called Seas.” Here, the Earth and Seas—Earth and the large body of water—are described as two separate and independent areas, not as one globe that astronomers refer to as “the Earth.” This description is supported by several other passages in scripture.

2 Peter, iii., 5—“For this they willingly are ignorant of, that by the Word of God the Heavens were of old, and the Earth standing out of the waters and in the waters.”

2 Peter, iii., 5—“They deliberately ignore this fact: that by the Word of God the Heavens existed long ago, and the Earth was formed out of the waters and in the waters.”

Psalms cxxxvi., 6—“O give thanks to the Lord of Lords, that by wisdom made the heavens, and that stretchet out the earth above the waters.”

Psalms cxxxvi., 6—“Give thanks to the Lord of Lords, who with wisdom made the heavens and who stretched out the earth above the waters.”

Psalms xxiv., 1, 2—“The earth is the Lord’s and the fulness thereof; the world and they that dwell therein: for he hath founded it upon the seas, and established it upon the floods.”

Psalms xxiv., 1, 2—“The earth belongs to the Lord and everything in it; the world and all its people: for he has established it on the seas and set it on the waters.”

Hermes (New Testament Apocrypha)—“Who with the word of his strength fixed the heaven; and founded the earth upon the waters.”

Hermes (New Testament Apocrypha)—“Who with his powerful word established the heavens; and set the earth upon the waters.”

Job xxvi., 7—“He stretcheth out the north over the empty place, and hangeth the Earth upon nothing.”

Job xxvi., 7—“He stretches out the north over the void and hangs the Earth on nothing.”

[199]

[199]

Some think that the latter part of this verse, “hangeth the Earth upon nothing,” favours the idea that the Earth is a globe revolving in space without visible support; but Dr. Adam Clark, although himself a Newtonian philosopher, says, in his commentary upon this passage in Job, the literal translation is, “on the hollow or empty waste,” and he quotes a Chaldee version of the passage which runs as follows: “He layeth the Earth upon the waters nothing sustaining it.”

Some believe that the latter part of this verse, "hangeth the Earth upon nothing," supports the idea that the Earth is a globe spinning in space without any visible support; however, Dr. Adam Clark, even though he is a Newtonian philosopher, states in his commentary on this passage in Job that the literal translation is "on the hollow or empty waste." He also quotes a Chaldee version of the passage that says: "He layeth the Earth upon the waters nothing sustaining it."

It is not that He “hangeth the Earth upon nothing,” but “hangeth or layeth it upon the waters” which were empty or waste, and where before there was nothing. This is in strict accordance with the other expressions, that “the Earth was founded upon the waters,” &c., and also with the expression in Genesis, “that the face of the deep was covered only with darkness.”

It’s not that He “hangs the Earth upon nothing,” but rather “hangs or lays it upon the waters” which were empty or waste, where nothing existed before. This aligns perfectly with other statements that “the Earth was founded upon the waters,” etc., and also with the phrase in Genesis, “that the face of the deep was covered only with darkness.”

If the Earth were a globe, it is evident that everywhere the water of its surface, the seas, lakes, oceans, and rivers, must be sustained the land, the Earth must be under the water; but if the land and the waters are distinct, and the Earth is “founded upon the seas,” then everywhere the sea must sustain the land as it does a ship or any other floating mass, and there is water below the earth. In this particular as in all the others, the scriptures are beautifully sequential and consistent:—

If the Earth were a sphere, it's clear that all the water on its surface—seas, lakes, oceans, and rivers—would have to be supported by the land, meaning the Earth must be beneath the water. However, if land and water are separate, and the Earth is “founded upon the seas,” then the sea must support the land everywhere, just like it does with a ship or any other object that floats, and there is water beneath the Earth. In this aspect, as in all others, the scriptures are beautifully sequential and consistent:—

[200]

[200]

Exodus xx, 4—“Thou shalt not make unto thee any likeness of anything in heaven above or in the Earth beneath, or in the waters under the Earth.”

Exodus xx, 4—“You shall not make for yourself any likeness of anything in heaven above, on the Earth below, or in the waters under the Earth.”

Genesis xliv, 25—“The Almighty shall bless thee with the blessings of heaven above, and blessings of the deep that lieth under.”

Genesis xliv, 25—“The Almighty will bless you with the blessings of heaven above and the blessings of the depths below.”

Deut. xxxiii, 13—“Blessed be his land, for the precious things of heaven; for the dew; and for the deep which couched beneath.”

Deut. xxxiii, 13—“Blessed be his land, for the valuable gifts from heaven; for the dew; and for the depths that lie below.”

Deut. iv, 18—“Take ye therefore good heed unto yourselves, and make no similitude of anything on the Earth, or the likeness of anything that is in the waters beneath the Earth.”

Deut. iv, 18—“So be careful and do not create any images of anything on Earth, or in the waters below the Earth.”

The same idea prevailed among the ancients generally. In Ovid’s Metamorphoses, Jupiter, in an assembly of the gods, is made to say, “I swear by the infernal waves which glide under the Earth.”

The same idea was common among the ancients. In Ovid’s Metamorphoses, Jupiter, during a gathering of the gods, says, “I swear by the infernal waves that flow beneath the Earth.”

If the earth is a distinct structure standing in and upon the waters of the “great deep,” it follows that, unless it can be shown that something else sustains the waters, that the depth is fathomless. As there is no evidence whatever of anything existing underneath the “great deep,” and as in many parts of the Atlantic and Pacific Oceans no bottom has been found by the most scientific and efficient means which human ingenuity could invent, we are forced to the[201] conclusion that the depth is boundless. This conclusion is again confirmed by the scriptures.

If the earth is a separate structure sitting in and on the waters of the "great deep," it makes sense that, unless there's proof that something else is holding up the waters, the depth must be immeasurable. Since there's no evidence of anything existing below the "great deep," and in many areas of the Atlantic and Pacific Oceans, no bottom has been found using the best scientific tools and methods available, we have to conclude that the depth is limitless. This conclusion is further supported by the scriptures.[201]

Jeremiah xxxi, 37—“Thus saith the Lord, which giveth the sun for a light by day, and the ordinances of the moon and of the stars for a light by night, which divideth the sea when the waves thereof roar, the Lord of Hosts is His name. If these ordinances depart from before me, saith the Lord, then the seed of Israel also shall cease from being a nation before me for ever. Thus saith the Lord: if heaven above can be measured, and the foundations of the Earth searched out beneath, I will also cast off all the seed of Israel.”

Jeremiah xxxi, 37—“This is what the Lord says: He gives the sun to shine by day and the moon and stars to shine by night. He separates the sea when its waves roar; the Lord of Hosts is His name. If these laws ever disappear, says the Lord, then the descendants of Israel will stop being a nation before me forever. This is what the Lord says: if the heavens above can be measured and the foundations of the Earth can be explored below, I will also reject all the descendants of Israel.”

From the above it will be seen that God’s promises to his people could no more be broken than could the height of heaven, or the depths of the Earth’s foundations be searched out. The fathomless deep beneath—upon which the Earth is founded, and the infinitude of heaven above, are here given as emblems of the boundlessness of God’s power, and of the certainty that all his ordinances will be fulfilled. When God’s power can be limited, heaven above will no longer be infinite; and the mighty waters, the foundations of the earth may be fathomed. But the scriptures plainly teach us that the power and wisdom of God, the heights of Heaven, and the depths of the waters under the Earth are[202] alike unfathomable; and no true philosophy ever avers, nor ever did nor ever can aver, a single fact to the contrary.

From the above, it’s clear that God's promises to His people cannot be broken any more than the height of heaven can be surpassed or the depths of the Earth can be fully explored. The endless depths below, upon which the Earth is built, and the vastness of heaven above serve as symbols of the limitless power of God and the assurance that all His decrees will be fulfilled. When God’s power can be constrained, heaven above will no longer be boundless; and the mighty waters, the foundations of the Earth, will become knowable. However, the scriptures clearly teach us that the power and wisdom of God, the heights of Heaven, and the depths of the waters beneath the Earth are[202] equally unfathomable; and no genuine philosophy ever claims, nor has ever claimed, nor ever will claim, a single fact to the contrary.

In all the religions of the Earth the words “up” and “above” are associated with a region of peace and happiness. Heaven is always spoken of as above the Earth. The scriptures invariable convey the same idea:—

In all the religions around the world, the words “up” and “above” are linked to a place of peace and happiness. Heaven is always referred to as above the Earth. The scriptures consistently express the same idea:—

Deut. xxvi., 15—“Look down from Thy holy habitation, from Heaven, and bless Thy people Israel.”

Deut. xxvi., 15—“Look down from Your holy dwelling in Heaven and bless Your people Israel.”

Exodus xix., 20—“And the Lord came down upon Mount Sinai.”

Exodus 19:20—“And the Lord came down on Mount Sinai.”

Psalm cii., 19—“For he hath looked down from the height of his sanctuary: from Heaven did the Lord behold the Earth.”

Psalm 102:19—“For he has looked down from the height of his sanctuary: from Heaven the Lord sees the Earth.”

Isaiah lxiii., 15—“Look down from Heaven, and behold from the habitation of Thy holiness and of Thy glory.”

Isaiah lxiii., 15—“Look down from Heaven, and see from the place where You live in holiness and glory.”

Psalm ciii., 11—“For as the Heaven is high above the Earth.”

Psalm 103:11—“For as the heaven is high above the earth.”

2 Kings ii., 11—“And Elijah went up by a whirlwind into Heaven.”

2 Kings 2:11—“And Elijah was taken up into Heaven by a whirlwind.”

Mark xvi., 10—“So then after the Lord had spoken unto them he was received up into Heaven.”

Mark xvi., 10—“After the Lord had spoken to them, he was taken up into Heaven.”

Luke xxiv., 51—“And it came to pass, while He blessed them, He was parted from them, and carried up into Heaven.”

Luke xxiv., 51—“And while He was blessing them, He was taken away from them and went up into Heaven.”

[203]

[203]

If the Earth is a globe revolving at the rate of above a thousand miles an hour all this language of scripture is necessarily fallacious. The terms “up” and “down,” and “above” and “below,” are words without meaning, at best are merely relative—indicative of no absolute or certain direction. That which is “up” at noon-day, is directly “down” at midnight. Heaven can only be spoken of as “above,” and the scriptures can only be read correctly for a single moment out of the twenty-four hours; for before the sentence “Heaven is high above the Earth” could be uttered, the speaker would be descending from the meridian where Heaven was above him, and his eye although unmoved would be fixed upon a point millions of miles away from his first position. Hence in all the ceremonials of religion, where the hands and eyes are raised upwards to Heaven, nay when Christ himself “lifted up his eyes to Heaven and said, Father, the hour is come,” his gaze would be sweeping along the firmament at rapidly varying angles, and with such incomprehensible velocity that a fixed point of observation, and a definite position, as indicating the seat or throne of “Him that sitteth in the Heavens” would be an impossibility.

If the Earth is a globe spinning at over a thousand miles an hour, all this language in scripture becomes flawed. The words “up” and “down,” and “above” and “below,” lose their meaning; at best, they are just relative—indicating no absolute or certain direction. What is “up” at noon is directly “down” at midnight. Heaven can only be referred to as “above,” and the scriptures can only be interpreted correctly for one moment out of the twenty-four hours; because before the phrase “Heaven is high above the Earth” can be said, the speaker would already be moving away from the point where Heaven was above him, and his gaze, even if unchanged, would be focused on a spot millions of miles from his original position. Therefore, in all the rituals of religion, where hands and eyes are raised towards Heaven, and even when Christ himself “lifted up his eyes to Heaven and said, Father, the hour is come,” his gaze would be sweeping across the sky at rapidly changing angles and with such incredible speed that a fixed point of reference, and a definite position indicating the seat or throne of “Him that sitteth in the Heavens” would be impossible.

Again: the religious world have always believed and meditated upon the word “Heaven” as representing an infinite region of joy and safety, of[204] rest and happiness unspeakable; as “the place of God’s residence, the dwelling place of angels and the blessed; the true palace of God, entirely separated from the impurities and imperfections, the alterations and changes of the lower world; where He reigns in eternal peace. * * It is the sacred mansion of light, and joy, and glory.[45]” But if there is a plurality of worlds, millions upon millions, nay, an “infinity of worlds,” if the universe is filled with innumerable systems of burning suns, and rapidly revolving planets, intermingled with rushing comets and whirling satellites, all dashing and sweeping through space in directions, and with velocities surpassing all human comprehension, and terrible even to contemplate, where is the place of rest and safety? Where is the true and unchangeable “palace of God?” In what direction is Heaven to be found? Where is the liberated human soul to find its home—its refuge from change and motion, from uncertainty and danger? Is it to wander for ever in a labyrinth of rolling worlds? To struggle for ever in a never ending maze of revolving suns and systems? To be never at rest, but for ever seeking to avoid some vortex of attraction—some whirlpool of gravitation? The belief in the existence of Heaven, as a region of peace and harmony[205] “extending (above the Earth) through all extent,” and beyond the influence of natural laws and restless elements, is jeopardised, if not destroyed, by a false and usurping astronomy, which has no better foundation than human conceit and presumption. If this ill-founded, unsupported philosophy is admitted by the religious mind, it can no longer say that—

Again: the religious world has always believed and reflected on the term “Heaven” as representing an infinite realm of joy and safety, of rest and indescribable happiness; as “the place of God’s residence, the home of angels and the blessed; the true palace of God, completely separate from the impurities and imperfections, the changes and fluctuations of the lower world; where He reigns in eternal peace. * * It is the sacred mansion of light, joy, and glory.[45]” But if there are countless worlds, millions upon millions, even an “infinity of worlds,” if the universe is filled with endless systems of burning suns and rapidly orbiting planets, mixed with fast-moving comets and spinning satellites, all rushing through space in directions and at speeds beyond human understanding, and overwhelming even to think about, where is the place of rest and safety? Where is the true and unchanging “palace of God?” In what direction can Heaven be found? Where can the liberated human soul find its home—its refuge from change and motion, from uncertainty and danger? Is it destined to wander forever in a maze of rolling worlds? To struggle endlessly in a never-ending tangle of revolving suns and systems? To be never at rest, but always trying to escape some vortex of attraction—some whirlpool of gravitation? The belief in the existence of Heaven, as a realm of peace and harmony “extending (above the Earth) through all extent,” and beyond the influence of natural laws and restless elements, is threatened, if not destroyed, by a misguided and arrogant astronomy, which has no better foundation than human pride and arrogance. If this unfounded, unsupported philosophy is accepted by the religious mind, it can no longer assert that—

“Far above the sun, and stars, and skies,
In realms of endless light and love,
My Father’s mansion lies.”

[45] Cruden’s Concordance, article “Heaven.”

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Cruden’s Concordance, article “Heaven.”

The modern theoretical astronomy affirms that the Moon is a solid opaque, non-luminous body; that it is, in fact, nothing less than a material world. It has even been mapped out into continents, islands, seas, lakes, volcanoes, &c., &c. The nature of its atmosphere and character of its productions and possible inhabitants have been discussed with as much freedom as though our philosophers were quite as familiar with it as they are with the different objects and localities upon Earth. The light, too, with which the Moon so beautifully illuminates the firmament is declared to be only borrowed—to be only the light of the Sun intercepted and reflected upon the Earth. These doctrines are not only opposed by a formidable array of well-ascertained facts (as given in previous sections), but they are totally denied by the scriptures. The Sun and[206] Moon and Stars are never referred to as worlds, but simply as lights to rule alternately in the firmament.

Modern theoretical astronomy confirms that the Moon is a solid, opaque, non-luminous body; essentially, it's a material world. It has even been mapped out into continents, islands, seas, lakes, volcanoes, etc. The nature of its atmosphere and the characteristics of its resources and potential inhabitants have been discussed with as much confidence as if our scientists were just as familiar with it as they are with various objects and locations on Earth. The light that the Moon casts so beautifully upon the sky is said to be merely borrowed—it's actually the Sun's light that gets intercepted and reflected onto Earth. These ideas are not only challenged by a strong collection of well-established facts (as mentioned in previous sections), but they are also completely contradicted by scripture. The Sun, Moon, and Stars are never referred to as worlds, but simply as lights that alternate in the sky.

Genesis i., 14, 16—“And God said let there be lights in the firmament of the Heaven to divide the day from the night. * * * And God made two great lights—the greater light to rule the day, and the lesser light to rule the night.”

Genesis 1:14, 16—“And God said, ‘Let there be lights in the sky to separate the day from the night.’ * * * And God made two great lights—the larger one to govern the day and the smaller one to govern the night.”

Psalm cxxxvi., 7, 9—“O give thanks to Him that made great lights: the Sun to rule by day, the Moon and Stars to rule by night.”

Psalm cxxxvi., 7, 9—“Give thanks to the One who created great lights: the Sun to govern the day, the Moon and Stars to govern the night.”

Jeremiah, xxxi., 35—“The Sun is given for a light by day, and the ordinances of the Moon and of the Stars for a light by night.”

Jeremiah, xxxi., 35—“The Sun provides light during the day, and the rules of the Moon and Stars give light at night.”

Ezekiel, xxxii., 7, 8—“I will cover the Sun with a cloud; and the Moon shall not give her light.” “All the bright lights of Heaven will I make dark over thee.”

Ezekiel, xxxii., 7, 8—“I will cover the sun with a cloud; and the moon will not give its light.” “I will make all the bright lights of heaven dark over you.”

Psalm cxlviii., 3—“Praise him Sun and Moon, praise him all ye Stars of light.”

Psalm 148:3—"Praise him, Sun and Moon; praise him, all you shining Stars."

Isaiah xiii., 10—“The Sun shall be darkened in his going forth, and the Moon shall not cause her light to shine.”

Isaiah xiii., 10—“The Sun will be darkened when it rises, and the Moon will not give her light.”

Matthew xxiv., 29—“Immediately after the tribulation of those days shall the Sun be darkened, and the Moon shall not give her light.”

Matthew xxiv., 29—“Right after the troubles of those days, the Sun will be darkened, and the Moon will not shine.”

Isaiah ix., 19, 20—“The Sun shall be no more thy light by day; neither for brightness shall[207] the Moon give light unto thee. * * Thy Sun shall no more go down; neither shall thy Moon withdraw itself.”

Isaiah ix., 19, 20—“The Sun will no longer be your light during the day; nor will the Moon give you light. * * Your Sun will never set again; nor will your Moon ever fade away.”

Psalm cxxxvi., 7 to 9—“To him that made great lights, the Sun to rule by day, the Moon and Stars to rule by night.”

Psalm 136, 7 to 9—“To the one who made great lights, the Sun to rule over the day, the Moon and Stars to rule over the night.”

Job xxv., 5—“Behold even to the Moon, and it shineth not.”

Job xxv., 5—“Look, even the Moon doesn’t shine.”

Ecclesiastes xii., 2—“While the Sun, or the light, or the Moon, or the Stars be not darkened.”

Ecclesiastes xii., 2—“Before the sun, light, moon, or stars become dark.”

Isaiah xxx., 26—“The light of the Moon shall be as the light of the Sun; and the light of the Sun shall be sevenfold.”

Isaiah xxx., 26—“The light of the Moon will be like the light of the Sun; and the light of the Sun will be seven times brighter.”

Deuteronomy xxxiii., 14—“And for the precious fruits brought forth by the Sun, and for the precious things put forth by the Moon.”

Deuteronomy xxxiii., 14—“And for the valuable fruits produced by the Sun, and for the valuable things created by the Moon.”

In the very first of the passages above quoted the doctrine is enunciated that various distinct and independent lights were created. But that two great lights were specially called into existence for the purpose of ruling the day and the night. The Sun and the Moon are declared to be these great and alternately ruling lights. Nothing is here said, nor is it in any other part of scripture said, that the Sun is a great light, and that the Moon shines only by reflection. The Sun is called the “greater light to rule the day,” and the Moon the “lesser light to rule the night.” Although of these two “great lights” one is[208] less than the other, each is declared to shine with its own light. Hence in Deuteronomy, c. 33, v. 14, it is affirmed that certain fruits are specially brought forth by the influence of the Sun’s light, and that certain other productions are “put forth by the Moon.” That the light of the sun is influential in encouraging the growth of certain natural products; and that the light of the Moon has a distinct influence in promoting the increase of certain other natural substances, is a matter well known to those who are familiar with horticultural and agricultural phenomena; and it is abundantly proved by chemical evidence that the two lights are distinct in character and in action upon various elements. This distinction is beautifully preserved throughout the sacred scriptures. In no single instance are the two lights confounded. On the contrary, in the New Testament, St. Paul affirms with authority, that “there is one glory of the Sun, and another glory of the Moon, and another glory of the Stars.”

In the very first of the quotes above, the idea is stated that different, separate lights were created. But it’s noted that two great lights were specifically made to govern the day and the night. The Sun and the Moon are identified as these great, alternating lights. There is no mention here, nor in any other part of scripture, that the Sun is a great light and that the Moon only shines by reflecting it. The Sun is referred to as the “greater light to rule the day,” while the Moon is called the “lesser light to rule the night.” Although one of these two “great lights” is[208] smaller than the other, both are said to shine with their own light. Thus, in Deuteronomy, chapter 33, verse 14, it states that certain fruits are specifically produced by the Sun’s light, and that certain other things are “brought forth by the Moon.” It is well known to those familiar with horticulture and agriculture that the Sun’s light promotes the growth of certain natural products, while the Moon’s light distinctly influences the growth of other natural substances. Chemical evidence thoroughly supports that these two lights have different characteristics and effects on various elements. This distinction is beautifully maintained throughout the sacred scriptures. At no point are the two lights confused. On the contrary, in the New Testament, St. Paul asserts with authority that “there is one glory of the Sun, and another glory of the Moon, and another glory of the Stars.”

The same fact of the difference in the two lights, and their independence of each other is maintained in the scriptures to the last. “The Sun became black as sackcloth of hair, and the Moon became as blood.” If the Moon is only a reflector, the moment the Sun becomes black her surface will be blackened also, and not remain[209] as blood, while the Sun is dark and black as sackcloth of hair!

The same fact about the difference between the two lights and their independence from each other is maintained in the scriptures until the end. “The Sun became black like sackcloth, and the Moon turned red like blood.” If the Moon is just a reflector, then the instant the Sun goes dark, her surface would also go dark and wouldn't stay red while the Sun is dark and black as sackcloth![209]

Again: the modern system of astronomy teaches that this earth cannot possibly receive light from the Stars, because of their supposed great distance from it: that the fixed Stars are only burning spheres, or Sun’s to their own systems of planets and satellites: and that their light terminates, or no longer produces an active luminosity at the distance of nearly two thousand millions of miles. Here again the scriptures affirm the contrary doctrine.

Again: the modern system of astronomy teaches that this Earth cannot possibly receive light from the stars because of their supposed great distance from it; that the fixed stars are just burning spheres, or suns, to their own systems of planets and satellites; and that their light stops, or no longer produces an active brightness, at a distance of nearly two billion miles. Here again, the scriptures affirm the opposite belief.

Genesis i., 16-17—“He made the Stars also; and God set them in the firmament to give light upon the earth.”

Genesis 1:16-17—“He made the stars too; and God placed them in the sky to provide light for the earth.”

Isaiah xiii., 10—“For the Stars of Heaven and the constellations thereof shall not give their light.”

Isaiah xiii., 10—“For the stars in the sky and their constellations will not shine.”

Ezekiel xxxii., 7—“I will cover the Heaven, and make the Stars thereof dark.”

Ezekiel xxxii., 7—“I will cover the sky, and make its stars dark.”

Joel ii., 10—“The Sun and the Moon shall be dark, and the Stars shall withdraw their shining.”

Joel ii., 10—“The sun and the moon will be dark, and the stars will stop shining.”

Psalm cxlviii., 3—“Praise him Sun and Moon: promise him all ye Stars of Light.”

Psalm 148:3—“Praise him, Sun and Moon; praise him, all you Stars of Light.”

Jeremiah xxxi., 35—“Thus saith the Lord, which giveth the Sun for a light by day; and the ordinances of the Moon and of the Stars for a light by night.”

Jeremiah xxxi., 35—“This is what the Lord says: He gives the Sun as a light during the day and the rules of the Moon and the Stars for a light at night.”

[210]

[210]

Daniel xii., 3—“They that turn many to righteousness shall shine as the Stars for ever and ever.”

Daniel xii., 3—“Those who lead many to righteousness will shine like the Stars forever and ever.”

These quotations place it beyond doubt that the Stars were made expressly to shine in the firmament, and “to give light upon the Earth.” In addition to this language of scripture, we have the evidence of our own eyes that the Stars give abundant light. “What beautiful star-light!” is a common expression: and we all remember the difference between a dark and starless night, and one when the firmament is as it were studded with brilliant luminaries. Travellers inform us that in many parts of the world, where the sky is clear and free from clouds and vapours for weeks together, the Stars appear both larger and brighter than they do in England; and that their light is sufficiently intense to enable them to read and write, and to travel with safety through the most dangerous places.

These quotes make it clear that the stars were specifically created to shine in the sky and "to give light upon the Earth." Besides this scriptural language, we also have the evidence of our own eyes showing that the stars provide a lot of light. "What beautiful starlight!" is a common saying, and we all remember the difference between a dark, starless night and one where the sky is filled with brilliant stars. Travelers tell us that in many parts of the world, where the sky is clear and free of clouds and mist for weeks, the stars appear both larger and brighter than they do in England; and their light is strong enough for people to read and write and to travel safely through the most dangerous areas.

If it be true that the Stars and the Planets are not simply lights, as the scriptures affirm them to be, but magnificent worlds, for the most part much larger than this earth, then it is a very proper question to ask—“are they inhabited?” If the answer be in the affirmative, it is equally proper to inquire “have the first parents in each world been tempted?” If so, “have they[211] fallen?” if so, “Have they required redemption?” And “have they been redeemed?” “Has each world had a separate Redeemer? or has Christ been the Redeemer for every world in the universe?” And if so, “did His suffering and crucifixion on this Earth suffice for the redemption of the fallen inhabitants of all other worlds? Or had He to suffer and die in each world successively? Did the fall of Adam in this world involve in his guilt the inhabitants of all other worlds? Or was the baneful influence of Satan confined to the first parents of this Earth? If so, why so? and if not, why not? But, and if, and why, and again—but it is useless thus to ponder! The Christian philosopher must be confounded! If his religion be to him a living reality, he will turn with loathing or spurn with indignation and disgust, as he would a poisonous reptile, a system of astronomy which creates in his mind so much confusion and uncertainty! But as the system which necessitates such doubts and difficulties has been shown to be purely theoretical; and to have not the slightest foundation in fact, the religious mind has really no cause for apprehension. Not a shadow of doubt remains that this World is the only one created; that the sacred Scriptures contain, in addition to religious and moral doctrines, a true and consistent philosophy; that they were written for[212] the good of mankind, at the direct instigation of God himself; and that all their teachings and promises are truthful, consistent, and reliable. Whoever holds the contrary conclusion is the victim of an arrogant false astronomy, of an equally false and presumptuous geology, or a suicidal method of reasoning—a logic which never demands a proof of its premises, and which therefore leads to conclusions which are contrary to nature, to human experience, and to the direct teaching of God’s word, and therefore contrary to the deepest and most lasting interests of humanity. “God has spoken to man in two voices, the voice of inspiration and the voice of nature. By man’s ignorance they have been made to disagree; but the time will come, and cannot be far distant, when these two languages will strictly accord; when the science of nature will no longer contradict the science of scripture.”[46]

If it's true that the stars and planets aren't just lights, as the scriptures say they are, but incredible worlds, mostly much larger than our Earth, then it's a valid question to ask—“are they inhabited?” If the answer is yes, it's also valid to ask, “have the first parents in each world been tempted?” If so, “have they[211] fallen?” If they have, “have they needed redemption?” And “have they been redeemed?” “Does each world have its own Redeemer, or is Christ the Redeemer for every world in the universe?” And if so, “did His suffering and crucifixion on this Earth suffice for the redemption of the fallen inhabitants of all other worlds? Or did He have to suffer and die in each world one after the other? Did the fall of Adam in this world bring guilt to the inhabitants of all other worlds? Or was Satan's harmful influence limited to the first parents of this Earth? If so, why? And if not, why not? But still, it’s pointless to ponder like this! The Christian philosopher must feel confused! If his faith is a living reality for him, he will reject or be disgusted by a system of astronomy that creates so much confusion and uncertainty in his mind, just like he would reject a poisonous snake! However, since the system that leads to such doubts and difficulties has been shown to be purely theoretical, with no basis in fact, the religious mind really has no reason to worry. There is not a shadow of doubt that this World is the only one created; that the sacred Scriptures contain, in addition to religious and moral teachings, a true and consistent philosophy; that they were written for[212] the benefit of humanity, at the direct guidance of God Himself; and that all their teachings and promises are truthful, consistent, and reliable. Anyone who believes otherwise is falling prey to an arrogant false astronomy, an equally false and presumptuous geology, or a flawed method of reasoning—an approach that never demands proof of its assumptions, which leads to conclusions that contradict nature, human experience, and the direct teaching of God’s word, therefore opposing the deepest and most enduring interests of humanity. “God has spoken to man in two ways, the voice of inspiration and the voice of nature. Due to man's ignorance, they seem to disagree; but the time will come, and it can’t be far off, when these two languages will align perfectly; when the science of nature will no longer contradict the science of scripture.”[46]

[46] Professor Hunt.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Prof. Hunt.

Cui Bono.—“Of all terrors to the generous soul, that Cui bono is the one to be the most zealously avoided. Whether it be proposed to find the magnetic point, or a passage impossible to be utilised if discovered, or a race of men of no good to any human institution extant, and of no good to themselves; or to seek the Unicorn in Madagascar, and when we had found him not[213] to be able to make use of him; or the great central plateau of Australia, where no one could live for centuries to come; or the great African lake, which, for all the good it would do us English folk might as well be in the Moon; or the source of the Nile, the triumphant discovery of which would neither lower the rents nor take off the taxes anywhere—whatever it is, the Cui bono is always a weak and cowardly argument: essentially short-sighted too, seeing that, according to the law of the past, by which we may always safely predicate the future, so much falls into the hands of the seeker, for which he was not looking, and of which he never even knew the existence. The area of the possible is very wide still, and very insignificant and minute, the angle we have staked out and marked impossible. What do we know of the powers which nature has yet in reserve, of the secrets she has still untold, the wealth still concealed? Every day sees new discoveries in the sciences we can investigate at home. What, then, may not lie waiting for the explorers abroad? Weak and short-sighted commercially, the cui bono is worse than both, morally. When we remember the powerful manhood, the patience, unselfishness, courage, devotion, and nobleness of aim which must accompany a perilous enterprise, and which form so great an example, and so heart-stirring[214] to the young and to the wavering, it is no return to barbaric indifference to life to say, better indeed a few deaths for even a commercially useless enterprise—better a few hearths made desolate, and a few wives and mothers left to bear their stately sorrow to the end of time, that the future may rejoice and be strong: better a thousand failures, and a thousand useless undertakings, than the loss of national manhood or the weakening of the national fibre. Quixotism is a folly when the energy which might have achieved conquests over misery and wrong, if rightfully applied, is wasted in fighting windmills; but to forego any great enterprise for fear of the dangers attending, or to check a grand endeavour by the cui bono of ignorance and moral scepticism, is worse than a folly—it is baseness, and a cowardice.[47]

Who benefits?—“Among all the fears that can trouble a generous spirit, the question Cui bono is the one we should avoid most passionately. Whether it’s about searching for a magnetic pole, or exploring a route that would be useless if discovered, or looking for a group of people who would benefit no existing system, and who wouldn’t gain anything for themselves; or trying to find the Unicorn in Madagascar, only to realize we can’t use it when we don’t find it; or investigating the vast central plateau of Australia, where no one could live for ages; or the great African lake, which, as far as good for us English folks goes, might as well be on the Moon; or aiming to uncover the source of the Nile, whose successful discovery would neither lower rents nor reduce taxes anywhere—whatever it is, the Cui bono is always a weak and cowardly argument: fundamentally shortsighted too, given that, based on the lessons of the past, which allow us to correctly predict the future, so much falls into the hands of the seeker that he wasn’t looking for, and of which he never even knew the existence. The realm of the possible is still vast, and the limited viewpoint we have marked as impossible is very trivial. What do we know about the abilities that nature still has in store, the secrets she has yet to reveal, the wealth still hidden? Every day, we see new discoveries in the sciences we can explore right here at home. So, what might not be waiting for explorers abroad? Commercially weak and shortsighted, the cui bono is even worse morally. When we think about the powerful manhood, the patience, selflessness, courage, commitment, and noble aims that must accompany a risky venture, which serve as such a powerful example and are so inspiring to the young and the uncertain, it is not a return to barbaric indifference to life to say, indeed better a few deaths for even a commercially pointless venture—better a few homes left desolate, and a few wives and mothers carrying their profound grief for all time, so that the future may be joyful and strong: better a thousand failures and a thousand futile attempts than the loss of national manhood or the weakening of the national spirit. Quixotism is foolish when the energy that could have brought about victories over suffering and injustice is wasted battling windmills; but to abandon any significant endeavor out of fear of the risks involved, or to halt a grand project due to the shortsightedness of cui bono and moral doubt, is worse than foolishness—it is disgraceful and cowardly.[47]

[47] Daily News of April 5, 1865.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Daily News from April 5, 1865.

The above quotation is an excellent general answer to all those who may, in reference to the subject of this work, or to anything which is not of immediate worldly interest, obtrude the cui bono? But as a special reply it may be claimed for the subject of these pages—

The above quote is a great general response to anyone who might, in relation to this work or anything that isn't of immediate worldly interest, push the cui bono? But as a specific reply, it can be argued for the subject of these pages—

First,—It is more edifying, more satisfactory, and in every sense far better that we should know the true and detect the false. Thereby the mind becomes fixed, established upon an eternal[215] foundation, and no longer subject to those waverings and changes, those oscillations and fluctuations which are ever the result of falsehood. To know the truth and to embody it in our lives and purposes our progress must be safe and rapid, and almost unlimited in extent. None can say to what it may lead or where it may culminate. Who shall dare to set bounds to the capabilities of the mind, or to fix a limit to human progress? Whatever may be the destiny of the human race truth alone will help and secure its realisation.

First,—It’s more enlightening, more satisfying, and overall much better for us to know the truth and spot the false. This way, our minds become stable, anchored on a lasting foundation, and are no longer subject to the wavering, changes, and fluctuations that always come from falsehood. To know the truth and to integrate it into our lives and goals makes our progress safe, swift, and nearly limitless. No one can predict where it might lead or what it might achieve. Who would dare to limit the potential of the mind or impose a boundary on human progress? Whatever the future holds for humanity, only truth can aid and ensure its realization.[215]

Second,—Having detected the fundamental falsehoods of modern astronomy, and discovered that the Earth is a plane, and motionless, and the only material world in existence, we are able to demonstrate the actual character of the Universe. In doing this we are enabled to prove that all the so-called arguments with which so many scientific but irreligious men have assailed the scriptures, are absolutely false; have no foundation except in their own astronomical and geological theories, which being demonstrably fallacious, they fall to the ground as valueless. They can no longer be wielded as weapons against religion. If used at all it can only be that their weakness and utter worthlessness will be exposed. Atheism and every other form of Infidelity are thus rendered helpless. Their sting is cut away,[216] and their poison dissipated. The irreligious philosopher can no longer obtrude his theories as things proved wherewith to test the teachings of scripture. He must now himself be tested. He must be forced to demonstrate his premises, a thing which he has never yet attempted; and if he fails in this respect his impious vanity, self-conceit and utter disregard of justice, will become so clearly apparent that his presence in the ranks of science will no longer be tolerated. All theory must be put aside, and the questions at issue must be decided by independent and practical evidence. This has been done. The process—the modus operandi, and the conclusions derived therefrom have been given in the early sections of this work. They are entirely consonant with the teachings of scripture. The scriptures are therefore literally true, and must henceforth either alone or in conjunction with practical science be used as a standard by which to test the truth or falsehood of every system which does or may hereafter exist. Philosophy is no longer to be employed as a test of scriptural truth, but the scriptures may and ought to be the test of all philosophy. Not that they are to be used as a test of philosophy simply because they are thought or believed to be the word of God, but because their literal teachings in regard to science and natural phenomena, are demonstrably[217] correct. It is quite as faulty and unjust for the religious devotee to urge the scriptures against the theories of the philosopher simply because he believes them to be true, as it is for the philosopher to urge his theories against the scriptures only because he disbelieves the one and believes the other. The whole matter must be taken out of the region of belief and disbelief. The Christian will be strengthened and his mind more completely satisfied by having it in his power to demonstrate that the scriptures are philosophically true, than he could possibly be by the simple belief in their validity, unsupported by practical evidence. On the other hand the Atheist who is met by the Christian upon purely scientific grounds, and who is not belaboured with enunciations of what his antagonist believes, will be led to listen and to pay more regard and respect to the reasons advanced than he could possibly concede to the purely religious argument, or to an argument founded upon faith alone. If it can be shown to the atheistical philosopher that his astronomical and geological theories are fallacious, and that all the expressions in the scriptures which have reference to natural phenomena are literally true, he will of necessity be led to admit that, apart from all other considerations, if the philosophy of the scriptures is demonstrably correct, then possibly[218] their spiritual and moral teachings may also be true; and if so, they may and indeed must have had a divine origin; and if so they are truly the “word of God,” and after all, religion is a grand reality; and the theories which speculative adventurous philosophers have advanced are nothing better than treacherous quicksands into which many of the deepest thinkers have been engulphed and lost. By this process many highly intelligent minds have been led to desert the ranks of Atheism and to rejoin the army of Christian soldiers and devotees. Many have rejoiced almost beyond expression that the subject of the Earth’s true form and position in the universe had ever been brought under their notice; and doubtless great numbers will yet be induced to return to that allegiance which plain demonstrable truth demands and deserves. To induce numbers of earnest thinking human beings to leave the rebellious cause of Atheism and false philosophy; to return to a full recognition of the beauty and truthfulness of the scriptures, and to a participation in the joy and satisfaction which religion can alone supply, is a grand and cheering result, and one which furnishes the noblest possible answer to the ever ready “Cui Bono.”

Second,—Having identified the key falsehoods of modern astronomy and found that the Earth is flat, stationary, and the only material world that exists, we can clarify the true nature of the Universe. In doing so, we can prove that all the so-called arguments used by numerous scientific yet irreligious individuals against the scriptures are completely false; they have no foundation other than their own astronomical and geological theories, which are clearly flawed and therefore worthless. They can no longer be used as weapons against religion. If they are used, it will only reveal their weakness and total worthlessness. Atheism and other forms of disbelief are rendered powerless. Their impact is diminished, and their toxic influence dissipated. The irreligious philosopher can no longer push his theories as proven facts to challenge the teachings of scripture. Now, he must prove his own claims—a task he has never attempted. If he fails, his arrogant vanity, self-importance, and blatant disregard for justice will become obvious, making it intolerable for him to remain in the scientific community. All theory must be set aside, and the relevant questions must be resolved through independent and practical evidence. This has already been accomplished. The process—the modus operandi—and the conclusions drawn from it have been presented in the early sections of this work. They are fully compatible with the teachings of scripture. Therefore, the scriptures are literally true and should henceforth serve as a standard—either alone or alongside practical science—for evaluating the truth or falsehood of any existing or future system. Philosophy should no longer be used to measure scriptural truth, but instead, the scriptures should be the benchmark for all philosophy. This isn’t because they are thought or believed to be the word of God, but because their literal teachings about science and natural phenomena are demonstrably accurate. It is equally flawed and unfair for the religious believer to counter the theories of the philosopher simply because he believes them to be true as it is for the philosopher to challenge the scriptures merely because he disbelieves one and believes the other. This entire matter must be removed from the realm of belief and disbelief. A Christian will find greater strength and satisfaction in being able to demonstrate that the scriptures are philosophically valid than he could ever find through mere belief in their truth without practical evidence. Conversely, an Atheist who meets a Christian on purely scientific terms—and isn’t bombarded with assertions about what his opponent believes—will be more inclined to listen and consider the reasons presented rather than dismiss a purely religious argument or one founded solely on faith. If it can be shown to the Atheist philosopher that his astronomical and geological theories are incorrect and that the scriptural references to natural phenomena are literally accurate, he will inevitably have to admit that, aside from all other considerations, if the philosophy of the scriptures is demonstrably sound, then perhaps their spiritual and moral teachings could also be true; and if so, they must have a divine origin; and if so, they are indeed the “word of God,” and ultimately, religion is a profound reality; and the theories proposed by speculative philosophers are merely treacherous traps into which many deep thinkers have fallen and been lost. Through this process, many highly intelligent individuals have been encouraged to leave Atheism and return to the ranks of Christian believers and followers. Many have felt an overwhelming sense of gratitude that the discussion around the true shape and position of the Earth within the universe has been brought to their attention; and undoubtedly, many more will be inspired to return to the allegiance that straightforward, demonstrable truth asserts and merits. Encouraging earnest, thoughtful individuals to abandon the defiant stance of Atheism and false philosophies and to embrace the beauty and truth of the scriptures, along with the joy and fulfillment that religion alone can provide, is a significant and uplifting outcome, and one that offers the finest possible response to the ever-pertinent “Who benefits?.”

In addition to the numerous quotations which have been given from sacred scriptures, and[219] proved to be true and consistent, it may be useful briefly to refer to the following difficulties which have been raised by the scientific objectors to scriptural authority:—“As the earth is a globe, and as all its vast collections of water—its oceans, lakes, &c., are sustained by the earthy crust beneath them, and as beneath this ‘crust of the earth’ everything is in a red-hot molten condition to what place could the excess of waters retire which are said in the scriptures to have overwhelmed the whole world? It could not sink into the centre of the earth, for the fire is there so intense that the whole would be rapidly volatilised, and driven away as vapour. It could not evaporate, for when the atmosphere is charged with watery vapour beyond a certain degree it begins to condense and throw back the water in the form of rain; so that the waters of the flood could not sink from the earth’s surface, nor remain in the atmosphere; therefore if the earth had ever been deluged at all, it would have remained so to this day. But as it is not universally flooded so it never could have been, and the account given in the scriptures is false.” All this specious reasoning is founded upon the assumption that the earth is a globe: this doctrine, however, being false, all the difficulties quickly vanish. The earth being “founded on the seas” would be as readily cleared of its superfluous[220] water as would the deck of a ship on emerging from a storm. Or as a rock in the ocean would be cleared after the raging waves which for a time overwhelmed it had subsided.

In addition to the many quotes that have been cited from sacred texts and shown to be accurate and coherent, it might be helpful to briefly mention the following challenges posed by those who question the authority of scripture: “Since the Earth is a globe, and all its vast bodies of water—like oceans and lakes—are supported by the solid crust below them, and since beneath this 'crust of the Earth' everything is in a superheated molten state, where could the excess water go that the scriptures say covered the entire world? It couldn't sink to the center of the Earth, because the heat there is so intense that everything would quickly turn to vapor. It couldn't evaporate either, because when the atmosphere is loaded with water vapor beyond a certain point, it starts to condense and returns the water as rain; so the waters of the flood couldn't disappear from the surface of the Earth, nor could they stay in the atmosphere. Therefore, if the Earth had ever been flooded, it would still be flooded today. But since it isn't universally flooded, it never could have been, which means the account in the scriptures is false.” All of this misleading reasoning is based on the assumption that the Earth is a globe. However, this idea is incorrect, and all the problems vanish quickly. The Earth, being "founded on the seas," could easily rid itself of excess water just like a ship's deck can clear after a storm, or like a rock in the ocean after the turbulent waves that temporarily covered it have calmed down.

“Thou coveredst the Earth with the deep as with a garment; the waters stood above the mountains. At thy rebuke they fled; and at the voice of thy thunder they hasted away ... down by the valleys unto the place which thou hast founded for them.”[48]

“You covered the Earth with the deep like a garment; the waters stood above the mountains. At your rebuke, they fled; and at the sound of your thunder, they hurried away ... down by the valleys to the place you have established for them.”[48]

[48] Psalm civ.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Psalm 104.

“Thou didst cleave the Earth with rivers; and the overflowing of the waters passed by; and the deep uttered his voice and lifted up his hands on high.”[49]

“You split the Earth with rivers; and the floodwaters flowed by; and the deep called out and raised its hands on high.”[49]

[49] Hab. iii. 9-10.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Hab. 3:9-10.

The surface of the Earth standing above the level of the surrounding seas, the waters of the flood would simply and naturally run down by the valleys and rivers into the “great deep,”—into which “the waters returned from off the earth continually ... until the tenth month, and on the first day of the month were the tops of the mountains seen.”[50]

The land of the Earth that is higher than the surrounding seas, the floodwaters would easily flow down through the valleys and rivers into the “great deep,”—where “the waters kept receding from the earth continually ... until the tenth month, and on the first day of the month, the tops of the mountains appeared.”[50]

[50] Gen. viii. 2-5.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Gen. 8:2-5.

Again; as the Earth is a Globe and in continual motion, how could Jesus on being “taken up into an exceedingly high mountain see all the kingdoms of the world, in a moment of time?” Or, when “He cometh with clouds and every eye shall see him,” how could it be possible,[221] seeing that at least twenty-four hours would elapse before every part of the Earth would be turned to the same point? But it has been demonstrated that the Earth is a Plane and motionless, and that from a great eminence every part of its surface could be seen at once; and, at once—at the same moment, could every eye behold Him, when “coming in a cloud with power and great glory.”

Again; since the Earth is a globe and constantly moving, how could Jesus, when he was “taken up into an exceedingly high mountain,” see all the kingdoms of the world in an instant? Or, when “He comes with clouds and every eye shall see him,” how could that be possible, given that it would take at least twenty-four hours for every part of the Earth to rotate to the same point? However, it has been proven that the Earth is flat and motionless, and from a high viewpoint, every part of its surface could be seen at once; and at that moment, every eye could see Him when “coming in a cloud with power and great glory.” [221]

FINIS.

FINIS.

S. HAYWARD, PRINTER, GREEN STREET, BATH.

S. HAYWARD, PRINTER, GREEN STREET, BATH.


Transcriber’s Notes

Inconsistent and unusual spelling, punctuation etc. have been retained; accents on (French) words have not been corrected. The inconsistent nesting and pairing of quote marks often makes it difficult to determine where a quote starts or ends.

Inconsistent and unusual spelling, punctuation, etc. have been kept; accents on (French) words have not been corrected. The inconsistent nesting and pairing of quotation marks often makes it hard to tell where a quote begins or ends.

Page 20: ... as represented in figure 10 ... changed to ... as represented in figure 9 ....

Page 20: ... as shown in figure 10 ... changed to ... as shown in figure 9 ....

Page 13, A B is the line-of-sight, and C D the surface of the water ...: C nor D are depicted in the illustration.

Page 13, A B is the line of sight, and C D is the surface of the water...: C and D are not shown in the illustration.

Page 27, Fig. 15 and accompanying text: the number 4 in the illustration appears to be misplaced.

Page 27, Fig. 15 and accompanying text: the number 4 in the illustration seems to be in the wrong spot.

Page 77, “Sun’s altitude at the time of Southing ...: there is no closing quote mark.

Page 77, “Sun’s altitude when it’s at its highest ...: there is no closing quote mark.

Page 142, 143 and Fig. 31: the lower case reference letters are present as upper case letters in the illustration.

Page 142, 143 and Fig. 31: the lowercase reference letters appear as uppercase letters in the illustration.

Page 193, ... only the dry land was called earth,” ...: the opening quote marks are missing.

Page 193, "... only the dry land was called earth," ...: the opening quote marks are missing.

Page 198, ... stretchet out the earth above the waters ...: as printed in the source document; both "stretched" and "stretcheth" appear in other sources.

Page 198, ... stretched out the earth above the waters ...: as printed in the source document; both "stretched" and "stretcheth" appear in other sources.

Page 211, ... “did His suffering and crucifixion ...: the closing quote mark is lacking.

Page 211, ... “did His suffering and crucifixion ...: the closing quote mark is missing.

Changes made:

No changes made.

Footnotes and illustrations have been moved out of text paragraphs.

Footnotes and illustrations have been placed outside of the text paragraphs.

Some obvious minor typographical and punctuation errors have been corrected silently.

Some clear minor typos and punctuation mistakes have been fixed quietly.

Terrestial has been changed to terrestrial (3x), trignometry to trigonometry (2x), incondescent to incandescent (3x).

Terrestial has been changed to terrestrial (3x), trignometry to trigonometry (2x), incondescent to incandescent (3x).

Illustration captions for Figs. 27, 28 and 31-34 have been added.

Illustration captions for Figs. 27, 28, and 31-34 have been added.

Page 10: ... to lesson the difference ... changed to ... to lessen the difference ....

Page 10: ... to lessen the difference ...

Page 51: ... from Port Jackson to Cape Horn as 8.000 miles ... changed to ... from Port Jackson to Cape Horn as 8,000 miles ....

Page 51: ... from Port Jackson to Cape Horn as 8,000 miles ... changed to ... from Port Jackson to Cape Horn as 8,000 miles ....

Page 64-65: replicated text deleted.

Page 64-65: replicated text removed.

Page 133: exclamation mark inserted after Neptune has only one third of this volume (as in surrounding text).

Page 133: an exclamation mark was added after Neptune has only one third of this volume (as in surrounding text).

Page 134: Professer Schumacher changed to Professor Schumacher.

Page 134: Professor Schumacher changed to Professor Schumacher.

Page 139: M. Foucalt’s communication describing his experiments ... changed to M. Foucault’s communication describing his experiments ....

Page 139: M. Foucault’s communication describing his experiments ... changed to M. Foucault’s communication describing his experiments ....

Page 141: Ille sante aux yeux ... changed to Il saute aux yeux ....

Page 141: It jumps out at you ... changed to It stands out ....

Page 171: ... south cost of Norway ... changed to ... south coast of Norway ...; The Troudhjem Light ... changed to The Trondhjem Light ...; Lower Farn Island Light changed to Lower Farne Island Light.

Page 171: ... south coast of Norway ... changed to ... south coast of Norway ...; The Troudhjem Light ... changed to The Trondhjem Light ...; Lower Farn Island Light changed to Lower Farne Island Light.

Page 193: ... the heavenly bodies are Sun’s ... changed to ... the heavenly bodies are Suns ....

Page 193: ... the heavenly bodies are Suns ...


Download ePUB

If you like this ebook, consider a donation!